Amendments To Federal Bankruptcy Rules, Official Forms, And Federal Rules Of Evidence Are Now In Effect

Bankruptcy Rule Amendments. As reported in a post last month, this year's amendments to the Federal Rules of Bankruptcy Procedure have now taken effect today, December 1, 2011.

Amended Official Bankruptcy Forms. In addition to the national bankruptcy rules, revisions have been made to a number of the official bankruptcy forms. This sentence contains a link to a set of these updated official forms.

Amended Federal Rules Of Evidence. Finally, a restyled edition of the Federal Rules of Evidence also goes into effect today; follow the link in this sentence for the revised evidence rules. Although the substance of the rules of evidence has not changed, revisions in the numbering of some subsections and the style of how the rules are phrased have been implemented.

Amendments To The Federal Bankruptcy Rules, Including Rule 2019, To Take Effect December 1, 2011

Almost every year, changes are made to the set of rules that govern how bankruptcy cases are managed -- the Federal Rules of Bankruptcy Procedure. The changes address issues identified by an Advisory Committee made up of federal judges, bankruptcy attorneys, and others. There are seven amendments to the national bankruptcy rules this year. Some affect bankruptcy cases involving individuals but major revisions have been made to Rule 2019, which governs disclosures by ad hoc committees and groups of creditors or equity security holders in Chapter 11 business bankruptcy cases and in Chapter 9 municipality cases. All of the new amendments will take effect on December 1, 2011, barring unlikely action by Congress.

Read All About It. A copy of the Advisory Committee's report, together with a redline of the new rule amendments, is available by following the link in this sentence. The report also includes the Advisory Committee's notes on each new or amended rule.

Significant Revisions to Rule 2019: Controversy Resolved? Over the past several years, Rule 2019, the national bankruptcy rule regarding disclosure by unofficial committees and groups of hedge fund and other investors, has been the subject of much litigation and a number of conflicting court decisions, including opposite views from different bankruptcy judges in Delaware. Follow the link in this sentence for a collection of previous posts on the blog discussing those past decisions and the controversy surrounding old Rule 2019.

In an attempt to put the controversy to rest, the Advisory Committee drafted, and the Supreme Court has approved, a new Rule 2019, which will take effect on December 1, 2011. It requires disclosure in Chapter 11 and Chapter 9 cases by unofficial committees, groups and entities consisting of or representing multiple creditors or equity security holders that are (1) acting in concert to advance common interests, and (2) not composed entirely of affiliates or insiders of each other, and which take a position before the court or solicit votes on confirmation of a plan.

The new rule focuses on the nature and purpose of the committee or group, rather than how it names itself. In contrast, old Rule 2019 covered entities and committees, leading to disputes over whether a self-designated "group" had to make disclosures. Also dropped from the final version of new Rule 2019 was language from the initial proposed rule amendments that would have permitted the court to require disclosure of the amount paid for a disclosable economic interest, another topic of much prior controversy. 

Disclosable Economic Interest. Amended Rule 2019 is built around the defined term "disclosable economic interest," which is defined to mean the following:

Any claim, interest, pledge, lien, option, participation, derivative instrument, or any other right or derivative right granting the holder an economic interest that is affected by the value, acquisition, or disposition of a claim or interest.

Required Disclosures Under Rule 2019. A covered group or committee will be required to file a verified statement disclosing facts and circumstances on the following topics listed in new Rule 2019(c):

  • The group or committee's formation;
  • Any entity's employment and the party at whose instance the employment was arranged;
  • Each member's and entity's name, address, and nature and amount of their disclosable economic interest;
  • For each member of a group or committee claiming to represent any entity beyond the group's members, the date of acquisition by quarter and year of each disclosable economic interest, unless acquired more than a year before the bankruptcy petition was filed; and
  • Where applicable, a copy of any instrument authorizing the entity, group, or committee to act on behalf of creditors or equity security holders.

If any material changes have occurred since the group or committee's last statement, a supplemental statement must be filed whenever the group or committee takes a position before the court or solicits votes on confirmation of a plan.

Consequences of Non-Compliance With Rule 2019. A party in interest or the court on its own motion can determine whether there has been any failure to comply with the new Rule 2019's requirements. If so, the court may refuse to permit the group or committee from being heard in the case and/or hold invalid any authority, objection, or plan votes made or obtained by the non-complying entity, group or committee, as well as grant any other appropriate relief.

Other Business Bankruptcy Rule Amendments. In addition to Rule 2019, three of the other new amendments directly impact business bankruptcy cases.

  • New Rule 1004.2 applies in Chapter 15 cross-border bankruptcy cases. It requires that any petition for recognition of a foreign proceeding under Chapter 15 of the Bankruptcy Code state the center of the debtor's main interests (aka, "COMI"), as well as each country in which a foreign proceeding involving the debtor is pending. The rule is designed to help identify whether the foreign proceeding is a foreign main or nonmain proceeding.
  • Amended Rule 2003(e) will require the United States Trustee or designee to file a statement specifying the date and time to which any Section 341(a) meeting of creditors has been adjourned. This rule amendment was included to be sure that creditors who did not attend a meeting of creditors could learn when the continued meeting will take place, information that sometimes was known only to those who attended the original meeting.
  • Rule 6003, discussed in this prior blog post on the 2007 rule amendments, has been amended to clarify that although a court cannot, absent immediate and irreparable harm, enter an order during the 21 days after a petition has been filed on certain matters, including employment of professionals, it can enter an order after those first 21 days that grants relief effective as of a date prior to entry of the order, i.e., as of the petition date.

Rule Amendments for Individual Bankruptcy Cases. The balance of the new rule amendments involve cases in which the debtor is an individual.

  • Amended Rule 3001(c), governing proofs of claim, requires in an individual debtor's case that an itemized statement of interest, fees, expenses or other charges be filed with the proof of claim. If a security interest is claimed in the debtor's property, a statement must also be included giving the amount required to cure any default. If the property involved is the debtor's principal residence, the proof of claim must attach, and give the information required by, a new official form addressing this rule change, and also must include information related to any escrow account. Penalties for non-compliance can include barring the claimant from presenting the omitted information in any contested matter or adversary proceeding, and an award of reasonable attorney's fees and expenses caused by the failure.
  • New Rule 3002.1, related to claims secured by a Chapter 13 debtor's principal residence, sets forth a number of additional requirements when the claim is provided for under Section 1322(b)(5) of the Bankruptcy Code. The new rule details required information related to post-petition fees, expenses, and charges, as well as procedures for determining those amounts and the final cure amount.
  • Rule 4004(b) has been amended to allow a party in interest, under certain circumstances, to seek an extension of time to file an objection to a debtor's discharge after the deadline for filing such objections to discharge has already expired.

Updated Official Forms. As mentioned, some of the pending amended rules will require revisions in official bankruptcy forms. You can find the proposed revised forms, which will be formally released on December 1, 2011 (unless Congress surprises us and prevents the amendments from taking effect), by following the link in this sentence.

Conclusion. For business bankruptcy professionals, and companies and investors involved in Chapter 11 bankruptcy cases, the most important change to the Federal Rules of Bankruptcy Procedure this year is the newly revised Rule 2019. However, several of the other amendments also will impact Chapter 11 cases, and all are worthy of note.

Summer 2011 Edition Of Bankruptcy Resource Now Available

The Summer 2011 edition of the Absolute Priority newsletter, published by the Bankruptcy & Restructuring group at Cooley LLP, of which I am a member, has just been released. The newsletter gives updates on current developments and trends in the bankruptcy and workout area. Follow the links in this sentence to access a copy of the newsletter. You can also subscribe to the blog to learn when future editions of the Absolute Priority newsletter are published, as well as to get updates on other bankruptcy and insolvency topics.

The latest edition of Absolute Priority covers a range of cutting edge topics, including:

  • Recent case law on the impact of a confirmed plan on a second bankruptcy filing by a successor to the original debtor;
  • The Second Circuit's recent decision limiting "gifting" in a Chapter 11 plan;
  • The reach of the Section 546(e) securities transaction safe harbor defense in avoidance actions; and
  • An update on litigation by the Madoff trustee against feeder funds and its broader implications.

This edition also reports on some of our recent representations, including the Chapter 11 bankruptcy case for our client Metropark USA, Inc., and our work for official committees of unsecured creditors in Chapter 11 cases involving major retailers and others. Recent committee cases include Blockbuster, Orchard Brands, ArchBrook Laguna Holdings, Signature Styles, Claim Jumper Restaurants, OTC Holding Corp., Urban Brands, Mervyn's Holdings, Sierra Snowboard, Trade Secrets, Mt. Diablo YMCA, and Pacific Metro, among others.

I hope you find the latest edition of Absolute Priority to be of interest.

First Published Court Of Appeals Opinion Issued Answering Whether Trademark Licenses Are Assignable In Bankruptcy

It's been a long wait, but we finally have a published decision from a U.S. Court of Appeals answering whether a trademark license is assignable in bankruptcy without the licensor's consent. On July 26, 2011, the U.S. Court of Appeals for the Seventh Circuit issued an opinion in In re: XMH Corp., written by Circuit Judge Richard A. Posner, and a copy of the opinion is available by following the link in this sentence. Until now, the closest we had come to a Court of Appeals decision on this issue was an unpublished affirmance by the U.S. Court of Appeals for the Ninth Circuit of the district court's decision in In re N.C.P. Marketing Group, Inc., 337 B.R. 230 (D. Nev. 2005). For more on the Ninth Circuit case  including the Supreme Court's interest in one of the issues in the case, take a look at these earlier posts on the blog, here, here, and here.

The Context. The dispute that led to the Seventh Circuit's decision arose in the Chapter 11 bankruptcy case of Hartmarx Corporation (which later changed its name to "XMH"). One of its subsidiaries, Simply Blue ("Blue"), which was also in bankruptcy, sold its assets in a Section 363 sale to two buyers (the "purchasers").

  • Among Blue's assets was an executory contract with Western Glove Works ("Western"), which Blue sought to assign to the purchasers. Western objected, arguing that the contract could not be assigned because it was a sublicense to Blue of a trademark licensed by Western. The bankruptcy court agreed with Western and XMH appealed. 
  • That's when things got a little complicated. While XMH's appeal was pending, Blue and the purchasers amended the contract. Under the amendment, title to the contract was left with Blue but the purchasers assumed all of Blue's contractual duties, together with the right to receive all fees to which Blue was otherwise entitled. The bankruptcy court approved the amendment and Western appealed from that decision.
  • In the meantime, the district court reversed the bankruptcy court's original decision holding that the contract could not be assigned, effectively allowing the original contract to be assigned. Western appealed the district court's decision and that brought the case to the Seventh Circuit. 

The Court's Decision. After disposing of a few jurisdictional issues springing from the complicated way the case had played out, the Seventh Circuit reached the merits. The Court first looked to Section 365(c)(1) of the Bankruptcy Code, which limits assignment of an executory contract if "applicable law" permits the non-debtor party to the contract to refuse to accept performance from an assignee, regardless of whether the contract prohibits or restricts assignment. In the XMH Corp. case, the contract did not prohibit or restrict assignment (but neither did it permit it). Western argued that "applicable law" was trademark law because the contract stated that Western was a licensee of a trademark for "Jag Jeans." The Court noted that "Jag" is a federally registered trademark, although "Jag Jeans" is not.

The Court held that if the contract included a trademark sublicense when XMH attempted to assign the contract, it was not assignable. This was true regardless of whether federal trademark law applied, any particular state's trademark law applied, and also, apparently, even if Canadian law applied (Western is a Canadian company). The Seventh Circuit put it this way:

None of this matters, though, because as far as we've been able to determine, the universal rule is that trademark licenses are not assignable in the absence of a clause expressly authorizing assignment. Miller v. Glenn Miller Productions, Inc., 454 F.3d 975, 988 (9th Cir. 2006)(per curiam); In re N.C.P. Marketing Group, Inc., 337 B.R. 230, 235-36 (D. Nev. 2005); 3 McCarthy on Trademarks § 18:43, pp. 18-92 to 18-93 (4th ed. 2010).

After describing how consumers rely on a trademark as an indicator of a good's quality, the Court explained that if a trademark owner (or licensee sublicensing the mark) allows another company to produce the trademarked goods, it

will not want the licensee to be allowed to assign the license (that is, sublicense the trademark) without the owner's consent, because while the owner will have picked his licensee because of confidence that he will not degrade the quality of the trademarked product he can have no similar assurance with respect to some unknown future sublicensee.

Because this is the normal reaction of a trademark owner, it makes sense to make the rule that a trademark license is not assignable without the owner's express permission a rule of contract law--what is called a 'default' rule because it is the rule if the parties do not provide otherwise (as they are allowed to do).

Ultimately, the Seventh Circuit held that although the contract included a trademark sublicense, the sublicense had expired and the parties had not designated the contract, post-expiration, as a trademark sublicense. Further, the Court held that the balance of the contract was only a service agreement and not an implied trademark license. The Court also refused to go down the "dark path" of whether a contract could be a trademark license for some purposes but not others. As such, with no actual trademark sublicense in existence at the time of assignment, the default rule discussed above did not apply and the executory contract could be assigned. The Seventh Circuit affirmed the lower courts' decisions approving the assignment of the contract as amended.

An IP Attorney's Observations. For the perspective of an in-house intellectual property attorney on the Seventh Circuit's decision, including helpful links to the trademark and the parties' underlying agreements, you may find Pamela Chestek's discussion of the case on her "Property, intangible" blog, interesting reading.

Good News For Trademark Owners. With the Seventh Circuit's XMH Corp. decision, we now have two Courts of Appeals (the Seventh and Ninth Circuits) on record holding that trademark licenses are not assignable in bankruptcy absent the consent of the trademark owner or sublicensor. While the full force of a decision depends on whether other courts follow its holding, trademark owners will likely find the guidance provided by this decision meaningful, especially given the Seventh Circuit's observation that the non-assignability of trademark licenses is "the universal rule." That said, how the decision is viewed in other circuits, particularly in Delaware and New York where many large Chapter 11 cases are filed, remains to be seen, so stay tuned.

Bankruptcy Judge's Free Online Research Binder Now Updated

I have posted in the past about the helpful research binder that former Judge Randall J. Newsome of the United States Bankruptcy Court for the Northern District of California had made available on the Bankruptcy Court's website. Although Judge Newsome has retired from the bench, fortunately Judge Charles Novack, also of the U.S. Bankruptcy Court for the Northern District of California, has picked up the mantle and has continued to update the research binder. Judge Novack recently released the updated version covering cases through Volume 436 of Bankruptcy Reports. Follow the link in this sentence to access the entire binder in PDF format, which is capable of being searched using a key word or phrase.

The primary focus of the research binder is on Ninth Circuit law, as Judge Novack presides in the Northern District of California, but some out-of-circuit law is also included. The disclaimer Judge Novack includes puts the binder's use in context:

I have the privilege of continuing Judge Randall Newsome's research binder. Although this represents the aggregation of his 22 years of research (and my own several months of work), I make no claim as to its current level of accuracy. Some of the cases may well have been superseded, reversed or otherwise no longer be good law. I, like Judge Newsome, post it with the intention of assisting those who are researching bankruptcy matters within the 9th Circuit. Users should consider it a first, but not final research tool, and should cite check all cases before relying on them.

With those caveats, and with Judge Novack's continuing work, the binder remains a good place to start when researching bankruptcy law issues in Ninth Circuit.

Spring 2011 Edition Of Bankruptcy Resource Now Available

The Spring 2011 edition of the Absolute Priority newsletter, published by the Cooley LLP Bankruptcy & Restructuring group, of which I am a member, has just been released. The newsletter gives updates on current developments and trends in the bankruptcy and workout area. Follow the links in this sentence to access a copy of the newsletter. You can also subscribe to the blog to learn when future editions of the Absolute Priority newsletter are published, as well as to get updates on other bankruptcy and insolvency topics.

The latest edition of Absolute Priority covers a range of cutting edge topics, including:

  • Recent case law on third-party releases in bankruptcy plans;
  • Treatment of make-whole and no-call provisions in bankruptcy;
  • Breach of fiduciary duty claims against managers of insolvent Delaware LLCs; and
  • Ordinary course of business defense to preferences.

This edition also reports on some of our recent representations, including the successful Chapter 11 reorganization of our client, retailer Crabtree & Evelyn, Ltd., and our work for official committees of unsecured creditors in Chapter 11 bankruptcy cases involving major retailers and others. Recent committee cases include Blockbuster, Orchard Brands, Ultimate Electronics, Claim Jumper Restaurants, OTC Holdings, Urban Brands, Mervyn's Holdings, Sierra Snowboard, Trade Secrets, Mt. Diablo YMCA, and Pacific Metro, among others.

I hope you find the latest edition of Absolute Priority to be of interest.

Blast From The Past: Website Provides Quick Access To Older Bankruptcy Code Sections

Thanks to Professor Robert Lawless of the University of Illinois College of Law, also of the Credit Slips blog, you can now save yourself from combing through dusty old books to find the language of Bankruptcy Code provisions going back as far as 1980. Need to find how Section 547 was worded prior to the enactment of the Bankruptcy Abuse Prevention and Consumer Protection Act ("BAPCPA"), or interested in tracing the evolution of exceptions to the automatic stay of Section 362? Then navigate over to the BankrLaw Project site. Once there, select a date and the site will provide you with the Bankruptcy Code in effect at that time, free of charge. This promises to be a very useful research tool when the text of older Bankruptcy Code provisions is in issue.

Fall 2010 Edition Of Bankruptcy Resource Now Available

The Fall 2010 edition of the Absolute Priority newsletter, published by the Cooley LLP Bankruptcy & Restructuring group, of which I am a member, has just been released. The newsletter gives updates on current developments and trends in the bankruptcy and workout area. Follow the links in this sentence to access a copy of the newsletter or to register to receive future editions. You can also subscribe to the blog to learn when future editions of the Absolute Priority newsletter are published, as well as to get updates on other bankruptcy topics.

The latest edition of Absolute Priority covers a range of cutting edge topics, including:

This edition also reports on some of our recent representations, including the successful Chapter 11 reorganization of our client, retailer Crabtree & Evelyn, Ltd., and our work for official committees of unsecured creditors in Chapter 11 bankruptcy cases involving major retailers and others. Recent committee cases include Eddie Bauer, Uno Restaurant Holdings, Ritz Camera, Filene's Basement, BT Tires Group, Gottschalk's, G.I. Joe's, Trade Secret, Pacific Metro, Mervyn's Holdings, The Ski Market, and Michael Anthony Management, among others.

I hope you find the latest edition of Absolute Priority to be of interest.

Third Circuit Decision Suggests Another Way For Trademark Licensees To Protect Against License Rejection In Bankruptcy

Trademark licensees have long faced the serious risk of losing all license rights to a trademark if the licensor files bankruptcy and rejects the trademark license as an executory contract. However, a recent decision from the U.S. Court of Appeals for the Third Circuit in the In re: Exide Technologies case may give some trademark licensees new hope of retaining their license rights even in bankruptcy.

Limited protection of Section 365(n). It can be devastating for a licensee to lose access to licensed intellectual property. Often a licensee will build in licensed technology into its products or develop an entire business line or brand around a licensed trademark.  Recognizing how important in-licensed IP can be, in 1988 Congress added Section 365(n) of the Bankruptcy Code, giving licensees of certain types of intellectual property special protections in bankruptcy. These protections allow licensees to retain their rights to the licensed intellectual property – but there’s a catch. The Bankruptcy Code’s definition of “intellectual property” includes, among other things, patents, patent applications, copyrights, and trade secrets, but unfortunately for trademark licensees, it does not include trademarks. Follow the link in this sentence for more on Section 365(n)'s licensee protections other than in the trademark area.

Trademark licensee's special risk. With no special protection, the trademark licensee faces the risk of having its license, usually considered to be an executory contract, rejected by the trademark owner in bankruptcy. If the trademark owner decides that the license is now unfavorable and a better deal can be had under a new license agreement with someone else, the trademark owner likely will reject the existing trademark license agreement and, generally, terminate the licensee’s rights to use the mark. The enforceability of phase-out provisions, which allow a licensee to continue to use a mark for a limited time period after a license is terminated, is unclear. Regardless, most courts hold that the trademark licensee eventually will lose its rights to the trademark following rejection. In some cases the ability to re-license can be of great value to a trademark owner in bankruptcy, and thus to its creditors, but it puts the licensee at substantial risk. For more on this topic, you may find this earlier blog post on the trademark licensee's predicament of interest.

The Third Circuit's Exide Decision. In a June 1, 2010 decision in In re: Exide Technologies (a copy of the decision is available by clicking on the preceding link), the Third Circuit examined a series of agreements, determined to constitute one integrated agreement, pursuant to which Exide Technologies sold an industrial battery business, and licensed certain trademark rights, to EnerSys. When Exide filed Chapter 11 bankruptcy in 2002, it sought to reject the agreement as an executory contract. The bankruptcy court granted Exide's motion to reject the agreement, and that decision was affirmed by the district court. On appeal to the Third Circuit, that court held that under New York law, which governed the agreement, once a party has substantially performed, a later breach by that party does not excuse performance. The Third Circuit further held that EnerSys had substantially performed the agreement in the more than ten years since it was signed, rendering the agreement no longer an executory contract. 

  • The Third Circuit held that EnerSys had substantially performed by paying the full purchase price and operating under the agreement for ten years, as well as assuming certain liabilities related to the business EnerSys purchased when it obtained the trademark license.
  • The Court of Appeals also held that EnerSys's obligation not to use the trademark outside of the licensed business was not a material obligation because it was a condition subsequent and, in any event, did not relate to the agreement's purpose -- the transfer of the industrial battery business in return for a $135 million payment.
  • Likewise, the Third Circuit concluded that a quality standards provision was minor because it related only to the standards of the mark for each battery produced and not to the transfer of industrial battery business that was the agreement's purpose.
  • In addition, an indemnity obligation that had subsequently expired, and a further assurances obligation where no remaining required cooperation was identified, were held not to outweigh the factors supporting a finding of substantial performance.

A Concurring Opinion On The Effect Of Rejection. Judge Ambro wrote a concurring opinion to address the bankruptcy court's conclusion that rejection of a trademark license left EnerSys without the right to use the Exide mark. In his concurrence, Judge Ambro analyzed the history of Section 365(n), disagreed that the exclusion of trademarks from its reach created a negative inference that rejection of a trademark license should be tantamount to termination, and stated that courts should be able to prevent the extinguishment of all rights upon rejection. As Judge Ambro wrote in his conclusion:

Courts may use § 365 to free a bankrupt trademark licensor from burdensome duties that hinder its reorganization. They should not—as occurred in this case—use it to let a licensor take back trademark rights it bargained away. This makes bankruptcy more a sword than a shield, putting debtor-licensors in a catbird seat they often do not deserve.

It will be interesting to see whether other courts follow Judge Ambro's views or continue to hold that trademark licensees whose licenses have been rejected no longer retain any rights to use the trademarks at issue.

A New Argument For Trademark Licensees? For trademark licensees looking to preserve their rights in the face of a motion to reject a trademark license, the Exide Technologies decision may provide some additional support.

  • However, before breathing a sigh of relief, trademark licensees should remember that the decision involved a series of agreements that had been largely performed over the decade since they were signed. In many ways, the trademark licensee was just a part of what the Third Circuit found was, chiefly, an agreement to sell a business division. In essence, although the trademark itself was not sold, the trademark license rights went along with the business. 
  • Typically, trademark licenses more often arise not in connection with a sale of a business but as a separate, often stand-alone, license of certain trademarks for commercial exploitation by the licensee. In that context, it may be far more difficult to establish that the agreement has been substantially performed such that it is no longer an executory contract.

Still, for those situations in which the argument is available, the Third Circuit's decision in Exide Technologies underscores that all trademark licenses are not executory contracts and, at least in some cases, the trademark licensee might just get to keep the license rights after all, even in the face of a rejection motion in bankruptcy. 

Official Bankruptcy Forms Revised To Reflect April 1, 2010 Dollar Amount Adjustments

As discussed in an earlier post called "On The Rise: Bankruptcy Dollar Amounts Will Increase On April 1, 2010," various dollar amounts in the Bankruptcy Code and related statutory provisions were increased for cases filed on or after April 1, 2010. Now several official bankruptcy forms have been revised to reflect these new dollar amounts.

Remember, the increased dollar amounts reflected on these forms apply only to cases filed on or after April 1st.

Recent Decision Holds That Section 503(b)(9) "20 Day" Claims Can Be Used As Part Of New Value Preference Defense

Earlier this year, the U.S. Bankruptcy Court for the Middle District of Tennessee issued a decision holding that creditors sued for preferences can assert a new value defense based on the goods provided to a debtor in the 20 days before the bankruptcy case was filed. The debtor had challenged the effort to use those 20 day goods as new value because they are entitled to administrative claim priority under Section 503(b)(9) of the Bankruptcy Code

The law in this area continues to develop and trade vendors and suppliers of goods will find this update of particular interest.

Winter 2010 Edition Of Bankruptcy Resource Now Available

The Winter 2010 edition of the Absolute Priority newsletter, published by the Cooley Godward Kronish LLP Bankruptcy & Restructuring group, of which I am a member, has just been released. The newsletter gives updates on current developments and trends in the bankruptcy and workout area. Follow the links in this sentence to access a copy of the newsletter or to register to receive future editions. You can also subscribe to the blog to learn when future editions of the Absolute Priority newsletter are published, as well as to get updates on other bankruptcy topics.

The latest edition of Absolute Priority covers a range of cutting edge topics, including:

This edition also reports on some of our recent representations, including the successful Chapter 11 reorganization of our client, retailer Crabtree & Evelyn, Ltd., and our work for official committees of unsecured creditors in Chapter 11 bankruptcy cases involving major retailers. Recent committee cases include Eddie Bauer, Uno Restaurant Holdings, Ritz Camera, Filene's Basement, BT Tires Group, Gottschalk's, Bernie's Audio Video TV Appliance, G.I. Joe's, Against All Odds, Samsonite Company Stores, Mervyn's Holdings, The Ski Market, and Lenox Sales, among others.

I hope you find the latest edition of Absolute Priority to be of interest.

On The Rise: Bankruptcy Dollar Amounts Will Increase On April 1, 2010

It hasn't gotten much publicity yet, but certain dollar amounts in the Bankruptcy Code will be increased for cases filed on or after April 1, 2010. You can find a chart listing all of the changes on this Federal Register page, which printed last month's official notice from the Judicial Conference of the United States.

Among the most meaningful increases for Chapter 11 and other business bankruptcy cases:

  • The total amount of claims required to file an involuntary petition rises to $14,425 from $13,475;
  • The employee compensation priority under Section 507(a)(4) increases to $11,725 from $10,950;
  • The consumer deposit priority under Section 507(a)(7) rises to $2,600 from $2,425;
  • The dollar amount in the bankruptcy venue provision, 28 U.S.C. Section 1409(b), that requires actions for non-consumer, non-insider debt to be brought against defendants in the district in which they reside, has increased to $11,725 from $10,950; and
  • The minimum amount required to bring a preference claim against a defendant in a non-consumer debtor case, specified in Section 547(c)(9), rises from $5,475 to $5,850.

Other adjustments will affect consumers more than business debtors. For example, the debt limit for an individual to qualify to file a Chapter 13 bankruptcy case will rise to $1,081,400 of secured debt, and certain exemption amounts will also rise.

Although the changes aren't substantial, be sure to keep them in mind when assessing cases filed after April 1st.

Who's SARE Now? Bankruptcy's Single Asset Real Estate Rules And Their Impact On Commercial Real Estate

Given the state of commercial real estate, the prospect for defaults by commercial borrowers has greatly increased. The last time there was a significant downturn in the commercial real estate sector in the early 1990s, owners of buildings and other real estate often turned to Chapter 11 bankruptcy as a method of buying time and, in some cases, lowering or at least restructuring the amount of secured debt against the real property through a plan of reorganization. This raises the question -- will the same story play out again in this downturn?

Major Bankruptcy Law Changes In 2005. As many readers of this blog know, major amendments were made to the Bankruptcy Code in 2005 -- formally known as the Bankruptcy Abuse Prevention and Consumer Protection Act of 2005 (“BAPCPA”) -- including ones that affect real estate. One of the better-known changes was the addition of strict limitations on the time bankrupt tenants could have to assume or reject commercial real estate leases.

However, there was another amendment that may have a significant impact on some owners of real estate in Chapter 11, and could complicate the prospects for using bankruptcy to restructure debt on certain distressed projects. This change was the elimination of a valuation cap that had previously limited the number of real estate debtors subject to the Bankruptcy Code's single asset real estate (“SARE”) rules, most notably provisions that impose special requirements on single asset real estate debtors to keep in place the benefits of bankruptcy's automatic stay

The Bankruptcy Code's SARE Definition. Prior to BAPCPA, there were relatively few SARE cases because the definition was limited to debtors with less than $4 million of secured debt against the real property. This meant that only smaller real estate cases were covered by the more restrictive SARE rules. BAPCPA, however, removed the $4 million secured debt ceiling. As a result, a real estate entity owing hundreds of millions of dollars in secured debt may be subject to the SARE rules. Consequently, the number of real estate cases potentially subject to the SARE provisions has increased dramatically.

The Bankruptcy Code's current definition of SARE provides:

The term 'single asset real estate' means real property constituting a single property or project, other than residential real property with fewer than 4 residential units, which generates substantially all of the gross income of a debtor who is not a family farmer and on which no substantial business is being conducted by a debtor other than the business of operating the real property and activities incidental.

11 U.S.C. §101 (51B).

Impact Of A SARE Designation. A SARE designation can have a big effect on the debtor. When a debtor states on its petition that it is a SARE, or a secured creditor files a motion and the Court rules that the debtor is in fact a SARE, the dynamics of the Chapter 11 case will change. As discussed below, a SARE debtor must either file a plan of reorganization with a reasonable chance of being confirmed within the later of (i) 90 days after the order for relief is entered in the case (in a voluntary bankruptcy case this is when the case is filed) or (ii) 30 days after the date the court determines that the debtor is subject to the provisions of SARE, or must start making monthly payments to the secured creditor at the loan's non-default interest rate. If a SARE debtor fails to satisfy these requirements, the court is likely to grant a secured creditor relief from stay to commence or continue with a foreclosure of the real property.

Who's A SARE? Not every owner of commercial real estate in bankruptcy will be a SARE debtor. To determine what types of commercial properties and developments qualify as a SARE case, courts focus on interpreting the meaning of “a single property or project.” In cases in which one debtor owns one piece of real property, this issue will likely be straightforward. In other cases, however, the question may be more difficult to determine. For example, a real estate business owning many interrelated projects through separate, multiple limited liability companies ("LLCs") or partnerships may be able to avoid a SARE ruling. On the other hand, an entity owning more than one property, if considered a single project, may be deemed to be a SARE. To read one court's analysis of these issues in a series of related bankruptcy cases involving multiple entities and properties, click here, here, and here.

If a single property or project is involved, courts then analyze whether the single real estate asset is used in the operation of a business or whether it is simply held for income. A SARE case usually involves passive rent collection without other active business activities that generate revenue for the debtor. The SARE standard is factually driven and generally looks to “whether [the debtors] conduct substantial business other than operating the real property.” In the Matter of Scotia Pacific Company, LLC, 508 F.3d 214, 221 (5th Cir. 2007) (debtor’s substantial entrepreneurial business operations went beyond mere passive collection of money). As the Scotia Pacific court held:

In order to be single asset real estate, the revenues received by the owner must be passive in nature; the owner must not be conducting any active business, other than merely operating the real property and activities incidental thereto. Under the prior jurisprudence, those passive types of activities are the mere receipt of rent and truly incidental activities such as arranging for maintenance or perhaps some marketing activity, or ... mowing the grass and waiting for the market to turn.

A business would not be a SARE if a reasonable and prudent business person would expect to generate substantial revenues from the operation activities--separate and apart from the sale or lease of the underlying real estate.

For example, a golf club where the owners are actively engaged in activities such as employing third party workers, selling club memberships and merchandise, and charging green fees, has been held not to be a SARE. Likewise, a debtor in the hotel or marina business also may not be held to be a SARE.

Limited Automatic Stay Benefits For SAREs. A SARE debtor cannot count on the automatic stay remaining in force for an extended period of time. Instead, to maintain the benefit of the automatic stay, Section 362(d)(3) of the Bankruptcy Code requires a SARE debtor, within 90 days after filing bankruptcy, to file a plan that has a reasonable possibility of being confirmed or commence regular payments to the secured creditor at the non-default interest rate.

  • A SARE debtor that is not in a position to file a plan will, in effect, have to pay for the continuation of the automatic stay. This can prove difficult for projects that are not producing significant cash flow.
  • If a plan is filed instead, the debtor does not have to establish that the proposed plan will in fact be confirmed but must show that the assumptions that underpin the plan are reasonable. What constitutes a reasonable time to confirm a plan will vary from case to case.
  • If the debtor fails to satisfy either of these requirements, the secured creditor will likely be able to obtain relief from the automatic stay to foreclose on the property.
  • These rules do not preclude a secured creditor from seeking relief from stay on other grounds, such as a lack of adequate protection or other cause.

Overall Impact On Commercial Real Estate. Owners of distressed commercial real estate projects that are SAREs may find Chapter 11 to be less useful than in past down cycles.

  • With careful planning, some SARE debtors will be able to restructure through bankruptcy. Yet as an interesting study shows, many SARE (and non-SARE) real estate cases in the past few years have ended with the secured creditor obtaining relief from the automatic stay to foreclose. Faced with this prospect, some owners have simply decided to turn over distressed real property to the lender, often through a deed in lieu of foreclosure before bankruptcy.
  • In today's environment, some lenders are willing to work with real property owners to extend loans and avoid foreclosure or taking back the property. However, if the SARE rules would apply in a potential bankruptcy, this fact may give the secured lender more leverage in those negotiations. 

What's likely to be the end result of the SARE rules and the 2005 removal of the valuation cap? As single asset real estate projects face default, although some will certainly be able to restructure their debts, many may end up in the hands of lenders as real estate owned ("REO") properties. With distressed borrowers working through hundreds of billions of dollars in commercial real estate loan problems across the country, the negative impact defaulting commercial real estate loans and resulting REO may have on banks and other lenders could end up being the bigger part of this SARE story. 

Two More Decisions Issued On Whether Bankruptcy Rule 2019 Requires Informal Groups To Disclose Their Trades

The First Two Delaware Decisions. In the past two months, I have reported on decisions by two Delaware bankruptcy judges in the In re Washington Mutual, Inc. case and in In re Premier International Holdings, Inc. (aka, the Six Flags case), taking opposing views on whether Federal Rule of Bankruptcy Procedure 2019 requires ad hoc committees and informal groups to disclose their trading activities. The Court in the Washington Mutual case held that it does, while the Court in the Six Flags case came out strongly with the opposite view. Follow the links in the prior sentence for more on both decisions, including copies of the respective opinions, as well as the earlier Northwest Airlines and Scotia Pacific decisions from the Southern Districts of New York and Texas, respectively.

A Third Delaware Decision. Two days after the Six Flags opinion was issued, Delaware Bankruptcy Judge Brendan L. Shannon issued a short order granting a motion to compel an Ad Hoc Noteholder Group in the In re Accuride Corporation Chapter 11 case to disclose details of their trades. A copy of Judge Shannon's two-page order is available by clicking on the link in this sentence. The ruling reflects the Court's comments from the bench agreeing with the conclusions in the Northwest Airlines and Washington Mutual decisions, although Judge Shannon stated that he did not necessarily concur that fiduciary obligations arise in this context, as the Washington Mutual opinion had stated.

The Philadelphia Newspapers Court Weighs In. Then last week, on February 4, 2010, Judge Stephen Raslavich, Chief Judge of the U.S. Bankruptcy Court for the Eastern District of Pennsylvania, issued another opinion on the issue, this time involving a "Steering Group of Pre-petition Lenders" in the In re Philadelphia Newspapers, LLC Chapter 11 bankruptcy case. After reviewing the analysis in each of the prior decisions from the Delaware, New York, and Texas courts, Chief Judge Raslavich held that Rule 2019 does not require such disclosure by the Steering Committee, essentially agreeing with the reasoning of Delaware Bankruptcy Judge Sontchi in the Six Flags case. Follow the link in this sentence for a copy of Chief Judge Raslavich's 28-page opinion in the Philadelphia Newspapers case.

More To Come? We have now had six opinions or orders on the Rule 2019 issue involving ad hoc committees or informal groups, with three judges holding disclosure is required (Northwest Airlines, Washington Mutual, and Accuride Corporation) and three holding it is not (Scotia Pacific, Six Flags, and Philadelphia Newspapers). Although the issue may gain more clarity on appeal or the question may be superseded by an amended version of Rule 2019, now under consideration by the Advisory Committee, in the meantime more courts will likely be asked to decide this thorny Rule 2019 issue. Given the split in authority -- with each judge finding that the "plain meaning" of Rule 2019 supports its view -- it has become even more difficult to predict how the next court will rule.

With Revisions To Bankruptcy Rule 2019 Under Review, A Second Delaware Bankruptcy Decision Goes The Other Way On Whether The Rule Requires Informal Committees To Disclose Their Trades

Last month, I reported on a decision from Delaware Bankruptcy Judge Mary Walrath in the In re Washington Mutual, Inc. case ("WaMu") holding that informal creditor groups must disclose details of their trades under Federal Rule of Bankruptcy Procedure 2019. The WaMu ruling, a first from Delaware, came nearly three years after rulings from the Southern District of New York in the Northwest Airlines case, and the Southern District of Texas in the Scotia Pacific case, took different sides on the issue.

A New Decision And Proposed Revision To Rule 2019. Now, little more than a month later, a second Delaware Bankruptcy Court judge has issued an opinion on the same issue -- and has forcefully come out the other way. These decisions are playing out against the backdrop of a proposed revision of Rule 2019 which, if adopted, would expand disclosures by ad hoc committees and other groups of creditors and equity security holders as discussed in more detail near the end of this post.

Before turning to the new decision, here are several links to follow for more about the earlier Rule 2019 decisions and the overall context:

The New Delaware Decision. On January 20, 2010, Delaware Bankruptcy Judge Christopher Sontchi issued an opinion in In re Premier International Holdings, Inc., more commonly known as the Six Flags case, explaining his reasons for denying a motion to compel an informal committee of noteholders, known as the SFO Noteholders Informal Committee, from complying with Rule 2019. Follow the link in this sentence for a copy of Judge Sontchi's new 34-page Six Flags opinion.

The Six Flag Court's Plain Meaning Analysis. In his opinion, Judge Sontchi discussed but respectfully declined to follow the Northwest Airlines and WaMu decisions referenced above. Instead, he held that under the plain meaning of Rule 2019, an informal committee of noteholders was not a "committee representing more than one creditor" described in the current Rule 2019. In reaching this conclusion, Judge Sontchi explained as follows:

    The question here is whether the SFO Noteholders Informal Committee is 'a committee representing more than one creditor.' If so, its members are subject to Rule 2019. The starting point of the analysis or 'default entrance' is plain meaning.

    A committee” is a 'body of two or more people appointed for some special function by, and usu. out of a (usu. larger) body.' The use of the word 'appointed' clearly contemplates some action be taken by the larger body. Thus, a self-appointed subset of a larger group - whether it calls itself an informal committee, an ad hoc committee, or by some other name – simply does not constitute a committee under the plain meaning of the word. In order for a group to constitute a committee under Rule 2019 it would need to be formed by a larger group either by consent, contract or applicable law -- not by 'self-help.' This construct is supported by the rule’s applicability to indenture trustees, which are delegated with certain rights and obligations on behalf of all holders of the debt by operation of contract, i.e., the indenture. Similarly, official committees under section 1102 of the Bankruptcy Code (although exempted from Rule 2019) receive their authority from federal law, i.e., the Bankruptcy Code.

    The meaning of 'represent' is: 'take the place of (another); be a substitute in some capacity for; act or speak for another by a deputed right.' A deputed right is one that is assigned to another person. Thus, the plain meaning of 'represent' contemplates an active appointment of an agent to assert deputed rights. It is black letter law that a person cannot establish itself as another’s agent such that it may bind the purported principal without that principal’s consent unless the principal ratifies the agent’s actions. Thus, under the plain meaning of the phrase 'a committee representing more than one creditor,' a committee must consist of a group representing the interests of a larger group with that larger group’s consent or by operation of law. As the SFO Noteholders Informal Committee does not represent any persons other than its members either by consent or operation of law, it is not a 'committee' under Rule 2019 and, thus, its members need not make the disclosures required under the rule.

(Footnotes omitted; emphasis in original.)

The Six Flag Court's Review Of Legislative History. After concluding that the plain meaning of Rule 2019 did not require disclosures by the SFO Noteholders Informal Committee, the Court then examined the legislative history of the rule at some length as a "reality check" on the plain meaning decision. In this part of the opinion, Judge Sontchi traced the legislative history back to the Chandler Act of 1938 and subsequent rule making creating Rule 10-211, which later became Rule 2019. The Court then placed the Chandler Act in context by reviewing the perceived abuses of "protective committees" and "reorganization committees" involved in pre-1930s railroad reorganizations through equity receiverships. Judge Sontchi then concluded that the purposes for which Rule 2019 was adopted do not apply to today's informal committees:

    The nub of the question is how the legislative history of Rules 10-211 and 2019 applies to the informal and ad hoc committees of today and, more specifically, the Informal Committee of SFO Noteholders. Certainly there are parallels between the 'protective committees' under equity receivership and the informal committees of today. For example, both are usually composed of Wall Street banks and institutional investors. Both are formed for the purpose of obtaining leverage in the reorganization that would not be available to disparate creditors. Both are involved in the negotiation and formulation of a plan of reorganization.

    The differences, however, far outweigh the similarities. The 'protective committees' that were the target of the reforms under the Chandler Act were able to control completely the entire reorganization – from inception to formulation to solicitation to implementation. They were granted the authority to negotiate on behalf of and to bind creditors through the use of deposit agreements. They were so intimately involved with management so as to be virtually in control of the business. They could force disparate treatment of similarly situated creditors. Finally, they were able 'to steal' the company for an inadequate 'upset price' at a foreclosure sale by credit bidding their debt.

 

    The informal and ad hoc committees of today have none of these expansive powers. Indeed, the Chandler Act so effectively curbed the power of protective committees that they virtually ceased to exist within a few years of the Act’s passage. Rule 10-211 was, for all intents and purposes, superfluous almost immediately after its passage. There was nothing left to regulate.

    The Bankruptcy Code continues to limit the powers of committees, albeit in other ways. For example, the debtor is given exclusive authority to propose and to solicit a plan of reorganization; claims and interests may only be classified with substantially similar creditors; creditors in the same class must be treated equally; a trustee or examiner can be appointed for cause. Even if an informal committee were to try to exercise the powers formerly available to protective committees, it would be prevented by the Bankruptcy Code. Thus, Rule 2019 is also, for all intents and purpose, superfluous – the problem it was designed to address by requiring certain disclosures simply no longer exists.

    In any event, the Informal Committee of SFO Noteholders has not attempted to invoke the powers previously wielded by protective committees. Certainly, the committee has actively participated in the reorganization process both pre-petition and post-petition. The committee vigorously opposed the Debtors’ Initial Plan and now vigorously supports the Revised Plan that it negotiated post-petition. But, the Informal Committee of SFO Noteholders has gone no farther. It doesn’t have the ability to bind its members – they can vote any way they please. It cannot force disparate treatment of the SFO creditors. The list goes on. Based upon the legislative history, Rule 2019 is not intended to nor does it apply to the Informal Committee of SFO Noteholders in this case.

(Footnotes omitted; emphasis in original.)  Finally, Judge Sontchi considered the analysis in the Northwest Airlines and WaMu decisions and declined to follow those rulings for a number of reasons detailed in the Six Flags opinion.

The Proposed Revisions To Rule 2019. The core holding of the Six Flags opinion -- that under the plain meaning of Rule 2019 the term "committee" applies only to a committee that is appointed by or represents a larger group -- could be rendered moot by a proposed revision to Rule 2019 now under consideration by the Advisory Committee.

  • The proposed amendment to Rule 2019 would change the language of the rule to include not only representative committees but also "every entity, group, or committee that consists of or represents more than one creditor or equity security holder." (Emphasis added.)
  • Follow the link in this sentence for a copy of the proposed Federal Rules of Bankruptcy Procedure amendments under active consideration by the Advisory Committee, including proposed Rule 2019.
  • The proposed version of Rule 2019 would require these newly defined groups or committees to disclose each "disclosable economic interest." That term would be defined to mean "any claim, interest, pledge, lien, option, participation, derivative instrument, or any other right or derivative right that grants the holder an economic interest that is affected by the value, acquisition, or disposition of a claim or interest."
  • The bankruptcy court would also have the authority to order the disclosure of amounts paid for these positions, but pricing disclosure would not be required absent a court order.
  • The proposed rule has now gotten the attention of the financial media, and it will be the subject of a hearing in early February with testimony expected from various interested parties.

Conclusion. To say the least, a lot is going on in the world of Rule 2019, informal committees and creditor groups, and the potential for disclosure of trading data by hedge funds and other distressed investors. It's likely that more courts will be asked to decide these issues in the months ahead, and advocates on both sides of the issue now have new Delaware opinions to cite for their position. On top of that, if ultimately adopted, a proposed -- and significantly revised -- Rule 2019 could resolve some of these questions.  For now, however, the final language of any revised Rule 2019, like the application of the current Rule 2019, remains unclear. 

When Worlds Collide: Do Section 365(n) IP Licensee Rights Work In A Chapter 15 Cross-Border Bankruptcy?

Section 365(n) And Licensee Rights. I have discussed in the past how Section 365(n) was added to the Bankruptcy Code to protect licensees of intellectual property in the event the licensor files bankruptcy.

  • Under Section 365(n), if the debtor or trustee rejects a license, a licensee can elect to retain its rights to the licensed intellectual property, including a right to enforce an exclusivity provision. In return, the licensee must continue to make any required royalty payment.
  • The licensee also can retain rights under any agreement supplementary to the license, which should include source code or other forms of technology escrow agreements.
  • Taken together, these provisions protect a licensee from being stripped of its rights to continue to use the licensed intellectual property.
  • To read more about Section 365(n)'s benefits and protections, follow the link in this sentence.

Limits Of Section 365(n). These protections, however, have their limits. One limitation comes from the fact that the Bankruptcy Code's special definition of "intellectual property" excludes trademarks from the scope of Section 365(n)'s protections. Another major limitation is that since Section 365(n) is a U.S. Bankruptcy Code provision, it only applies in a U.S. bankruptcy case.

What Happens To Section 365(n) In Chapter 15 Cases? One issue that was less clear was what would happen if a foreign licensor were the subject of a case under Chapter 15 of the U.S. Bankruptcy Code. Would Section 365(n) apply to protect licensees in a Chapter 15 proceeding?

  • Chapter 15 allows an entity's foreign representative to obtain U.S. bankruptcy protection for assets and interests in the United States. It was was added to the Bankruptcy Code a few years ago to implement certain cross-border insolvency procedures when corporations had assets and interests in more than one country. To read more on Chapter 15 bankruptcy, follow the link in this sentence. 
  • Section 365(n) and Chapter 15 recently collided in the Chapter 15 case of Qimonda AG, and led to a decision by Judge Robert G. Mayer of the United States Bankruptcy Court for the Eastern District of Virginia on that very issue. 
  • The Bankruptcy Court's decision, discussed below, is available by following the link in this sentence.

The Qimonda Chapter 15 Case. In the Qimonda AG Chapter 15 case, the Bankruptcy Court had previously recognized the pending German insolvency proceeding as a "foreign main proceeding" under Chapter 15 of the U.S. Bankruptcy Code. As part of the Chapter 15 proceeding, the Bankruptcy Court had entered a supplemental order providing, among other things, that Section 365 of the U.S. Bankruptcy Code would apply to the Chapter 15 case.

U.S. Licensees Invoke Section 365(n). Following the Bankruptcy Court's supplemental order, certain U.S. licensees asserted Section 365(n) rights in an attempt to retain their rights to intellectual property that Qimonda AG had licensed them.

The Bankruptcy Court's Decision. After considering the motion and opposition, Judge Mayer issued a decision agreeing with Qimonda AG's foreign representative and he modified the prior supplemental order to exclude the effect of Section 365(n) by providing that it would apply only if the foreign representative "rejects an executory contract pursuant to Section 365 (rather than simply exercising the rights granted to the Foreign Representative pursuant to the German Insolvency Code)." In reaching this decision, the Bankruptcy Court considered the effect of its recognition of the German insolvency proceeding given the purpose of Chapter 15:

The principal idea behind chapter 15 is that the bankruptcy proceeding be governed in accordance with the bankruptcy laws of the nation in which the main case is pending. In this case, that would be the German Insolvency Code. Ancillary proceedings such as the chapter 15 proceeding pending in this court should supplement, but not supplant, the German proceeding.

That objective is particularly relevant in this case where there are many international patents.  The patents themselves are issued under the laws of various nations. While there may be multiple international patents, the multiple international patents protect the same idea, process or invention in the country that issued the patent. If the patents and patent licenses are dealt with in accordance with the bankruptcy laws of the various nations in which the licensees or licensors may be located or operating, there will be many inconsistent results. In fact, the same idea, process or invention may be dealt with differently depending on which country the particular ancillary proceeding is brought. Rather than having a coherent resolution to Qimonda’s patent portfolio, the portfolio may be shattered into many pieces that can never be reconstructed. In this case, Qimonda licensed its patents to companies that are operating in various nations. It is clear that the patent rights are not being exploited solely, and even possibly principally, in the United States. In fact, they are being utilized throughout the world. If the laws of the various nations in which the patents are being used would be applicable, there will be many different treatments of the patents that have been licensed by Qimonda AG and many different and inconsistent results throughout the world. This is detrimental to a systematic bankruptcy proceeding and detrimental to the resolution of the German bankruptcy proceeding itself. It diminishes the value of these assets. It results in an inefficient insolvency administration. It may well be detrimental to parties who are or wish to license the patents. It is not difficult to envision that if the patent portfolio is splintered without overall administration or control, some parties may be left with incomplete patent protection. Holding an American patent without holding a patent enforceable in the Europe may significantly restrict its use and utility. This is at odds with the Congressionally stated purposes in §1501.

                                          *       *        *

All the patents should be treated the same. There should not be disparate results simply because of the location of a factory or research facility or corporate office. This would be the result if the supplemental order were left in place. It is clear that the inclusion of §365 in the supplemental order was improvident. It had unintended consequences that significantly and adversely affect the main proceeding in Germany.

Conclusion. The Qimonda AG decision underscores that although Section 365(n) of the Bankruptcy Code offers significant protection to licensees, its benefits frequently stop at the water's edge. When the licensor is based outside of the United States, Section 365(n) will be of little help, even if the license covers U.S. issued patents and the foreign licensor obtains protection for its U.S. assets and interests under Chapter 15 of the Bankruptcy Code. Licensees must continue to keep the limits of Section 365(n) in mind when negotiating licenses of intellectual property from foreign licensors.

The Return Of The Rule 2019 Question: Delaware Bankruptcy Court Weighs In On Whether Creditor Groups Must Disclose Trading Data

It's been a few years since decisions from the United States Bankruptcy Courts for the Southern District of New York, and later from the Southern District of Texas, examined whether hedge funds and other investors could be required to disclose the details of their trades when they form an ad hoc committee or group in a Chapter 11 case.  Last week, Judge Mary Walrath of the United States Bankruptcy Court for the District of Delaware issued a decision in the Washington Mutual, Inc. Chapter 11 case, for the first time giving us a Delaware bankruptcy judge's views on the subject. Before turning to the new decision, a copy of which is available below, let's first put the issue in context.

Ad Hoc Committees and Groups. In recent years, hedge funds and other investors in distressed debt or the equity securities of bankrupt companies have taken active roles in Chapter 11 bankruptcy cases. Often, these investors form unofficial or "ad hoc" committees.

  • Much like official committees of unsecured creditors, equity security holders, retirees, or other constituencies, unofficial or ad hoc committees typically hire counsel and file motions and other pleadings during the course of a bankruptcy case.
  • Sometimes these creditors call themselves a committee but more recently the more informal term "group" has been used.
  • By acting as a committee or group, the creditors not only share the costs of participating in the bankruptcy case but also have the ability to wield greater influence by acting collectively instead of on an individual basis.

The Rule 2019(a) Statement. After making an appearance in a bankruptcy case, these groups or committees, their counsel, or both will typically file what's known as a "Rule 2019(a) Statement." This is a public filing required by Rule 2019(a) of the Federal Rules of Bankruptcy Procedure, the set of procedural rules which, together with the United States Bankruptcy Code itself, govern the conduct of bankruptcy cases. Rule 2019(a) provides, in part, as follows:

[E]very entity or committee representing more than one creditor or equity security holder . . . shall file a verified statement setting forth (1) the name and address of the creditor or equity security holder; (2) the nature and amount of the claim or interest and the time of acquisition thereof unless it is alleged to have been acquired more than one year prior to the filing of the petition; (3) a recital of the pertinent facts and circumstances in connection with the employment of the entity . . . ; and (4) . . . the amounts of claims or interests owned by the entity, the members of the committee or the indenture trustee, the times when acquired, the amounts paid therefor, and any sales or other disposition thereof. 

The Northwest Airlines And Scotia Pacific Decisions. In early 2007, first in the Northwest Airlines case, and then in the Scotia Pacific Company LLC ("Scotia Development") case, two bankruptcy judges reached opposite conclusions on the question of whether groups of investors had to comply with Rule 2019.

  • In February and March of 2007, Judge Allan L. Gropper of the U.S. Bankruptcy Court for the Southern District of New York, presiding over the Northwest Airlines Chapter 11 case, required an ad hoc committee of hedge funds and other stockholders to disclose publicly full details of their trades in Northwest Airlines claims and stock. This was big news because hedge funds and other distressed debt investors carefully guard their trading data. Follow the links in this sentence for copies of Judge Gropper's first decision requiring the disclosure and second decision ordering that the trading data not be filed under seal. You can find earlier posts on these decisions and their aftermath here, here, here, here, and here.
  • Then in April 2007, Judge Richard S. Schmidt of the U.S. Bankruptcy Court for the Southern District of Texas issued an order denying Scopac's motion to compel disclosure of the details of trades in Scotia Development's secured timber notes. In his two-page order, Judge Schmidt ruled that a noteholder group that had formed in the Scopac case was not a "committee" within the meaning of Rule 2019 and, as such, the disclosure requirements of that rule did not apply. Following the links in this sentence will lead you to a copy of Judge Schmidt's two-page order in the Scotia Development case and to an earlier post on the case.

The Delaware Bankruptcy Court's Decision In The Washington Mutual Case. On December 2, 2009, more than two and a half years since the Scotia Development decision, Judge Walrath of the Delaware bankruptcy court faced the same issue in the Washington Mutual, Inc. case.  J. P. Morgan Chase Bank moved to compel a group of creditors calling themselves the "Washington Mutual, Inc. Noteholders Group" ("WMI Noteholders Group") to provide trading and other information required by Rule 2019. The WMI Noteholders Group argued, among other points, that they were not an ad hoc committee but only a loose affiliation of creditors who came together on at at-will basis to share the cost of advisory services as a matter of efficiency.

In her decision, Judge Walrath rejected that argument, siding with Judge Gropper's analysis in Northwest Airlines and declining to follow the two-page order issued by Judge Schmidt in the Scotia Development case. Specifically, she held:

Here, the WMI Noteholders Group possesses virtually all the characteristics typically found in an ad hoc committee, save the name. The WMI Noteholders Group consists of multiple creditors holding similar claims. The members of the WMI Noteholders Group filed pleadings and appeared in these chapter 11 cases collectively, not individually. The WMI Noteholders Group retained counsel, which takes its instructions from the Group as a whole. While counsel contends that it speaks only for the members of the WMI Noteholders Group that agree with the filing of each pleading or position taken in each appearance, counsel for the Group has never advised this Court that it is representing less than all the Group. Rather the pleadings and appearances by counsel demonstrate that the Group and counsel represent not each individual member in its individual capacity, but rather the Group as a whole. In fact, it is the collective $1.1 billion in holdings of the members of the Group that counsel uses to argue in favor of the Group’s position, not each individual’s separate holding.

Under the plain language of Rule 2019, therefore, the Court finds that although the WMI Noteholders Group call themselves a Group, they are in fact acting as an ad hoc committee or entity representing more than one creditor. The WMI Noteholders Group, therefore, must comply with Rule 2019.

Follow the link for a copy of Judge Walrath's 20 page Washington Mutual decision.

Another Issue: Do Groups Owe Fiduciary Duties? One of the most interesting parts of Judge Walrath's decision came in response to the WMI Noteholders Group's argument that Rule 2019 was not intended to apply to the Group because it does not speak for other noteholders. Judge Walrath not only rejected this argument but in doing so also suggested that creditor or shareholder groups may owe fiduciary duties to others in the same class:

The WMI Noteholders Group contends, however, that the Rule was only intended to apply to 'a body that purports to speak on behalf of an entire class or broader group of stakeholders in a fiduciary capacity with the power to bind the stakeholders that are members of such a committee.' The WMI Noteholders Group’s argument is premised on the erroneous assumption that the Group owes no fiduciary duties to other similarly situated creditors, either in or outside the Group. The case law, however, suggests that members of a class of creditors may, in fact, owe fiduciary duties to other members of the class.

Judge Walrath, however, deferred any further decision on the issue, noting:

It is not necessary, at this stage, to determine the precise extent of fiduciary duties owed but only to recognize that collective action by creditors in a class implies some obligation to other members of that class.
 

With this decision, ad hoc committees and other groups are on notice that, at least in Delaware, they may be found to owe duties to other members of their respective class of creditors or investors.

Conclusion. This new decision means that Delaware now joins the Southern District of New York in holding that ad hoc committees and investor groups will be required to comply fully with Rule 2019, including the requirement to disclose details of their trades in the debtor's claims or interests. In addition, the Washington Mutual decision goes another step and suggests that these groups may be held to owe fiduciary duties to other members of their class, whether or not they have joined the group or ad hoc committee. With judges in the two most active jurisdictions for Chapter 11 bankruptcy cases now applying Rule 2019 more broadly, it will be interesting to see how creditors, investors, and debtors react in future cases.

Bankruptcy Judge's Research Binder Now Updated And Available

I have posted in the past about the helpful research binder that Chief Judge Randall J. Newsome of the United States Bankruptcy Court for the Northern District of California makes available to bankruptcy professionals and the public. Fortunately, Chief Judge Newsome has again updated his binder as of December 1, 2009, covering cases through Volume 410 of Bankruptcy Reports. Follow the links in this sentence to access the entire binder in PDF format and the HTML version organized by topic. The PDF version is capable of being searched using a key word or phrase.

The primary focus of the research binder is on Ninth Circuit law, as Chief Judge Newsome presides in the Northern District of California, but some out-of-circuit law is also included. The disclaimer Chief Judge Newsome includes puts the binder's use in context:

The following list of cases and supplemental information is presented for informational and educational purposes only. Though it represents the aggregation of 19 years of research, the Court makes no claims as to its current level of accuracy. Some of the cases set forth may very well have been superseded, reversed, or otherwise may no longer be good law. The Court has posted it with the intention to educate and assist those who may find it helpful. Accordingly, users should consider it a first, but by no means final, research tool, and should cite check all cases listed herein for continued viability prior to relying on such cases in practice.

With those caveats, and especially when used in combination with the new Google Scholar legal research tool, the binder is a helpful place to start when researching bankruptcy law issues in Ninth Circuit.

Powerful, Free Legal Research Tool Now Available

Last week, Google launched a new feature on its Google Scholar specialized search engine that enables full-text searching of published federal and state court opinions, as well as articles in certain legal journals. Users can access the new features by selecting the "Legal opinions and journals" bullet on the Google Scholar main search page. The cases in the Google Scholar database generally include official reporter citation page numbers throughout the decision. The other main search category available is "Articles," including or excluding patents.

By using the Advanced Scholar Search feature, you can engage in more tailored searches, such as within just federal court decisions, decisions from one or more individual states, or articles by specific authors, or in designated journals, date ranges, or subject matter fields. Google's official blog post on the new search feature gives additional information.

At the moment, it appears that not all unpublished decisions are available in Google Scholar search results, and Google's disclaimer states that it does not represent that results are complete or accurate. In addition, among other features, Google Scholar lacks the key number system, headnotes, cite-checking ability (although the "How Cited" link gives some information on follow-on citations), and access to a full range of legal journals available from long-standing legal search services such as LexisNexis and Westlaw. Still, as a supplement to Google's standard web search, the Google Scholar legal opinion and journal search engine is a powerful new -- and free -- place to start when doing bankruptcy or other legal research.

Second Circuit Decides Whether Unsecured Creditors Can Recover Post-Petition Attorney's Fees

On November 5, 2009, the U.S. Court of Appeals for the Second Circuit became the second court of appeals to answer the question left open in the U.S. Supreme Court's March 2007 decision in Travelers Casualty & Surety Co. of America v. Pacific Gas & Electric Co., 549 U.S. 443 (2007): Can unsecured creditors recover post-petition attorney's fees as part of their unsecured claims? For more on the Travelers decision, follow the link to this earlier post.

The Ninth Circuit's Earlier SNTL Corp. Decision. In June 2009, the Ninth Circuit, in a per curiam decision in In re SNTL Corp., 571 F.3d 826 (9th Cir. 2009), held that post-petition attorney’s fees were allowable as part of an unsecured prepetition contract claim. The Ninth Circuit adopted the December 2007 opinion of the Ninth Circuit Bankruptcy Appellate Panel, In re SNTL Corp., 380 B.R. 204 (9th Cir. BAP 2007), which is available by following the link in this sentence. You may find this earlier post on the SNTL Corp. case of interest as well.

The Second Circuit’s New Decision. In its November 5, 2009 opinion in Ogle v. Fidelity & Deposit Company of Maryland, the Second Circuit held -- as the Ninth Circuit did in the SNTL Corp. case -- that an unsecured creditor can include post-petition attorney’s fees authorized under a prepetition contract valid under state law. In Ogle, the Second Circuit extended its holding in United Merchants & Manufacturers, Inc. v. Equitable Life Assurance Society of the United States, 674 F.2d 134 (2d Cir. 1982), a case decided under the Bankruptcy Act, and concluded that United Merchants survived both the statutory revisions made by the Bankruptcy Code and the Supreme Court’s Travelers decision.

In reaching this result, the Second Circuit analyzed the issues presented, in part, as follows:

All of the fees at issue in Travelers were incurred post-petition; so the amount was necessarily unknown when the bankruptcy petition was filed. It follows that if an unsecured claim for post-petition fees was for that reason unrecoverable, the Travelers Court could have disposed of the claim on that simple, available ground alone. Travelers, therefore, proceeds along lines that, reasonably extended, would suggest (notwithstanding the Court’s express disclaimer) that section 502(b)’s requirement--that the court “shall determine the amount of such claim . . . as of the date of the filing of the petition”--does not bar recovery of post-petition attorneys’ fees.

In the present appeal, as in Travelers: The underlying contract is valid as a matter of state substantive law; none of the section 502(b)(2)-(9) exceptions apply; and the Code is silent as to the particular question presented--in Travelers, whether the Code allows “unsecured claims for contractual attorney’s fees incurred while litigating issues of bankruptcy law,” 549 U.S. at 453; and here, whether the Code allows unsecured claims for “fees incurred while litigating issues of” contract law more generally.

Accordingly, we hold that an unsecured claim for post-petition fees, authorized by a valid pre-petition contract, is allowable under section 502(b) and is deemed to have
arisen pre-petition.  Accord SNTL, 571 F.3d at 844 (“[W]e reject the position . . . that section 502(b) precludes such fees.”).
 

The Court then turned to the question of whether Section 506(b) of the Bankruptcy Code expressly disallows the recovery of attorney's fees as part of an unsecured claim:

As Travelers makes clear, the question is whether the Code disallows post-petition attorneys’ fees, and does so expressly. It was therefore decisive in Travelers that “the Code says nothing about unsecured claims for contractual attorney’s fees incurred while litigating issues of bankruptcy law.” 459 U.S. at 453 (emphasis in original). And while Travelers declined to address section 506(b) (because the parties had not raised the issue below), see id. at 454-56, it is decisive here that the Code says nothing about such fees incurred litigating things other than issues of bankruptcy law. The teaching of Travelers is therefore fully consonant with our decision in United Merchants.

Accordingly, we hold that section 506(b) does not implicate unsecured claims for post-petition attorneys’ fees, and it therefore interposes no bar to recovery.

Finally, the Second Circuit rejected arguments that (1) Section 502(b)(2)'s disallowance of unmatured interest bars claims for post-petition attorney's fees, (2) Section 502(e)(2) regarding claims for reimbursement or contribution implicitly forecloses post-petition attorney's fees, and (3) as a policy matter it would be unfair to allow contract creditors to recover post-petition attorney's fees when tort claimants and many trade creditors cannot.

Conclusion. We now have two U.S. Court of Appeals decisions this year holding that, after Travelers, post-petition attorney's fees are allowable as part of an unsecured claim if otherwise recoverable under a prepetition contract. Particularly given the major bankruptcy cases filed in the Southern District of New York, within the Second Circuit, unsecured creditors may make a point of including post-petition attorney's fees as part of their claims when their contracts so provide. This decision raises questions as well:

  • Will the potential allowance of post-petition attorney's fees for bankruptcy-related issues impact a debtor's reorganization prospects?
  • What procedures will debtors propose for managing the process as unsecured creditors amend their claims to add attorney's fees incurred in protecting their rights during the course of a bankruptcy case?
  • Will individual unsecured creditors become more active in Chapter 11 cases, particularly in those cases in which a large distribution is likely?
  • What standards will bankruptcy courts use to assess the reasonableness of an unsecured creditor's post-petition attorney's fees for bankruptcy-related issues?
  • Will claims buyers pay more for unsecured claims based on contracts providing for recovery of post-petition attorney's fees now that bankruptcy-related fees are recoverable?
  • Will creditors be more insistent on including attorney's fees provisions in contracts?

Not every unsecured creditor will have the right to attorney's fees, and most may not incur significant fees after a bankruptcy is filed. However, those that do now have another important arrow in their quiver when seeking to add those fees to their unsecured claims. It will be interesting to see how these issues play out in the months ahead.

 

A Matter Of Time: Important Amendments To The Bankruptcy Rules Are Coming December 1st

Nearly every year, changes are made to the set of rules that govern how bankruptcy cases are managed -- the Federal Rules of Bankruptcy Procedure. Normally, the changes address issues identified by an Advisory Committee made up of federal judges, bankruptcy attorneys, and others. This year, the amendments to the national bankruptcy rules are mainly the result of statutory changes enacted by Congress. The new amendments will take effect on December 1, 2009.

Timing Changes Across The Board. For years, the standard time periods for many actions in bankruptcy cases have been measured in round numbers -- 10 days for some, 20 days for others. Sometimes this has led to confusion about deadlines, especially when time periods straddle weekends or holidays. To simplify the calculation of bankruptcy time periods, and those in other non-bankruptcy laws, earlier this year Congress enacted the Statutory Time-Periods Technical Amendments Act of 2009. The main purpose of the Act is to switch to 7, 14, 21, and 28 day intervals for most bankruptcy procedures. Here's how the changes will be implemented in the Federal Rules of Bankruptcy Procedure:

  • 5 day periods become 7 day periods;
  • 10 day periods become 14 day periods;
  • 15 day periods become 14 day periods;
  • 20 day periods become 21 day periods;
  • 25 day periods become 28 day periods.

For example, a motion set for hearing on a Friday will now have objection and reply deadlines fall on Fridays. It also means that the era of the "20 day notice" in bankruptcy is over -- but it's just being replaced with the era of the "21 day notice." The change should make calculating due dates easier, although be aware that it will shorten or lengthen most of the previously standard notice periods under prior law. Rule 9006 is being revised extensively to reflect the new way of accounting for weekends and holidays. Periods that were 30 days or longer are essentially unchanged.

A Longer Appeal Period. So where is this going to have the biggest effect in the business bankruptcy realm? I think the impact will be felt most in the time to file an appeal from a bankruptcy court order. Amendments to Rule 8001 will extend the time for filing a notice of appeal by four days -- from 10 days to 14 days. This means that an order approving a settlement under Rule 9019, authorizing a Section 363 sale of assets, or confirming a plan of reorganization, among others, will not become final and no longer appealable until the 15th day following entry compared to the 11th day following entry under current law. After years of counting on bankruptcy court orders being final after only 10 days, parties will need to adjust their expectations on the finality of orders.

How To Access The Amended Rules. Bankruptcy attorneys and other professionals should review the amended rules to see the full range of the changes.

Local Rule Changes Are Also Coming. Expect to see bankruptcy courts around the country adopt conforming changes to their local rules. Two examples: the Northern District of California has already done so and the Southern District of New York is proposing to do so.

Conclusion. Although these timing changes are not as significant as amendments made a few years ago, they will affect virtually all time periods in the national, and in time local, bankruptcy rules that are currently less than 30 days. With under a month to go before they take effect, now is a good time to get on top of these amendments.

Major Amendments To The CCAA, Canada's Reorganization Law, Are Now In Force

In a post last year entitled "North Of The Border: Reorganization Under Canada's Companies' Creditors Arrangement Act," I discussed the various types of bankruptcy and insolvency proceedings available under Canadian law. Included in the discussion was the Companies' Creditors Arrangement Act, known as the CCAA, used by many Canadian companies to reorganize. At that time, although significant amendments had been enacted to the CCAA and other Canadian bankruptcy laws, those amendments had not "come into force," the final act necessary under the Canadian system before the changes in the law would become effective.

That changed on September 18, 2009, when these revisions to the CCAA and to the Bankruptcy and Insolvency Act, or BIA, finally came into force (joining a few other changes that came into force in July 2008). Canadian bankruptcy law has now been modified in a number of important ways, applicable to cases filed going forward.

For more on the new law, and Canadian bankruptcy issues generally, be sure to check out the website of the Office of the Superintendent of Bankruptcy Canada.

Fall 2009 Edition Of Absolute Priority Now Available

The Fall 2009 edition of the Absolute Priority newsletter, published by the Cooley Godward Kronish LLP Bankruptcy & Restructuring group, of which I am a member, has just been released. The newsletter gives updates on current developments and trends in the bankruptcy and workout area. Follow the links in this sentence to access a copy of the newsletter or to register to receive future editions. You can also subscribe to the blog to learn when future editions of the Absolute Priority newsletter are published, as well as to get updates on other bankruptcy topics.

The latest edition of Absolute Priority covers a range of cutting edge topics, including:

  • Developments in the General Growth Chapter 11 cases;
  • Updates on the General Motors and Chrysler bankruptcies;
  • Efforts in Congress to repeal certain of BAPCPA's business bankruptcy provisions; and
  • The "settlement payment" defense to fraudulent transfer claims against shareholders in leveraged buyouts.

This edition also reports on some of our recent representations, including debtors Pacific Ethanol Holding Co. and Crabtree & Evelyn, Ltd., and our work for official committees of unsecured creditors in Chapter 11 bankruptcy cases involving major retailers. Recent committee cases include Eddie Bauer, Ritz Camera, Filene's Basement, BT Tires Group, Boscov's, Gottschalk's, KB Toys, BTWW Retail, and G.I. Joe's, among others. Also discussed is our work for Levi Strauss & Co. in purchasing 73 outlet stores from the Anchor Blue Retail Group case and for Rackable Systems, Inc. (now known as Silicon Graphics International) in purchasing substantially all of the assets of Silicon Graphics, Inc. in its recent Chapter 11 case.

In addition, a note from my colleague, Jeffrey Cohen, the editor of Absolute Priority, discusses how Section 363 asset sales have become the chief means for companies to restructure in bankruptcy, and how the number of "going concern" sales has grown over the past few months compared to the period following the bankruptcy of Lehman Brothers in September 2008.

I hope you find this Fall's edition of Absolute Priority to be of interest.

New Site Features Free Insolvency Charts And Information

The American Bankruptcy Institute has launched a new site called "ABI's Chart of the Day," featuring a new insolvency-related economic or financial chart daily, plus a collection of prior charts. The topics covered range from FDIC information showing potentially troubled financial institutions, to the percentage of real estate owned properties sold in certain markets, to economic statistics in comparison to past recessions.

ABI describes the site as follows:

This resource is provided to give insolvency professionals a daily visual peek at the state of the economy.

The charts include links to related news items and other data, covering trends in retailing, housing, commercial real estate, personal income, employment and other indicators important to insolvency professionals.

Please visit abiworld.org for a full suite of tools to stay informed.

This site joins other helpful, free offerings from ABI, such as the Bankruptcy Code Wiki, with the entire current Bankruptcy Code, and a Bankruptcy Rules site, with a handy search feature enabling you to search all of the Federal Rules of Bankruptcy Procedure using key words.

Protecting IP Rights From A Licensor's Bankruptcy: What You Need To Know About Section 365(n)

Many companies rely on in-bound licenses of intellectual property, especially those involving patents or trade secrets, and spend millions of dollars on research, development, and ultimately commercialization of drugs or products incorporating the licensed IP. With so much at stake, licensees frequently ask a critical question: Can our license rights be terminated if the licensor files bankruptcy?

Assumption Or Rejection. A license is typically held to be an executory contract. This means that a licensor in bankruptcy (or its bankruptcy trustee) has the option of assuming or rejecting the license. Generally, a debtor licensor can assume a license if it meets the same tests (cures defaults and provides adequate assurance of future performance) required to assume other executory contracts.  Most licensees will not object to the assumption of their license as long as the debtor can actually continue to perform. Instead, the real concern for licensees is whether they risk losing their rights to the licensed IP if the license is rejected.

Bankruptcy Code Section 365(n). To address this concern, in 1988 Congress added Section 365(n) to the Bankruptcy Code to give licensees special protections.  If the debtor or trustee rejects a license, under Section 365(n) a licensee can elect to retain its rights to the licensed intellectual property, including a right to enforce an exclusivity provision. In return, the licensee must continue to make any required royalty payment. The licensee also can retain rights under any agreement supplementary to the license, which should include source code or other forms of technology escrow agreements.  Taken together, these provisions protect a licensee from being stripped of its rights to continue to use the licensed intellectual property.

Some Important Limitations. If the license is rejected, however, the licensor will no longer have to perform under the license. This means the licensor will not have to update or continue to develop the IP, and will not have to make available any updates later developed. In addition, Section 365(n) only applies in a U.S. bankruptcy case. It generally will not be of any help in a bankruptcy or insolvency of a non-U.S. licensor under applicable foreign law.

No Protection For Trademark Licensees. Many people expect intellectual property to include trademarks, but when Section 365(n) was enacted a special, limited definition of "intellectual property" was also added to the Bankruptcy Code. The bankruptcy definition includes trade secrets, U.S. patents and patent applications (less clear as to foreign patents), copyrights, and mask works, but it does not include trademarks. This distinction means that a trademark licensee enjoys none of Section 365(n)'s special protections and is at risk of losing its trademark license rights if the licensor files bankruptcy. For more on the special bankruptcy risk facing trademark licensees, follow the link in this sentence.

Getting The Most Out Of Section 365(n). Although Section 365(n) gives licensees significant comfort within limits, there are a number of approaches a licensee can take to maximize the statute's benefits while avoiding its pitfalls. Here are a few to consider:

  • Make sure you actually have a granted license. Section 365(n) only applies to actual license rights as they existed at the time the bankruptcy case was commenced. This means that an agreement by the licensor to grant a license to IP at some later date, including a springing license grant on a bankruptcy filing, will likely be unenforceable if a bankruptcy is filed. Get a present grant of a license to any important IP or risk not having a license to it at all.
  • Consider a technology escrow. Licensees sometimes forget that Section 365(n) is not self-executing. This means that Section 365(n) doesn't require the licensor to deliver the embodiment of the licensed intellectual property to the licensee unless the license or an agreement supplementary to the license expressly provides for such a right. One solution is to include this delivery provision in the license itself. Another common approach is to establish a technology (often a source code) escrow into which the embodiment and updated versions of the embodiment are in fact deposited, to be released to the licensee on specified conditions.
  • Refer to Section 365(n) in the license. Section 365(n) applies to licenses of bankruptcy-defined intellectual property whether it is mentioned in the license or not. That said, including an express reference that the license involves such IP, as the old saying goes, "wouldn't hurt." A provision in the license that the agreement involves IP covered by Section 365(n), although not binding on the bankruptcy court, may be helpful in persuading a bankruptcy trustee -- or the bankruptcy judge -- that the IP involved is indeed subject to Section 365(n)'s protections.
  • Save the election until later. If you do include a Section 365(n) reference in the license, it's usually better to state that no Section 365(n) election is then being made. Things change, and there is always a chance that the IP will turn out to be less important in future years, meaning you might elect to treat a rejected license as terminated.
  • Get bankruptcy advice before you sign the license. As the points above illustrate, even with Section 365(n), protecting your IP license can be tricky if a bankruptcy is later filed. Be sure to seek advice from bankruptcy counsel knowledgeable about IP licenses when the license is being drafted, not just after the licensor gets in financial trouble.

Conclusion. Section 365(n) of the Bankruptcy Code can provide valuable protections for licensees of intellectual property, but those protections have their limitations. Taking steps to maximize your rights when the license is being drafted can make a big difference if the licensor later files bankruptcy.

First Court Of Appeals Decision Addresses Question Left Open In The Supreme Court's Travelers Opinion: Can Unsecured Creditors Recover Post-Petition Attorney's Fees?

On June 23, 2009, the U.S. Court of Appeals for the Ninth Circuit became the first Court of Appeals to answer the question left open in the U.S. Supreme Court's March 2007 decision in Travelers Casualty & Surety Co. of America v. Pacific Gas & Electric Co. -- whether post-petition attorney's fees can be added to unsecured claims.

The Travelers Case. Before turning to the SNTL Corp. case itself, let's look back at the Supreme Court's decision. In March 2007, the U.S. Supreme Court overruled the Ninth Circuit's so-called Fobian rule in the Travelers Casualty & Surety Co. of America v. Pacific Gas & Electric Co. decision. However, it did not decide whether unsecured creditors could recover, as part of their unsecured claims, post-petition attorney's fees incurred during the course of the bankruptcy case. For more on the Travelers decision, follow the link in this sentence.

The SNTL Corp. BAP Decision. In the December 2007 BAP decision, Bankruptcy Judge Dennis Montali, writing for the unanimous BAP panel, held that that "claims for postpetition attorneys' fees cannot be disallowed simply because the claim of the creditor is unsecured." On the unrelated issue, the BAP held that a guarantor's liability was revived after a preference settlement.

The Ninth Circuit Rules In The SNTL Corp. Case. On June 23, 2009, the Ninth Circuit decided the appeal, issuing a brief, per curiam decision, stating as follows:

The Bankruptcy Appellate Panel decision is AFFIRMED for the reasons stated in its opinion in this case sub nom. We adopt the BAP opinion, In re SNTL Corp., 380 B.R. 204 (B.A.P. 9th Cir. 2007), as our own and attach it as an appendix to this opinion. See Appendix, infra.

A Second Look At The BAP's Decision. Given that the Ninth Circuit affirmed and adopted as its own the BAP opinion in its entirety, further review of the BAP's analysis is merited. In reaching its decision, the BAP carefully reviewed two earlier decisions by bankruptcy courts that had taken up the open "Travelers" issue, In re Qmect, Inc. (see earlier post on the Qmect decision) and In re Electric Machinery Enterprises, Inc. (see prior post on the Electric Machinery decision), as well as pre-Travelers law, and first explained its analysis of the interplay between Sections 502 and 506(b):

We are not persuaded by the approach of the Electric Machinery court and, like Qmect, we reject the argument that section 506(b) preempts postpetition attorneys’ fees for all except oversecured creditors. While we cannot predict how the Ninth Circuit will decide this issue in Travelers, we do find a clue in Joseph F. Sanson Inv. Co. v. 268 Ltd. (In re 268 Ltd.), 789 F.2d 674, 678 (9th Cir. 1986), where the Ninth Circuit observed that section 506(b) defines secured claims and does not limit unsecured claims:

When read literally, subsection (b) arguably limits the fees available to the oversecured creditor. When read in conjunction with § 506(a), however, it may be understood to define the portion of the fees which shall be afforded secured status. We adopt the latter reading.

268 Ltd., 789 F.2d at 678.

Next, the BAP discussed Section 502(b)(1)'s requirement that the court determine the amount of an unsecured claim as of the petition date:

The Electric Machinery court, like the bankruptcy court here and many of the pre-Travelers majority courts, disallowed the postpetition fees of an unsecured creditor because section 502(b)(1) provides that a bankruptcy court “shall determine the amount of such claim . . . as of the date of the filing of the petition” and the postpetition fees did not exist as of that date. Elec. Mach., 371 B.R. at 551; Pride Cos., 285 B.R. at 373. Because the amount of fees incurred postpetition cannot be determined or calculated as of the petition date, section 502(b) purportedly precludes their allowance. Id. We disagree with this approach, as it is inconsistent with the Bankruptcy Code’s broad definition of “claim,” which -- as discussed previously -- includes any right to payment, whether or not that right is contingent and unliquidated. See 11 U.S.C. § 101(5)(A); Qmect, 368 B.R. at 884.

The BAP then held that the Supreme Court's 1988 Timbers decision did not apply:

We believe that Electric Machinery’s reliance on Timbers is misplaced. Timbers provided that an undersecured creditor could not receive postpetition interest on the unsecured portion of its debt. Timbers, 484 U.S. at 380. This holding is consistent with section 502(b)(2), which specifically disallows claims for unmatured interest. Inasmuch as section 502(b) does not contain a similar prohibition against attorneys’ fees, the comparison between the current issue and that presented in Timbers is not persuasive.

Finally, the BAP held that it was unnecessary to reconcile the competing public policy considerations advanced by the Electric Machinery and Qmect decisions:

Because we find that the Bankruptcy Code itself provides the answer to this issue (by not specifically disallowing postpetition fees), we do not attempt to reconcile these policy concerns. In the end, it is the province of Congress to correct statutory dysfunctions and to resolve difficult policy questions embedded in the statute.

For more on this decision, as well as the BAP's discussion (now adopted by the Ninth Circuit) on the revival of a guarantor's liability after a preference settlement, this earlier post on the BAP's In re SNTL Corp. decision may be of interest.

On Remand From The Supreme Court's Travelers Decision. One interesting side note involves the BAP's December 2007 comment in the In re SNTL Corp. decision about being unable to predict how the Ninth Circuit would decide this issue in the Travelers case on remand from the U.S. Supreme Court. Months later, in May 2008, the Ninth Circuit issued this brief order in the Travelers case, effectively remanding the case for "consideration of the bankruptcy court in the first instance." The bankruptcy judge to whom the decision was remanded? Bankruptcy Judge Dennis Montali, who wrote the BAP opinion in In re SNTL Corp.

Impact On Unsecured Creditors? As the first ruling by a U.S. Court of Appeals on this open issue, the Ninth Circuit's decision may lead unsecured creditors to include post-petition attorney's fees as part of their allowed unsecured claims when their contracts or a statute provides for them outside of bankruptcy. It will be interesting to see whether the decision has a significant impact on how unsecured creditors in the Ninth Circuit and other jurisdictions pursue claims in bankruptcy cases, and how bankruptcy estates react to such claims for post-petition attorney's fees.

Section 363 Sales And Beyond: An M&A Lawyer's Perspective On Purchasing Assets From Distressed Companies

With the economy suffering through the longest recession since the 1930s, it's little wonder that much of the merger and acquisition ("M&A") activity these days has been focused on distressed companies. The Chrysler and General Motors cases may be the best-known examples, but Chapter 11 bankruptcy is frequently used by companies large and small to sell assets through Section 363 sales. The important intersection between bankruptcy and M&A deals in today's business climate was recently made the focus of an article in the Wall Street Journal, aptly called "Barbarians in Bankruptcy Court."

Although Section 363 sales are quite common, some distressed companies are able to complete an asset sale outside of bankruptcy. The sale may be made directly by the company, or the seller may actually be a lender foreclosing on its collateral under the Uniform Commercial Code. In still other situations, the seller may be an assignee acting through a general assignment for the benefit of creditors under state law.

Regardless of the path chosen, the landscape of distressed asset purchases can be significantly different from that traversed by many traditional M&A lawyers and, most importantly, their clients. Fortunately, one of my M&A partners at Cooley Godward Kronish LLP with significant experience in distressed acquisitions, Jennifer Fonner DiNucci, has recently written an insightful article on the subject. Entitled "Balancing the Risks and Benefits of Transactions Involving Distressed Companies," the article discusses the unique challenges -- and opportunities -- posed by distressed asset acquisitions. It also highlights some of the major issues that potential asset buyers encounter when dealing with a distressed seller, and points out key differences between distressed transactions and more traditional M&A deals with solvent companies.

The article makes for interesting -- and timely -- reading for anyone considering a purchase of assets from a distressed company.

General Motors Files Chapter 11 Bankruptcy In New York

General Motors Corp. filed for Chapter 11 bankruptcy protection this morning in the U.S. Bankruptcy Court for the Southern District of New York. Judge Robert E. Gerber has been assigned to preside over the case.

A copy of GM's bankruptcy petition is available here. The petition listed approximately $82 billion in assets and $172 billion in liabilities. A copy of GM's press release regarding its bankruptcy can be found at the link in this sentence. GM has also created a restructuring website where additional information for customers, suppliers, and others can be found.

Spring 2009 Edition Of Bankruptcy Resource Is Now Available

The Spring 2009 edition of the Absolute Priority newsletter, published by the Cooley Godward Kronish LLP Bankruptcy & Restructuring group, of which I am a member, has just been released. The newsletter gives updates on current developments and trends in the bankruptcy and workout area. Follow the links in this sentence to access a copy of the newsletter or to register to receive future editions. You can also subscribe to the blog to learn when future editions of the Absolute Priority newsletter are published, as well as to get updates on other bankruptcy topics.

The latest edition of Absolute Priority covers a range of cutting edge topics, including:

  • Claim issues involving the Madoff SIPA proceeding;
  • How new Bankruptcy Code provisions involving swap agreements and swap participants are being interpreted;
  • The importance of the mutuality requirement in setoffs;
  • Post-petition rent and Section 503(b)(9) "20 day goods" claims; and
  • The use of a trademark after a bankruptcy petition is filed.

This edition also reports on some of our recent representations of official committees of unsecured creditors in Chapter 11 bankruptcy cases involving major retailers. These include Mervyn's, Boscov's, Gottschalk's, Lenox Sales, Goody's, KB Toys, BTWW Retail, and Innovative Luggage, among others. In addition, a note from my colleague, Jeffrey Cohen, the editor of Absolute Priority, discusses the current economic climate and the impact it continues to have on how debtors and creditors have been approaching bankruptcies and restructurings.

I hope you find this latest edition of Absolute Priority to be a helpful resource.

Text Of Legislation To Repeal Certain Of BAPCPA's Business Bankruptcy Changes Affecting Retailers Now Available

As reported in a post on the blog earlier this week, on April 2, 2009, Representative Jerrold Nadler (D-NY) introduced a bill entitled the "Business Reorganization and Job Protection Act of 2009." At that time the official text of the legislation was not available.

The bill would repeal changes made by BAPCPA relating to (1) the deadline to assume or reject non-residential real property leases, (2) utility deposits, (3) the Section 503(b)(9) administrative claim, and (4) reclamation. These BAPCPA provisions are among those that have had a significant impact on retailers. For a discussion of the bill's provisions, you can read this blog's earlier post on the legislation or the explanation of the bill by the NACM. It will be interesting to follow the bill as it makes its way through the legislative process in Congress.

Legislation Introduced To Repeal Certain Business Bankruptcy Changes Made By BAPCPA's 2005 Amendments

On April 2, 2009, Representative Jerrold Nadler (D-NY) introduced a bill entitled the "Business Reorganization and Job Protection Act of 2009." The bill has been co-sponsored by Representative Steve Cohen (D-TN), the Chairman of the Subcommittee on Commercial and Administrative Law of the United States House of Representatives Committee on the Judiciary. As of the date of this post, the bill's official text has not been printed but the National Association of Credit Management has made available on its website what appears to be a final or near-final draft of the legislation, which you can access by clicking here. I plan to provide an update on the blog once the official version of the bill as introduced becomes available.

Introduction of the bill follows testimony before the Subcommittee on Commercial and Administrative Law by a number of bankruptcy professionals and law professors, including my partner and the Chair of Cooley Godward Kronish LLP's Bankruptcy & Restructuring Group, Lawrence Gottlieb. Click here for a prior post about his September 26, 2008 testimony, which focused on the disappearance of reorganizations of retailers since the passage of the Bankruptcy Abuse Prevention and Consumer Protection Act of 2005 (known as "BAPCPA"). A link to Representative Nadler's press release on the bill's introduction can be found here.

The Legislation's Proposed Changes. The Business Reorganization and Job Protection Act of 2009, introduced as H.R. 1942, would make several major amendments to the Bankruptcy Code. The common theme is that the proposed bill would repeal certain changes made by BAPCPA and restore the statutory language that was in place before BAPCPA was enacted in 2005. The four principal changes are as follows:

  • Real Estate Leases. The bill would change Section 365(d)(4) of the Bankruptcy Code by repealing the maximum 210-day period within which debtors could assume or reject non-residential real property leases. Instead of the current 120-day initial period and up to a 90-day extension, the statute would revert back to the initial 60-day period under the prior law but, more importantly, would allow the bankruptcy court, for cause, to grant further extensions without any time limit.
  • Utilities. Similarly, the bill would repeal Section 366(c) of the Bankruptcy Code, which now requires a deposit of cash or certain cash equivalents to provide adequate assurance of payment to utilities. If enacted, the bill would allow debtors to establish adequate assurance of payment with something short of a monetary deposit, as had been the case under the pre-BAPCPA law.
  • 20-Day Goods Administrative Claim. The bill would also make changes to the law relating to shipments by vendors prior to a bankruptcy filing. It would repeal Section 503(b)(9) of the Bankruptcy Code, added by BAPCPA, which gives an administrative claim to vendors for the value of goods received by a debtor in the ordinary course of business during the 20 days before the bankruptcy petition.
  • Reclamation. Another change the bill proposes to make is to go back to the pre-BAPCPA language in Section 546(c) of the Bankruptcy Code governing reclamation claims, specifically to repeal language that had expanded the potential reclamation claim for vendors to the 45 days before a bankruptcy petition. The bill would reinstate the pre-BAPCPA provisions restricting reclamation to that provided for under the Uniform Commercial Code (generally only a 10 day period) and permitting an administrative claim or secured claim to be provided to a reclaiming vendor in lieu of a return of the goods pursuant to a valid reclamation claim.
  • Effective Date. Finally, the bill proposes that its changes would apply to cases commenced on or after the date of its enactment, meaning it would apply to cases filed after the bill became law but not to cases filed before it became law.

Conclusion. If the Business Reorganization and Job Protection Act of 2009 were enacted, it could have a major impact on Chapter 11 bankruptcy cases, in particular those involving retailers. As explained in a recent article by several of my colleagues, the cumulative changes made by BAPCPA have had a profound impact on retail Chapter 11 cases. Repealing them could enable retailers the opportunity to emerge from Chapter 11 -- the way they often did in the years before the BAPCPA amendments were adopted. Otherwise, we are likely to continue to see more retailers forced into going of out business sales in Chapter 11.

U.S. Supreme Court Shows Interest In Deciding Whether The Hypothetical Test Or The Actual Test Should Be Used To Determine If IP Licenses Can Be Assumed In Bankruptcy

It looks like the U.S. Supreme Court, or at least two of the Justices, is interested in deciding whether the "hypothetical test" or the "actual test" should be used in determining whether an intellectual property license can be assumed by a debtor in possession under Section 365(c)(1) of the Bankruptcy Code. That was the clear message from the somewhat unusual statement by Justice Kennedy, with whom Justice Breyer joined, issued on March 23, 2009, in connection with the Supreme Court's denial of a writ of certiorari in the N.C.P. Marketing Group, Inc. case. You can read a copy of the entire statement by following the link in the prior sentence.

The N.C.P. Marketing Case. As a refresher, in 2005, the U.S. District Court for the District of Nevada issued its first of a kind decision, In re: N.C.P. Marketing Group, Inc., 337 B.R. 230 (D.Nev. 2005), holding that trademark licenses are personal and nonassignable in bankruptcy absent a provision in the trademark license to the contrary. Click here for a copy of the N.C.P Marketing Group decision and here, here, and here to read earlier posts on the case. Last May, the Ninth Circuit affirmed the District Court's judgment "for the reasons provided by that court" in an order designed as "not for publication."

Assumption And Assignment. A key basis for the District Court's decision in the N.C.P. Marketing Group case was the way the Ninth Circuit has interpreted Section 365(c)(1), specifically on the question of whether a debtor in possession can assume an intellectual property license. In bankruptcy parlance, assumption means that the debtor gets to keep the license. Usually, debtors are allowed to exercise their business judgment when deciding whether to assume or reject (read: breach and stop performing) an executory contract, as well as to assume and assign one to a third party. However, Section 365(c)(1) of the Bankruptcy Code puts a limit on a debtor's ability to assign executory contracts, and perhaps even to assume them, when "applicable law" gives the non-debtor party to the contract the right to refuse to deal with someone else. In the N.C.P. Marketing Group decision, the District Court held that federal trademark law under the Lanham Act was such "applicable law" and rendered non-exclusive trademark licenses nonassignable.

The Key Bankruptcy Code Section. Section 365(c)(1) is so important to this debate that it bears careful review. Here's what it says:

(c) The trustee may not assume or assign any executory contract or unexpired lease of the debtor, whether or not such contract or lease prohibits or restricts assignment of rights or delegation of duties, if—

(1)(A) applicable law excuses a party, other than the debtor, to such contract or lease from accepting performance from or rendering performance to an entity other than the debtor or the debtor in possession, whether or not such contract or lease prohibits or restricts assignment of rights or delegation of duties; and

(B) such party does not consent to such assumption or assignment.

Hypothetical Versus Actual Test. If a debtor cannot assign an IP license without consent of the licensor, can it at least assume the license? That question has led courts to examine ever so closely the first seven words of Section 365(c): "The trustee may not assume or assign..."

  • When the statute says that the trustee may not assume or assign an IP license, does the word "or" really mean "and" too?
  • Put differently, what happens when a debtor is only trying to assume (keep) an IP license and is not actually trying to assign it? Does the Bankruptcy Code language mean that it can neither assume nor assign the license or does it only mean that the debtor cannot assign the license?
  • That, in a nutshell, is the difference between the so-called "hypothetical test" (which reads Section 365(c)(1)'s language as asking whether the debtor hypothetically could assign the license even if it's only proposing to assume it) and the "actual test" (which interprets the statute's language as asking only what the debtor is actually proposing to do).
  • The U.S. Courts of Appeals for at least three circuits have adopted the hypothetical test. The Ninth Circuit (covering California, Nevada, Arizona, and a number of other Western states), the Third Circuit (which includes Delaware, the venue of many Chapter 11 cases), and the Fourth Circuit (covering Virginia, West Virginia, Maryland, and North and South Carolina), have held that Section 365(c)(1) gives most IP licensors a veto right over proposals by a Chapter 11 debtor to assign -- and even to assume -- IP licenses.
  • For a more complete discussion of these issues, take a look at this earlier post, entitled "Assumption of Intellectual Property Licenses in Bankruptcy: Are Recent Cases Tilting Toward Debtors?"

Justice Kennedy's Statement. N.C.P. Marketing Group petitioned the U.S. Supreme Court for a writ of certiorari, seeking review of the decision denying it the ability to assume the trademark license. Although also voting to deny review, Justice Kennedy issued a three-page statement on that decision to express his view, joined in by Justice Breyer, that the Supreme Court should considering granting certiorari in a future case on the "significant question" of whether the hypothetical test or the actual test should be applied in interpreting Section 365(c)(1) of the Bankruptcy Code. Justice Kennedy summed up his analysis this way:

The division in the courts over the meaning of §365(c)(1) is an important one to resolve for Bankruptcy Courts and for businesses that seek reorganization. This petition for certiorari, however, is not the most suitable case for our resolution of the conflict. Addressing the issue here might first require us to resolve issues that may turn on the correct interpretation of antecedent questions under state law and trademark-protection principles. For those and other reasons, I reluctantly agree with the Court’s decision to deny certiorari. In a different case the Court should consider granting certiorari on this significant question.

Justice Kennedy's discussion of the two tests suggests that he (and perhaps Justice Breyer) may be leaning toward the actual test. Although noting that the actual test "may present problems of its own," including that it aligns Section 365 "with sound bankruptcy policy only at the cost of departing from at least one interpretation of the plain text of the law," Justice Kennedy aimed most of his criticism in the statement at the hypothetical test.

  • Specifically, Justice Kennedy commented that one "arguable criticism of the hypothetical approach is that it purchases fidelity to the Bankruptcy Code's text by sacrificing sound bankruptcy policy." He stated that the hypothetical test "may prevent debtors-in-possession from continuing to exercise their rights under nonassignable contracts, such as patent and copyright licenses." Continuing, he noted that without these licenses, "some debtors-in-possession may be unable to effect the successful reorganization that Chapter 11 was designed to promote."
  • He also remarked on what he perceived as a "windfall" to nondebtor parties to valuable executory contracts. While outside of bankruptcy the nondebtor cannot renege on its agreement, if the debtor files bankruptcy "then the nondebtor obtains the power to reclaim--and resell at the prevailing, potentially higher market rate--the rights it sold to the debtor." Although most non-exclusive licenses are not treated as a sale of intellectual property, Justice Kennedy appears to view the potential loss of IP license rights due to a bankruptcy filing as an unfair result.

Conclusion. In denying review in the N.C.P. Marketing Group case, the Supreme Court has let stand the decision of the courts below that, where the hypothetical test applies as it does in the Ninth Circuit, a non-exclusive trademark license cannot be assumed by a debtor in possession. However, given the detailed statement issued by Justice Kennedy, and joined in by Justice Breyer, it appears that the chances of the Supreme Court granting certiorari in a future IP license assumption case have increased. If such a case reaches the Supreme Court, the current split in the circuits on this important intersection between bankruptcy and intellectual property law may finally be resolved.

If Madoff Investors Are Sued By The SIPA Trustee And Pay Money Back, Can They File Proofs Of Claim After The Bar Date?

Recently, I posted about SIPA liquidations of brokerage firms, prompted by the Securities Investor Protection Act (known as SIPA) liquidations of Lehman Brothers, Inc. and Bernard L. Madoff Investment Securities LLC. An interesting issue has come up in the Madoff case involving investors who redeemed their accounts before the Madoff bankruptcy was filed. In other alleged Ponzi scheme cases, trustees have sued such investors asserting fraudulent transfer or other claims. The investors in turn often raise defenses, including that they redeemed their accounts in good faith and without any knowledge of the alleged fraud, and lengthy and complex litigation usually results.

Resolution of such litigation can come long after the deadline set for filing proofs of claim (known as a "bar date"). This raises a question: if investors end up paying money back to the estate as a result of the trustee's litigation, will they be able to file proofs of claim -- after the bar date -- for the amounts they have to return? Before turning to that question, let's take a look at how such post-bar date claims are dealt with in non-SIPA bankruptcy cases.

Section 502(h) Of The Bankruptcy Code. Under the Bankruptcy Code, if a person or entity is sued by the bankruptcy estate (usually by a trustee, the debtor in possession, or a creditors' committee) for receipt of an alleged preference or fraudulent transfer, they will be able to file a proof of claim if they end up paying money back to the bankruptcy estate in settlement or as a result of a judgment. Bankruptcy Code section 502(h) expressly covers this situation:

(h) A claim arising from the recovery of property under section 522, 550, or 553 of this title shall be determined, and shall be allowed under subsection (a), (b), or (c) of this section, or disallowed under subsection (d) or (e) of this section, the same as if such claim had arisen before the date of the filing of the petition.

Section 502(h) recognizes that resolution of avoidance actions may come long after the original bar date for filing proofs of claim has past and allows holders of these later-arising claims to share in the estate along with other creditors. The Bankruptcy Code treats these claims as having arisen at the time of the payment back to the bankruptcy estate and allows proofs of claim to be filed months or even years after the bar date. 

The Claims Bar Date In SIPA Liquidations. In a SIPA liquidation, there are generally two claims bar dates. The first bar date set is for customer claims, in which customers of the failed brokerage firm seek to recover the securities in their accounts (or more likely in the Madoff case, the securities that were supposed to have been in their accounts). The Securities Investor Protection Corporation insurance of up to $500,000 applies to customer claims. A second bar date, usually a few months later, is for general claims. General creditors may include customers with claims in excess of the $500,000 SIPC protection or those who have more traditional trade creditor or other claims. 

The Madoff Case. In the Madoff case, last month several investors filed a motion seeking to have the bar date order clarified with regard to their potential claims in the event that the Madoff trustee later sued them and they were forced to return funds under a fraudulent transfer or other avoidance (sometimes called a  "clawback") cause of action after the general claims bar date.

  • These investors had previously redeemed some or all of their investments, and were seeking an order holding that claims arising from avoidance actions could be filed within 30 days after the judgment giving rise to the claim became final, a provision common in non-SIPA bankruptcy bar date orders due to Bankruptcy Code section 502(h).
  • The moving parties were concerned that without this clarification, any such claims they filed after the bar date might be held to be barred. On the other hand, if they were forced to file a protective claim before the bar date, they would submit to the court's equitable jurisdiction and may be held to have waived their right to a jury trial in any avoidance action brought against them.
  • The Madoff trustee filed an opposition to the motion (copy available at the prior link) arguing, among other things, that these investors were not creditors, had not been sued, and as a result did not present an actual case or controversy ripe for adjudication. In addition, the trustee argued that Section 502(h) of the Bankruptcy Code was inapplicable, contending that it was inconsistent with an absolute bar date provision under SIPA. (The SIPA statute provides that Bankruptcy Code provisions are generally applicable in SIPA cases to the extent consistent with SIPA.)
  • The SIPC also filed a response to the motion (copy available at the prior link) making arguments similar to those advanced by the trustee. In particular, the SIPC argued that Section 502(h) was inconsistent with what the SIPC called SIPA's "immutable" bar date.

The Court's Decision. In a five-page decision issued on February 24, 2009, U.S. Bankruptcy Judge Burton R. Lifland denied the motion, first holding that the Court did not have the discretion to extend the bar dates involved. (A copy of the decision is available by clicking on the link in the prior sentence.) The Court then stated that the motion essentially sought a determination of whether Section 502(h) of the Bankruptcy Code was applicable in SIPA liquidations. Because no avoidance action had yet been filed, the Court held that the requested relief, if granted, would amount to an improper advisory opinion.

  • As a result, the Court refused to decide whether Bankruptcy Code Section 502(h) applies in SIPA cases, commenting as follows: "Although section 78fff(b) of SIPA specifies that the provisions of the Bankruptcy Code shall apply in SIPA liquidation proceedings, to the extent that they are consistent with SIPA, it is unclear whether section 502(h) of the Code would apply. 15 U.S.C. § 78fff(b) (1981)."
  • The Court concluded by noting that the investors could file a protective proof of claim before the general claims bar date, although that would subject them to the Court's equitable jurisdiction.

An Open Question. Although the Court denied the motion, it left open the ultimate issue involved -- whether Section 502(h) of the Bankruptcy Code applies in SIPA liquidations and permits parties to file proofs of claim after the bar date if they are sued by a trustee and later have to return funds or other property. With the issue undecided for now, some investors may choose to file a protective proof of claim before the bar date passes.

New Article Looks At BAPCPA's Impact On Retailers In Chapter 11

My colleagues Lawrence C. Gottlieb, Michael Klein, and Ronald R. Sussman recently authored an article entitled "BAPCPA's Effects on Retail Chapter 11s Are Profound," in the February 2009 edition of the The Journal of Corporate Renewal, published by the Turnaround Management Association. You can access a copy of the article by clicking on its title in the prior sentence.

What's their assessment of the impact of the Bankruptcy Abuse Prevention and Consumer Protection Act of 2005 (known as BAPCPA) on retailer Chapter 11 bankruptcies? Here's an excerpt:

BAPCPA’s numerous creditor-friendly amendments and modifications have profoundly impacted the Chapter 11 process, to the point that it is nearly impossible for retailers to reorganize, regardless of the prevailing national and international economic conditions.

Time and again in the three years since its enactment, BAPCPA has significantly impaired the ability of retailers to obtain the necessary post-petition financing and breathing room from creditors to test and implement a reorganization strategy, regardless of the debtor’s capital structure, the fluctuating state of the credit markets, or the extent to which they compete with large discount retailers like WalMart or online retailers like Amazon.

The article details several of the critical changes BAPCPA made, their effect on retailers, and how the timing of a bankruptcy filing is often critical for a retailer to have any chance of trying for a going concern sale to avoid complete liquidation through going out of business sales.

The Cooley Bankruptcy & Restructuring Group, which Lawrence Gottlieb chairs, is representing official committees of unsecured creditors in many high-profile national and regional retail bankruptcies, including Steve & Barry’s, The Bombay Company, Hancock Fabrics, Lillian Vernon, The Sharper Image, Mervyns, Shoe Pavilion, Boscov’s and Goody’s. The article, drawn from these recent experiences, is important reading for retailers, creditors, and insolvency professionals alike.

Free Online Bankruptcy Research Tool Now Updated

Last year I posted about the research binder that Chief Judge Randall J. Newsome of the United States Bankruptcy Court for the Northern District of California makes available to bankruptcy professionals and the public. Well, Chief Judge Newsome has now updated his binder as of February 5, 2009, covering cases through Volume 395 of Bankruptcy Reports. Follow the links in this sentence to access the entire binder in PDF format and the HTML version organized by topic. The PDF version is capable of being searched using a key word or phrase.

The primary focus of the research binder is on Ninth Circuit law given that Chief Judge Newsome presides in the Northern District of California, but some out-of-circuit law is also included. The disclaimer Chief Judge Newsome includes puts the binder's use in context:

The following list of cases and supplemental information is presented for informational and educational purposes only. Though it represents the aggregation of 19 years of research, the Court makes no claims as to its current level of accuracy. Some of the cases set forth may very well have been superseded, reversed, or otherwise may no longer be good law. The Court has posted it with the intention to educate and assist those who may find it helpful. Accordingly, users should consider it a first, but by no means final, research tool, and should cite check all cases listed herein for continued viability prior to relying on such cases in practice.

With those comments in mind, the binder can be a very helpful place to start when researching bankruptcy law issues in Ninth Circuit.

The SIPC And SIPA Liquidations: When A Brokerage Firm Goes Bankrupt

It's an organization that can go for years without ever making the news. Then along comes a financial crisis -- and Lehman Brothers and Madoff -- and suddenly the SIPC finds itself at the center of some very big stories. This post takes a look at the SIPC, its role in broker-dealer liquidations, how a SIPA liquidation differs from Chapter 7 liquidation, and how it affects businesses and individuals with accounts at a failed brokerage firm.

What Is The SIPC? SIPC stands for the Securities Investor Protection Corporation. This federally-created nonprofit corporation describes its mission as follows:

When a brokerage firm is closed due to bankruptcy or other financial difficulties and customer assets are missing, SIPC steps in as quickly as possible and, within certain limits, works to return customers' cash, stock and other securities. Without SIPC, investors at financially troubled brokerage firms might lose their securities or money forever or wait for years while their assets are tied up in court.

The SIPC and its activities are governed by the Securities Investor Protection Act, known as SIPA, which was enacted in 1970. The SIPA is not in Title 11 of the United States Code where the Bankruptcy Code is found, but in Title 15, together with other securities laws. That said, the SIPA incorporates many provisions of the Bankruptcy Code.

When Does The SIPC Get Involved? When a SIPC-member brokerage fails, the SIPC has the authority to step in. If the brokerage has filed a bankruptcy -- and notwithstanding the automatic stay -- the SIPC can file a lawsuit in the district court seeking a protective decree. Once granted, the Chapter 7 bankruptcy proceeding is put on hold and the case becomes a SIPA liquidation instead.  Here's how the SIPC explains its role:

The [SIPC] either acts as trustee or works with an independent court-appointed trustee in a missing asset case to recover funds. The statute that created SIPC provides that customers of a failed brokerage firm receive all non-negotiable securities that are already registered in their names or in the process of being registered. All other so-called "street name" securities are distributed on a pro rata basis. At the same time, funds from the SIPC reserve are available to satisfy the remaining claims of each customer up to a maximum of $500,000. This figure includes a maximum of $100,000 on claims for cash. Recovered funds are used to pay investors whose claims exceed SIPC's protection limit of $500,000. SIPC often draws down its reserve to aid investors.  

As this explanation notes, there is a $500,000 per customer limit to SIPC protection, including a $100,000 limit on claims for cash held in an account. These apply to both businesses and individuals. Some brokerage firms also have private insurance in addition to the SIPC protection.

How Is A SIPA Liquidation Different From A Chapter 7 Bankruptcy? Although Chapter 7 bankruptcy and SIPA liquidations both involve the liquidation of a brokerage firm, there is an enormous difference in terms of what happens to each customer's securities.

In a Chapter 7 bankruptcy of a brokerage firm, the bankruptcy trustee is required to liquidate -- that means sell -- all of the securities held in "street name" by the failed brokerage. Section 748 of the Bankruptcy Code, part of Chapter 7's special stockbroker liquidation provisions, spells it out:

As soon as practicable after the date of the order for relief, the trustee shall reduce to money, consistent with good market practice, all securities held as property of the estate, except for customer name securities delivered or reclaimed under section 751 of this title.

Subject to certain exceptions, in Chapter 7 customers receive a pro rata share of the proceeds from the sale of the securities, not the securities themselves. The only securities that are not sold are "customer name securities," which are handed back to their owners. (More on the difference between street name and customer name securities below.)

In a SIPA liquidation, the trustee's goal is exactly the opposite. Instead of being required to sell the securities, a SIPA trustee works to return to customers the securities in their accounts, often through a transfer of the accounts to a financially healthy brokerage firm.  When that isn't possible, the SIPA trustee has the authority to purchase securities to replace any that were missing, tapping into the SIPC's reserve fund when necessary to cover the acquisition costs. If securities are missing or the SIPA trustee is otherwise unable to return a customer's "street name" securities, then the brokerage's firms remaining customer assets are divided up and funds distributed on a pro rata basis based on the total size of "net equity claims" of customers (generally, net of any margin loans owed by the customer). As in a Chapter 7, "customer name securities" are returned to the customer, including those in the process of being registered in the customer's name.

Customers generally prefer SIPA liquidations over Chapter 7 bankruptcy. (Stockbrokers and commodity brokers are not permitted to file a Chapter 11 bankruptcy.) Most SIPC member brokerages that file bankruptcy end up either in a SIPA liquidation or with the SIPC directly involved.

What Are Customer Name Securities? As an aside, there is a big distinction between street name and customer name securities.

  • As the term implies, customer name securities are a typically limited group of securities held by a brokerage firm that are literally registered with the issuer in the customer's name, such as an actual stock certificate registered in and bearing the customer's own name.
  • These days most securities are registered in "street name," with the actual legal owner being Cede & Co., the Depository Trust Corporation's nominee name.
  • Each brokerage has its own DTC participant account holding the securities for all of its customers, and the brokerage in turn keeps records of which customer owns which securities in the DTC account.
  • Street name securities are far easier to trade than customer name securities because the trade can be accomplished via DTC instead of having to make a physical transfer of a stock certificate.

The Customer Claim Bar Date. In both a Chapter 7 and a SIPA liquidation, a deadline, known as a bar date, will be established by which creditors claims must be filed. However, in a SIPA liquidation a separate "customer claim" bar date is also set. Customers seeking SIPC protection must file their claims by that date using a special customer claim form, which asks for details on the securities in the customer's account, dates of trades, and other information. Follow the link for an example of the SIPC claim form used in the Lehman Brothers SIPA liquidation. If the customer's account has not already been transferred to a solvent brokerage firm, a customer with an allowed claim will receive back the securities that were held in their account at the failed brokerage firm, together with any cash held, up to the SIPC protection limits.

Where To Learn More About SIPA Liquidations. For additional information on SIPA liquidations and their Chapter 7 counterparts, you may find this discussion on the U.S. Court system's website of interest. In addition, SIPA trustees appointed in brokerage cases frequently establish a case-specific website. These links will take you to the websites created by the Lehman Brothers SIPA trustee and the Bernard L. Madoff Investment Securities SIPA trustee.

Conclusion. They may not be common, and the SIPC does not provide the same type of protection as the FDIC, but SIPA liquidations can play an important role in protecting investors when brokerage firms fail. However, the SIPC is generally able to intervene only when one of its member firms fails, making that little-noticed "Member SIPC" designation more significant that most investors realize. 

Amendments To The Federal Bankruptcy Rules Take Effect December 1, 2008

Nearly every year, changes are made to the Federal Rules of Bankruptcy Procedure -- the ones that govern how bankruptcy cases are managed -- to address issues identified by an Advisory Committee made up of federal judges, bankruptcy attorneys, and others. This year's amendments to the national bankruptcy rules take effect on December 1, 2008. 

Business Bankruptcy Rule Changes. Unlike the more substantive modifications made last year (discussed here), this year's amendments make a host of relatively smaller, but still important, changes. The most notable ones for business bankruptcy cases involve privacy concerns. New rules have been put in place to protect patients when health care businesses file for bankruptcy while others govern the proposed sale or transfer of personally identifiable information by any type of business. Separate rule changes implement provisions of Chapter 15 (the Bankruptcy Code's cross-border and international insolvency chapter), address a range of issues in small business Chapter 11 cases, grant courts more flexibility in giving notice to foreign creditors, introduce various consumer bankruptcy procedural changes, and establish a process to allow some bankruptcy court decisions to be appealed directly to the U.S. Court of Appeals.

Interim Bankruptcy Rules Being Replaced. These rules also replace the interim bankruptcy rules that have been in place for the past few years following the enactment of the Bankruptcy Abuse Prevention and Consumer Protection Act of 2005 (known as BAPCPA). Some bankruptcy courts, such as the District of Delaware and the Southern District of New York, have already issued general orders retracting the effectiveness of the interim rules effective as of December 1, 2008.

Rules Of The Road. At a time when the financial crisis is likely to push more and more companies into Chapter 11, bankruptcy attorneys and other insolvency professionals will want to review the rule changes closely to make sure they are following the most current version of the Federal Rules of Bankruptcy Procedure. For debtors, creditors, and other parties, this year's rule amendments should help make management of Chapter 11 bankruptcy cases more consistent with BAPCPA's changes and, potentially, a more efficient process.

Fall 2008 Edition Of Bankruptcy Resource Is Now Available

The Fall 2008 edition of the Absolute Priority newsletter, published by the Cooley Godward Kronish LLP Bankruptcy & Restructuring group, of which I am a member, has just been released. The newsletter gives updates on current developments and trends in the bankruptcy and workout area. Follow the links in this sentence to access a copy of the newsletter or to register to receive future editions. You can also subscribe to the blog to learn when future editions of the Absolute Priority newsletter are published, as well as to get updates on other bankruptcy topics.

The latest edition of Absolute Priority covers a range of cutting edge topics, including:

  • Claims and defenses under the WARN Act;
  • The Supreme Court's decision on transfer taxes and bankruptcy sales;
  • Section 363 "free and clear" sales in bankruptcy; and
  • The interplay between claim objections and the Section 503(b)(9) "20 day goods" administrative claim.

This edition also has information on some of our recent representations of official committees of unsecured creditors in Chapter 11 bankruptcy cases involving major retailers. These include Mervyn's, Boscov's, Hancock Fabrics, Steve & Barry's, Goody's, Sharper Image, The Bombay Company, and Shoe Pavilion, among others. In addition, a note from my partner Adam Rogoff, the editor of Absolute Priority, discusses how the current economic problems will require lenders, unsecured creditors, and others to consider the impact of Chapter 11 bankruptcy on their rights.

I hope you find this latest edition of Absolute Priority to be a helpful resource.

Second Liens And Recharacterization: Is More Litigation Around The Corner?

In many Chapter 11 bankruptcy cases, unsecured creditors investigate whether a basis exists to recharacterize existing secured debt as equity. The reason? A successful challenge can turn first or second lien secured debt into "back-of-the-line" capital contributions, enabling unsecured creditors to realize a much greater recovery. A recent article by two of my Bankruptcy & Restructuring Group colleagues at Cooley Godward Kronish LLP, Ronald R. Sussman and Michael A. Klein, digs deeper into the complex issues behind these claims.

Appearing in the October 2008 edition of The Journal of Corporate Renewal published by the Turnaround Management Association, the article is entitled "Recharacterization Battles Likely in Next Round of Bankruptcies." You can access a copy of the article, reprinted with permission of The Journal of Corporate Renewal (© 2008, The Journal of Corporate Renewal), by clicking on its title in the prior sentence. It first discusses the concept of recharacterization itself, including the key factors courts typically apply. Next, the article compares recharacterization to the doctrine of equitable subordination under Section 510(c) of the Bankruptcy Code and examines some of the key differences between the two.

After setting the stage, the article then looks ahead to what appears to be a coming wave of bankruptcy cases. It focuses on how future efforts by unsecured creditors to challenge second lien loans -- a type of financing that has become a major part of corporate capital structures over the past several years -- may fare:

The next wave of bankruptcies undoubtedly will include attempts by unsecured creditors to recharacterize second lien debt as equity, especially when the second lien holder is an insider of the debtor. However, the current framework established by Bankruptcy Courts presents significant obstacles to unsecured creditors seeking to knock out the second lien claims of lenders that provided capital on a purportedly secured basis to a struggling debtor that was unable to find capital from alternative sources.

The article observes that, given the present state of the law, courts will have to embrace a more flexible legal standard if unsecured creditors are to have success in recharacterizing second lien debt as equity. It concludes by offering a different approach for addressing recharacterization with this new landscape in mind. Unsecured creditors, lenders, insolvency professionals and others confronting these issues will find the article to be a helpful and interesting read.

The 2005 Bankruptcy Law Changes And Their Impact On Retail Reorganizations

On September 26, 2008, my partner Lawrence Gottlieb, the Chair of the Bankruptcy & Restructuring Group at Cooley Godward Kronish LLP, testified before the Subcommittee on Commercial and Administrative Law of the United States House of Representatives Committee on the Judiciary.  Joining him at the hearing were Professor Jay Westbrook of the University of Texas Law School and Professor Barry Adler of the New York University School of Law. The subject of the hearing was "Lehman Brothers, Sharper Image, Bennigan's, and Beyond: Is Chapter 11 Bankruptcy Working?" You can access their testimony and watch the full hearing by clicking on the link in the prior sentence.

In his testimony, entitled "The Disappearance of Retail Reorganization In The Post-BAPCPA Era," (a copy of which is available by clicking on its title), he discussed the major impact the 2005 Bankruptcy Abuse Prevention and Consumer Protection Act ("BAPCPA") has had on retail reorganizations. One of his main observations involves the 2005 amendment limiting the time within which a debtor may assume or reject commercial real estate leases to a total of 210 days (if a 90-day extension is granted). He testified that this change, in combination with other BAPCPA provisions that reduce a retailer's liquidity, has had a devastating effect on a retailer's ability to reorganize. Among his comments are the following:

BAPCPA has left retailers without adequate time and money to effectuate operational initiatives and cost cutting measures needed to resuscitate their businesses. Retailers now enter the Chapter 11 arena with little choice but to narrowly tailor their strategy to ensure that their lenders are not deprived of the substantial benefits and protections conferred by section 363(b) of the Bankruptcy Code, which authorizes the use, sale or lease of estate property outside the ordinary course of business upon court approval. Section 363(b) offers the unique ability to cleanse the assets of a distressed company by permitting debtors to convey assets “free and clear,” thereby maximizing value by removing the uncertainty of such stigmas as successor liability, fraudulent transfer claims and lien issues that often accompany asset purchases. Prepetition lenders, cognizant of this powerful liquidating tool and mindful of the numerous liquidity hurdles that the debtor must clear as a result of BAPCPA, have little to gain by risking their collateral in pursuit of a reorganization process now widely perceived as hopeless.

Indeed, the constricted time frames and liquidity problems created and imposed by BAPCPA have effectively eliminated the need for existing lenders to provide any more financing than necessary to position the debtor to liquidate its assets in the first few months of the case. Today, the debtor is no longer “in possession” of its assets or its future upon the commencement of its Chapter 11 case. BAPCPA’s constrictive liquidity provisions and the enormous leverage handed to secured lenders as a result thereof have eliminated the ability of retailers to control the Chapter 11 process as a “debtor-in-possession.” Rather, the process is now controlled almost exclusively by prepetition lenders, who have essentially assumed the role of "creditor-in-possession." 

The Cooley Bankruptcy & Restructuring Group, which Lawrence Gottlieb chairs, is representing official committees of unsecured creditors in high-profile national and regional retail bankruptcies such as Steve & Barry’s, The Bombay Company, Hancock Fabrics, Lillian Vernon, The Sharper Image, Mervyns, Shoe Pavilion, Boscov’s and Goody’s. His testimony, drawing on experience in these recent cases as well as many others in the past, underscores how BAPCPA's key changes have transformed Chapter 11 bankruptcy from a process by which retailers could reorganize into one where almost all face an early liquidation. Retailers, creditors, and insolvency professionals will find his full testimony on the disappearing retail reorganization both timely and informative.

The Credit Crisis And DIP Financing

The credit crisis has made it difficult for companies to borrow throughout the economy. It should come as little surprise then that the constriction in the credit markets is hitting Chapter 11 debtors in possession as well. According to an article entitled "Bankruptcy financing gets pricier and more elusive," debtor in possession financing (commonly known as "DIP financing") has recently become more costly for companies in Chapter 11 bankruptcy -- when it's available at all.

  • Adding to the challenge is the amount of prepetition secured financing, including second lien debt, that many companies took on over the past few years when financing was easier to get. A company that has already encumbered its assets with secured debt may have little or no unencumbered assets to offer a DIP lender as collateral.
  • The article predicts that fewer companies in Chapter 11 will be able to find new lenders to provide DIP financing, giving the DIP's existing lenders the advantage in negotiating DIP financing terms such as interest rate and fees.
  • Alternative sources of DIP financing may be able to be found in certain circumstances. In some cases, the buyer in a Section 363 asset sale may provide DIP financing to bridge to the closing of the sale. However, such limited purpose financing is not a substitute for the type of DIP financing generally needed for a successful reorganization.

Cash is king in bankruptcy and DIP financing is often a key source of that cash. Until the credit crisis subsides and DIP financing becomes more available, companies may find it more difficult to reorganize in Chapter 11.

Ninth Circuit Rules In N.C.P. Marketing Trademark License Case

Back in March I gave an update on In re: N.C.P. Marketing Group, Inc., a case addressing whether a debtor can assume a trademark license over the trademark owner's objection. In 2005, the U.S. District Court for the District of Nevada issued its first of a kind decision, In re: N.C.P. Marketing Group, Inc., 337 B.R. 230 (D.Nev. 2005), holding that trademark licenses are personal and nonassignable in bankruptcy absent a provision in the trademark license to the contrary. Click here for a copy of the N.C.P Marketing Group decision and here and here to read earlier posts on the case. 

The N.C.P. Marketing Court's Analysis. In reaching its conclusion, the District Court held that under the Lanham Act, the federal trademark statute, a trademark owner has a right and duty to control the quality of goods sold under the mark:

Because the owner of the trademark has an interest in the party to whom the trademark is assigned so that it can maintain the good will, quality, and value of its products and thereby its trademark, trademark rights are personal to the assignee and not freely assignable to a third party. 

The trademark owner in that case, Billy Blanks of theBilly Blanks® Tae Bo® fitness program, successfully moved the court to compel rejection of the trademark license because under the "hypothetical test" analysis of Section 365(c)(1) of the Bankruptcy Code adopted by the U.S. Court of Appeals for the Ninth Circuit, contracts that cannot be assigned by the debtor without the nondebtor party's consent cannot be assumed by the debtor either. (For a full discussion of these issues, take a look at this earlier post entitled "Assumption of Intellectual Property Licenses In Bankruptcy: Are Recent Cases Tilting Toward Debtors?")  

The Ninth Circuit Appeal. N.C.P. Marketing appealed the decision to the Ninth Circuit, the appeal was fully briefed, and oral argument had been scheduled for November 5, 2007.

  • Prior to the oral argument, the Chapter 7 trustee for N.C.P. Marketing reached a settlement in the case. At the trustee's request, the Ninth Circuit took the oral argument off calendar and directed the parties to move to dismiss the appeal if the settlement was approved by the Bankruptcy Court.
  • However, instead of approving the settlement the Bankruptcy Court authorized a sale of the appeal rights to certain objecting parties, who then restarted the appeal before the Ninth Circuit and requested an oral argument.

The Ninth Circuit Affirms The District Court's Decision. In an unpublished order dated May 23, 2008, the Ninth Circuit denied the request for oral argument and affirmed the District Court's judgment "for the reasons provided by that court." The appellants' request for a panel rehearing or rehearing en banc was denied by order dated July 9, 2008. The Ninth Circuit designated the May 23, 2008 order affirming the District Court as "not for publication," meaning it is not precedent under the Federal Rules of Appellate Procedure and the Ninth Circuit's Circuit Rules. Nevertheless, the order may be cited in other cases.

A Final Thought. Precedent or not, the Ninth Circuit's order has affirmed the District Court's decision on this important issue. Trademark owners now have a stronger argument in the Ninth Circuit (and also in the Southern District of Florida given the In re Wellington Vision, Inc. decision last year), that non-exclusive trademark licenses may not be assigned, or even assumed, in bankruptcy cases absent consent of the trademark owner.

Will Section 363 "Free And Clear" Sale Orders Survive An Appeal? A Recent Appellate Decision Raises New Doubts

The primary objective of any buyer at a Section 363 sale, whether one purchasing for cash or an existing secured creditor making a credit bid, is to obtain good title to the purchased assets free and clear of any liens, claims, or interests. However, a recent decision on this subject by the Bankruptcy Appellate Panel ("BAP") of the United States Court of Appeals for the Ninth Circuit is causing something of a stir in the bankruptcy world.

In Clear Channel Outdoor, Inc. v. Knupfer (In re PW, LLC), the Ninth Circuit BAP held that a senior secured creditor's credit bid, in an amount less than the aggregate value of all liens against the property in question, did not satisfy the requirements of Section 365(f) and permit the sale to be "free and clear" of the existing junior liens on the property and reversed the bankruptcy court's order on appeal. You can read the entire opinion by following the link in this sentence.

For an excellent discussion of the decision and the analysis employed by the BAP, be sure to read Steve Jakubowsi's post on the case over at The Bankruptcy Litigation Blog. Instead of covering the same ground, I want to discuss some of the implications of the decision for Section 363 bankruptcy sales.

Credit Bid Or Foreclosure? First, the Clear Channel decision raises questions about how a senior secured creditor should proceed in a bankruptcy case.

  • On the one hand, the BAP's decision that a sale will not be "free and clear" of junior liens is not that surprising. It has generally been accepted that for a "short sale" under Section 363 (one in which the purchase price is less than the amount of liens against the property) to be free and clear of liens, the secured creditors must consent or one of the other exceptions under Section 363(f) must be satisfied. Those other exceptions include a lien subject to "bona fide" dispute or a situation in which the lien holder can be forced to accept a cash payment in satisfaction of the lien.
  • What has surprised some about this new decision is the holding that a credit bid by a senior secured creditor also cannot be made free and clear of junior liens, even though the senior secured creditor could have wiped out the junior liens through a foreclosure under state law.
  • Section 363(f)'s focus on the "aggregate value of all liens on such property" makes the existence of junior liens the issue, regardless of whether they are in the money. Put differently, even if the junior liens are worthless, they exist and a Section 363 sale to a credit bidding senior secured creditor will not be free and clear of those junior liens.  
  • With the enormous increase in second lien lending over the past several years, including many second lien loans made as part of private equity buyouts, expect to see more Chapter 11 bankruptcy cases in which substantial junior liens are present.

This ruling seems to leave secured creditors seeking to take title to their collateral with two main choices. One is to seek relief from the automatic stay to foreclose on its collateral, avoiding the Section 363 sale and credit bid approach altogether. If the assets cannot be sold for cash in an amount greater than the senior secured creditor's claim, and if a reorganization is not reasonably in prospect (the key factors in a bankruptcy court's decision whether to lift the stay), this may be the preferred path. A second approach would be to complete the credit bid through a Chapter 11 plan of reorganization, something the Clear Channel court implied was also available. However, some secured creditors may find the delay and expense involved in being a plan proponent problematic. As a plan proponent, the secured creditor would take on the obligation to pay administrative expenses of the estate on the effective date of the reorganization plan, as well as satisfaction of all of the other requirements for confirming a plan.

The Risks Of An Appeal: The Limits Of Section 363(m) And The Mootness Doctrine. Second, perhaps the most important aspect of the Clear Channel decision is the risks it exposes even for "good faith" purchasers in Section 363 sales. Purchasers of assets under Section 363 regularly seek a finding that they are a good faith purchaser because a sale to such a buyer cannot be overturned on appeal. This protection is found in Section 363(m) and reads as follows:

The reversal or modification on appeal of an authorization under subsection (b) or (c) of this section of a sale or lease of property does not affect the validity of a sale or lease under such authorization to an entity that purchased or leased such property in good faith, whether or not such entity knew of the pendency of the appeal, unless such authorization and such sale or lease were stayed pending appeal.

Here, the BAP held that although the sale itself to the senior secured creditor could not be overturned on appeal, the protection of Section 363(m) did not extend to the question of whether the sale was made "free and clear" of the junior liens. Instead, the BAP ruled that even in the absence of a stay pending appeal, the appellate court could reverse the "free and clear" determination because Section 363(m) is expressly limited to sale orders under Sections 363(b) and (c), which authorize the sale or lease of property, and does not extend to "free and clear" orders under Section 363(f).

Going hand in hand with the Section 363(m) ruling was the decision's holding that the closing of the asset sale did not render the "free and clear" issue moot. Instead, even though no stay pending appeal was obtained, the BAP concluded that relief could still be granted on the "free and clear" question by ordering that the junior lien remained attached the property even after its sale. 

When Should A Buyer Close The Sale? The Section 363(m) and mootness rulings raise issues about when a buyer of assets under Section 363 should close on the sale. The BAP's views on Section 363(m) and mootness do not appear limited to the credit bid situation involved in the Clear Channel decision. Instead, if a good faith purchaser for cash pays less than the "aggregate value of all liens" against the purchased assets -- or perhaps a question exists whether a lien or interest is really in "bona fide" dispute -- the "free and clear" aspect of the sale may be outside the protection of Section 363(m) and an appeal by a secured creditor or other interest holder may not be moot.

  • Buyers usually prefer to close as soon as possible after entry of a bankruptcy court's order approving the sale, especially if the value of the assets are declining or the debtor is running out of cash.
  • A buyer that closes with an appeal threatened runs the risk of having the "free and clear" decision overturned months or even years later and the purchased assets suddenly subject to the debtor's liens.
  • While every sale objection or appeal will not raise these issues, if a serious objection to the "free and clear" aspect of the bankruptcy court's sale order has been made, and the objector is likely to appeal, the buyer should consider whether to wait until the later of (a) the passage of the 10-day appeal period, or (b) a final appellate decision affirming the bankruptcy court's denial of the objection, before agreeing to close the sale. 
  • Buyers may want to consider including provisions in the asset purchase agreement to permit this type of flexibility on when to close or to terminate the agreement if the closing is substantially delayed.

The Precedential Effect Of A BAP Decision. Unlike a U.S. Court of Appeals itself, a BAP is made up of bankruptcy judges, not federal circuit judges. Given a BAP's place in the judicial system's hierarchy, its decisions are not given the same precedential weigh as U.S. Court of Appeals decisions, and this means that the U.S. Court of Appeals for the Ninth Circuit might reach a different conclusion. Moreover, BAP decisions generally are not binding on bankruptcy courts in the Ninth Circuit. That said, some bankruptcy judges make a practice of following BAP decisions and the BAP's reasoning may influence other judges.

Conclusion. The BAP's Clear Channel decision has important implications for Section 363 asset sales. Secured creditors intent on making a credit bid may now rethink that approach when junior liens are present. Cash buyers may be more cautious on when to close a sale if disputes exist over whether the sale should be "free and clear" of existing liens and interests. It will be interesting to see how other courts, in the Ninth Circuit and beyond, react to the decision, so stay tuned.

Supreme Court Decision Settles The Section 1146(a) Transfer Tax Exemption Issue

On June 16, 2008, the United States Supreme Court issued its decision in Florida Dept. of Revenue v. Piccadilly Cafeterias, Inc., the case involving whether Section 1146(a) of the Bankruptcy Code, which exempts from stamp or similar taxes any asset transfer “under a plan confirmed under section 1129 of the Code,” applies to transfers of assets occurring prior to the actual confirmation of such a plan. The issue has taken on added importance in recent years because so many sales of assets in Chapter 11 bankruptcy cases -- including the one in the Piccadilly case -- are made through Section 363, well before any plan of reorganization is confirmed.

(For more background on the issue, and the oral argument before the Supreme Court last March, you can read a prior post entitled "What Happened At the Supreme Court Oral Argument In The Section 1146(a) Transfer Tax Exemption Case?")

The Supreme Court's Holding. In a 7-2 decision written by Justice Clarence Thomas, the Supreme Court held that Section 1146(a) applies only to post-confirmation transfers made under the authority of a confirmed plan of reorganization. Follow the link for a copy of the Supreme Court's decision. The Court reversed the Eleventh Circuit (opinion below available here), which unlike the Third and Fourth Circuits, had held that pre-confirmation transfers could also be covered by the exemption. The Supreme Court summed up its holding as follows:

The most natural reading of §1146(a)’s text, the provision’s placement within the Code, and applicable substantive canons all lead to the same conclusion: Section 1146(a) affords a stamp-tax exemption only to transfers made pursuant to a Chapter 11 plan that has been confirmed. Because Piccadilly transferred its assets before its Chapter 11 plan was confirmed by the Bankruptcy Court, it may not rely on §1146(a) to avoid Florida’s stamp taxes. Accordingly, we reverse the judgment below and remand the case for further proceedings consistent with this opinion.

Keys To The Decision. In examining the statute and the parties' arguments, the Supreme Court found Florida's reading of the statute far more reasonable:

While both sides present credible interpretations of §1146(a), Florida has the better one. To be sure, Congress could have used more precise language—i.e., “under a plan that has been confirmed”—and thus removed all ambiguity. But the two readings of the language that Congress chose are not equally plausible: Of the two, Florida’s is clearly the more natural. The interpretation advanced by Piccadilly and adopted by the Eleventh Circuit—that there must be “some nexus between the pre-confirmation transfer and the confirmed plan” for §1146(a) to apply, 484 F. 3d, at 1304—places greater strain on the statutory text than the simpler construction advanced by Florida and adopted by the Third and Fourth Circuit.

Later, the Court added the following:

Even if we were to adopt Piccadilly’s broad definition of “under,” its interpretation of the statute faces  other obstacles. The asset transfer here can hardly be said to have been consummated “in accordance with” any confirmed plan because, as of the closing date, Piccadilly had not even submitted its plan to the Bankruptcy Court for confirmation. Piccadilly’s asset sale was thus not conducted “in accordance with” any plan confirmed under Chapter 11. Rather, it was conducted “in accordance with” the procedures set forth in Chapter 3—specifically, §363(b)(1). To read the statute as Piccadilly proposes would make §1146(a)’s exemption turn on whether a debtor-in-possession’s actions are consistent with a legal instrument that does not exist—and indeed may not even be conceived of—at the time of the sale. Reading §1146(a) in context with other relevant Code provisions, we find nothing justifying such a curious interpretation of what is a straightforward exemption.

In dismissing another of Piccadilly's arguments, the Court had occasion to make an interesting comparison between the mechanics of assumption and rejection of executory contracts and the timing of a transfer for Section 1146(a) purposes:

We agree with Bildisco’s commonsense observation that the decision whether to reject a contract or lease must be made before confirmation. But that in no way undermines the fact that the rejection takes effect upon or after confirmation of the Chapter 11 plan (or before confirmation if  pursuant to §365(d)(2)). In the context of §1146(a), the decision whether to transfer a given asset “under a plan confirmed” must be made prior to submitting the Chapter 11 plan to the bankruptcy court, but the transfer itself cannot be “under a plan confirmed” until the court confirms the plan in question. Only at that point does the transfer become eligible for the stamp-tax exemption.

The Court also found that the placement of Section 1146(a) in a subchapter entitled "POSTCONFIMRATION MATTERS" was yet another factor which, while not decisive, helped to undermine Piccadilly's arguments.

Canon Fodder. The Court next held that even if the statute were ambiguous, which the Court did not expressly decide, two canons of statutory interpretation would compel a decision in favor of Florida's reading of the statute.

  • First, changes were made to Section 1146 as recently as the 2005 amendments to the Bankruptcy Code, and Congress is generally presumed to be aware of judicial interpretations of a statute (here decisions from the Third and Fourth Circuits refusing to apply the exemption to pre-confirmation transfers, both of which predated the Eleventh Circuit's 2007 decision in Piccadilly) when the statute was revised.
  • Second, a federalism canon directs courts to proceed carefully before recognizing an exemption from state taxation that Congress has not clearly expressed. Given Piccadilly's arguments that the statute was ambiguous, the Court found this canon to be "decisive in this case."
  • The Court rejected the canons advanced by Piccadilly, most notably viewing Chapter 11 (and Section 1146) as a remedial statute to be liberally construed to facilitate reorganizations.

The Dissent. Justice Stephen G. Breyer, in a dissent joined by Justice Stevens, focused on "whether the time of the transfer matters." Finding the language of the statute ambiguous, he looked to the policy Congress was trying to implement with the statute. He concluded that Congress would not have "insisted upon temporal limits" in Section 1146(a) since, in his view, "it makes no difference whether a transfer takes place before or after the plan is confirmed."

Other Bloggers Weigh In. For an excellent and entertaining review of the decision, be sure to read Steve Jakubowski's post on his Bankruptcy Litigation Blog. Hat tip as well to the SCOTUS Blog for first reporting on the decision (and updating its excellent wiki on the case) and to the Delaware Business Bankruptcy Report for its post as well.

Minor Impact On Chapter 11 Cases? Of course, the most immediate impact of the decision is that pre-confirmation Section 363 sales will no longer be exempt from stamp or transfer taxes in any circuit, and those taxes will have to be paid.  What remains to be seen is whether sales will be delayed until plan confirmation in order to take advantage of the Section 1146(a) exemption. Given how many asset sales in Chapter 11 cases these days are conducted at the early stages of a case because of financing limitations and declining asset values, a move to delay those sales until plan confirmation seems unlikely. With an economic downturn upon us, the pressures that have led to the expanded use of Section 363 are not likely to abate, regardless of how attractive a stamp or transfer tax exemption may be.

Latest Edition Of Bankruptcy Resource Now Available

The Spring 2008 edition of the Absolute Priority newsletter, published by the Cooley Godward Kronish LLP Bankruptcy & Restructuring group, of which I am a member, has just been released. The newsletter give updates on current developments in bankruptcies and workouts with the goal of keeping you "ahead of the curve" on these issues. Follow the links in this sentence to access a copy of the newsletter or to register to receive future editions.

The latest edition covers a range of cutting edge topics, including:

  • The ability of unsecured creditors to recover post-petition attorney's fees;
  • Key issues when selling claims in bankruptcy;
  • Jury trials and proofs of claim;
  • Assignments for the benefit of creditors; and
  • The impact of post-petition performance on executory contracts.

We have also included information on some of our recent representations of official committees of unsecured creditors in Chapter 11 bankruptcy cases, and unofficial committees in out-of-court workouts, involving major retailers. These include Sharper Image, Lillian Vernon, CompUSA, Wickes Furniture, and The Bombay Company, among others. In addition, a note from my partner Adam Rogoff, the editor of Absolute Priority, discusses the increasing number of bankruptcy filings nationwide and our representation of Bayonne Medical Center in its Chapter 11 reorganization.

I hope you find this latest edition of Absolute Priority to be a helpful resource.

New Article Examines Whether Wire Transfers Can Immunize Payments To Shareholders In LBOs

Leveraged buyouts, known as LBOs, have frequently been the subject of fraudulent transfer challenges when the target company later files bankruptcy. As its name implies, the classic LBO involves the use of leverage -- debt -- to finance the acquisition of the target company's stock. Often that new debt is secured by the assets of the target company. This post highlights a new article that addresses one of the hot issues in LBO fraudulent transfer litigation, but before doing that it may help to give some context to the discussion.

What Is A Fraudulent Transfer? There are two types of fraudulent transfers. The first is a transfer made with an actual intent to hinder, defraud, or delay creditors. However, transfers may be considered fraudulent, even in the absence of actual fraud, if the transfer has a similar effect on creditors. This second type of fraudulent transfer involves what is known as "constructive fraud." A court may find that a transfer involves constructive fraud if a company, at a time when it is already financially impaired or is made so by the transaction itself, does not receive "reasonably equivalent value" in return for the transfer in question. Section 548, the Bankruptcy Code's fraudulent transfer statute, and state fraudulent transfer laws, cover both actual and constructive fraudulent transfers.

The LBO Fraudulent Transfer Lawsuit. When an LBO is followed sometime later by a bankruptcy, a fraudulent transfer lawsuit may be filed to challenge the LBO itself. Although actual fraud may be asserted, more often the case involves a constructive fraud claim.

  • The argument usually made is that the use of the target company's assets to secure loans (the leverage), the proceeds of which were then paid to selling shareholders (the buyout), rendered the company insolvent, made it otherwise unable to pay its debts when they became due, or left it with an unreasonably small capital with which to conduct its business. Since the target company does not receive anything in exchange for the payment to the selling shareholders, the lack of reasonably equivalent value element is usually present.
  • The plaintiff in a fraudulent transfer lawsuit may be the company itself as Chapter 11 debtor in possession, the official committee of unsecured creditors, or a bankruptcy trustee or post-confirmation plan trustee.
  • The defendants may include the new shareholders, the lenders who obtained security interests in the target company's assets, and the shareholders who sold their stock for cash to the acquirer.

The Settlement Payment Defense. When selling shareholders are sued, they often assert a defense based on the "settlement payment" exception to certain fraudulent transfer claims found in Section 546(e) of the Bankruptcy Code. This exception was added to the Bankruptcy Code to prevent disruptions to the functioning of capital markets that might occur if long-settled trades were able to be unraveled by a fraudulent transfer action years down the road. Some courts, interpreting the term "settlement payment" to include payments made from a financial institution, have held that payments to selling shareholders, made by means of wire transfers using a bank or other financial institution, qualify as just such a "settlement payment" protected from avoidance as a fraudulent transfer under Section 546(e). Those courts, in effect, hold that the fact that a bank made wire transfers rendered an otherwise potentially fraudulent transfer immune from challenge.

Two Recent Articles Tackle This Issue. Two articles, including one published last week, take a look at how courts have been addressing the reach of the Section 546(e) defense in the context of these wire transfer payments.

How Far Does The Defense Go? The new article discusses case law from outside of the Third Circuit. In particular, it examines a recent decision from a New York bankruptcy court that rejected the Section 546(e) defense in a situation involving an LBO of a private, rather than publicly traded, target company. The article sums up the differences this way:

The application of the settlement payment defense in the context of an LBO has been far from uniform. While courts in the 3d Circuit have utilized Section 546(e) to shield virtually all LBO payments from avoidance, even in the context of private transactions, a significant number of courts have limited the scope of this safe harbor provision.           

Accordingly, the extent to which wire transfers may insulate LBO payments from attack under fraudulent transfer laws will likely be determined as much by the venue of the bankruptcy proceedings as much as the facts of the transaction at issue.

Worth Reading. Anyone involved in LBOs, including acquirers, target company directors or management, selling shareholders, and of course their professionals, will find these articles very interesting reading.

Free Bankruptcy Research Tool Available Online

Bankruptcy professionals and the public rarely get a chance to read a judge's own research binder. Fortunately, however, Chief Judge Randall J. Newsome of the United States Bankruptcy Court for the Northern District of California has made his very helpful 348-page research binder available on the Court's website. Follow the links in this sentence to access the entire binder in pdf format and this HTML version organized by topic. I've found the binder to be an excellent way to identify leading cases on a particular topic quickly. The pdf version can also be searched using a key word or phrase. 

Updated as of February 8, 2008, and covering cases through Volume 378 of Bankruptcy Reports, the research binder collects a vast range of cases on business bankruptcy and other topics under the Bankruptcy Code and the Federal Rules of Bankruptcy Procedure. Chief Judge Newsome presides in the Northern District of California so the primary focus of the research binder is on Ninth Circuit law, but some out-of-circuit law is listed as well.

Chief Judge Newsome's disclaimer puts this helpful tool's function in perspective:

The following list of cases and supplemental information is presented for informational and educational purposes only. Though it represents the aggregation of 19 years of research, the Court makes no claims as to its current level of accuracy. Some of the cases set forth may very well have been superseded, reversed, or otherwise may no longer be good law. The Court has posted it with the intention to educate and assist those who may find it helpful. Accordingly, users should consider it a first, but by no means final, research tool, and should cite check all cases listed herein for continued viability prior to relying on such cases in practice.

With those caveats in mind, it can be a great place to start when researching bankruptcy law issues in Ninth Circuit.

Northern District of California Bankruptcy Court Local Rule Amendments Take Effect May 1, 2008

As previously reported, in August 2007 the Bankruptcy Court for the Northern District of California proposed amendments to the Bankruptcy Local Rules designed to implement the changes made by the Bankruptcy Abuse Prevention and Consumer Protection Act of 2005 (known as BAPCPA). After taking comments, the final amendments are scheduled to take effect on May 1, 2008.

  • Follow the links for a clean set of the final amended Bankruptcy Local Rules and a redline version showing changes from the current local rules.

Business Bankruptcy Changes. Certain of the amended local rules will affect Chapter 11 corporate bankruptcy cases. These include changes to the rules governing the investment of estate funds, the replacement of a "responsible individual" for a Chapter 11 debtor or debtor in possession, entry of a final decree closing a case, the procedures for bankruptcy appeals, and the general electronic case filing (ECF) procedures. A number of the other revisions are aimed primarily at consumer bankruptcy cases.

Jury Trial Rule Amended. In addition, however, the Bankruptcy Court took this opportunity to modify Bankruptcy Local Rule 9015-2(b), governing jury trials, which the U.S. Court of Appeals for the Ninth Circuit struck down in its September 2007 decision in the In re HealthCentral.com case. An earlier post entitled "Ordinary Course Preference Case Takes Extraordinary Turn: Ninth Circuit Strikes Down Local Bankruptcy Rule On Jury Trials" gives more details on the decision and its impact.

Conclusion. The changes to the Northern District of California Bankruptcy Local Rules may not be as significant for Chapter 11 cases as those recently proposed in the Southern District of New York or adopted in Delaware, but attorneys practicing in the Northern District of California, and businesses with cases or adversary proceedings pending in that court, should be sure to follow them when they take effect on May 1, 2008.

What Happened At The Supreme Court Oral Argument In The Section 1146(a) Bankruptcy Transfer Tax Exemption Case?

On Wednesday, March 26, 2008, the United States Supreme Court heard oral argument in the case of Florida Dept. of Revenue v. Piccadilly Cafeterias, Inc. A link to the transcript of the oral argument can be found below. The case presents the following question:

Whether section 1146(a) of the Bankruptcy Code, which exempts from stamp or similar taxes any asset transfer “under a plan confirmed under section 1129 of the Code,” applies to transfers of assets occurring prior to the actual confirmation of such a plan?

With so many asset transfers in Chapter 11 cases taking place through Section 363 asset sales before plan confirmation, rather than when plans are consummated after confirmation, how the Supreme Court answers the question presented will have a significant impact on the extent to which debtors end up paying stamp and other transfer taxes as a practical matter.

The Eleventh Circuit's Decision And Aftermath. The Supreme Court case results from a decision by the U.S. Court of Appeals for the Eleventh Circuit holding that pre-confirmation sales can be subject to the exemption under Section 1146(a) if followed by plan confirmation later in the case. Use the link in this sentence to read the Eleventh Circuit's decision in Piccadilly.

The Language of Section 1146(a). The one-sentence section, Section 1146(a), was previously numbered Section 1146(c) but its language has not changed. (Many court orders and opinions still use the old designation.) The statute provides as follows:

The issuance, transfer, or exchange of a security, or the making or delivery of an instrument of transfer under a plan confirmed under section 1129 of this title, may not be taxed under any law imposing a stamp tax or similar tax.

As discussed below, much of the dispute over the scope of this exemption is based on interpretation of the phrase "under a plan confirmed."

Section 363 Sales And Transfer Taxes. As bankruptcy professionals know, Section 363 asset sales often precede confirmation of a plan by months. When confirmed, the plan may simply distribute the cash generated from prior sales of the debtor's assets or may enable a reorganized but smaller debtor to emerge from bankruptcy. Courts around the country have taken very different views on whether Section 1146(a)'s exemption should apply to these pre-confirmation transfers.

Some courts will include findings in Section 363 sale orders that the sale, even though prior to plan confirmation, is exempt from stamp and similar taxes. This sale order from the Southern District of New York illustrates that approach:

The sale of the Purchased Assets . . . is a prerequisite to the Debtors’ ability to confirm and consummate a plan or plans. The Sale Transaction is therefore an integral part of a plan or plans to be confirmed in the Debtors’ cases and, thereby, constitutes a transfer pursuant to section 1146(c) of the Bankruptcy Code, which shall not be taxed under any law imposing a transfer tax, a stamp tax or any similar tax.

Cases filed in Delaware will likely receive a very different response. In 2003, the Third Circuit in In re Hechinger Inv. Co. of Del., Inc., 335 F.3d 243 (3d Cir. 2003) -- unlike the Eleventh Circuit in Piccadilly -- held that the Section 1146(a) exemption does not apply to pre-confirmation transfers. (The Third Circuit's opinion was authored by then Circuit Judge, and now Associate Justice, Samuel Alito.) Delaware's new local rule governing Section 363 sales requires sale motions to make express disclosure of an effort to obtain such a provision in a sale order:

Tax Exemption. The Sale Motion must highlight any provision seeking to have the sale declared exempt from taxes under section 1146(a) of the Bankruptcy Code, the type of tax (e.g., recording tax, stamp tax, use tax, capital gains tax) for which the exemption is sought. It is not sufficient to refer simply to "transfer" taxes and the state or states in which the affected property is located.

Other courts have taken a similar view. The Section 363 sale guidelines adopted by the Bankruptcy Court for the Northern District of California call out various provisions that the Bankruptcy Court generally will not approve in a sale order, including the following:

Any provision that purports to exempt the transaction from transfer taxes under section 1146(c). By its own terms, that section applies only to a sale pursuant to a plan of reorganization, not a sale outside of a plan under section 363(b).

The Supreme Court Oral Argument And Transcript. Against this background, the Supreme Court heard oral argument in the Piccadilly case on March 26, 2008. A copy of the transcript of the oral argument is available by clicking on the link in this sentence.

It's difficult to tell how the decision will come out based on the questions asked by the various Justices, but the questions are themselves quite interesting. Some focused on why Congress would want to exempt post-confirmation but not pre-confirmation transfers. Others implied that the plain language of the statute limited the reach of the exemption only to transfers made, literally, "under" a confirmed Chapter 11 plan of reorganization. Still others inquired about the administrative impact on states if pre-confirmation transfers were initially exempt but subsequently could be taxed in the event that no plan was ever confirmed. An additional topic raised was whether, if the statute were held to exempt pre-confirmation transfers, the exemption should cover only those transfers "necessary" for a later plan confirmation or also transfers merely "instrumental" to a later plan confirmation. 

The State's Arguments. During the argument, the State of Florida contended that the statute was unambiguous and that the word "under" meant a transfer made at or following confirmation of plan. Arguing for this bright-line rule, the State asserted that if pre-confirmation transfers could also be exempt taxing authorities would not know, at the time a transfer was recorded, whether a Chapter 11 plan would in fact later be confirmed to validate the exemption. From a policy perspective, the State argued that tax exemptions should be narrowly construed, that stamp and other transfer taxes generate millions of dollars in revenues, and that it would be an administrative burden to require states to monitor Chapter 11 cases to see if plans were later confirmed to validate exemptions claimed on earlier asset transfers.

The Debtor's Arguments. The debtor made both policy and statutory interpretation arguments. On the policy side, Piccadilly argued that a debtor cannot get a Chapter 11 plan confirmed without cash, debtors often make Section 363 asset sales to preserve value and raise funds needed to confirm a Chapter 11 plan later in the case, the exemption was designed to save cash for the benefit of creditors, and these pre-confirmation sales should receive the same benefit from the exemption. The debtor also asserted that the key phrase in Section 1146(a), "under a plan confirmed" appears in Section 365(g)(1). Section 365 was interpreted by the Supreme Court in N.L.R.B. v. Bildisco &. Bildisco, 465 U.S. 513 (1984), to require pre-confirmation, not post-confirmation, decisions on executory contracts. The debtor contended that because the phrase "under a plan confirmed" means before confirmation when used in Section 365(g)(1), it must mean before confirmation in Section 1146(a) as well. In contrast, the debtor argued, Congress used the different phrase "confirmed plan" in Sections 1142(b) or 511(b) when it intended to refer to a point after plan confirmation.

Conclusion. Whether Section 1146(a)'s exemption from transfer taxes applies to pre-confirmation transfers has split circuit and bankruptcy courts alike over the years. The questions asked during the Supreme Court's oral argument in the Piccadilly case suggest a similar split among the Justices over how the statute should be interpreted. With the Supreme Court's term ending in the next few months, however, debtors, creditors, and taxing authorities should not have to wait much longer for a definitive answer to this open issue.  

Trademark Licenses In Bankruptcy: New Developments In The N.C.P. Marketing Case

Last November I reported on the status of the Ninth Circuit appeal in In re: N.C.P. Marketing Group, Inc., a case addressing whether a debtor can assume a trademark license over the trademark owner's objection. Back in 2005 the U.S. District Court for the District of Nevada issued its first of a kind decision, In re: N.C.P. Marketing Group, Inc., 337 B.R. 230 (D.Nev. 2005), holding that trademark licenses are personal and nonassignable in bankruptcy absent a provision in the trademark license to the contrary. Click here for a copy of the N.C.P Marketing Group decision and here to read an earlier post on the case.

The N.C.P. Marketing Court's Analysis. In reaching its conclusion, the District Court held that under the Lanham Act, the federal trademark statute, a trademark owner has a right and duty to control the quality of goods sold under the mark:

Because the owner of the trademark has an interest in the party to whom the trademark is assigned so that it can maintain the good will, quality, and value of its products and thereby its trademark, trademark rights are personal to the assignee and not freely assignable to a third party.  

The trademark owner in that case, Billy Blanks of the Billy Blanks® Tae Bo® fitness program, successfully moved the court to compel rejection of the trademark license because under the "hypothetical test" analysis of Section 365(c)(1) of the Bankruptcy Code adopted by the U.S. Court of Appeals for the Ninth Circuit, contracts that cannot be assigned by the debtor without the nondebtor party's consent cannot be assumed by the debtor either. (For a full discussion of these issues, take a look at this earlier post entitled "Assumption of Intellectual Property Licenses In Bankruptcy: Are Recent Cases Tilting Toward Debtors?")  

The Ninth Circuit Appeal. N.C.P. Marketing appealed the decision to the Ninth Circuit, the appeal was fully briefed, and oral argument had been scheduled for November 5, 2007. Prior to the oral argument, the Chapter 7 trustee for N.C.P. Marketing reached a settlement in the case. At the trustee's request, the Ninth Circuit took the oral argument off calendar and directed the parties to move to dismiss the appeal if the settlement was approved by the Bankruptcy Court. At the time, I commented that it appeared that no Ninth Circuit decision would be issued in the case due to the settlement.

The Settlement Is Rejected. Back in the Bankruptcy Court, the Chapter 7 trustee filed a motion for approval of the settlement, but N.C.P. Marketing and certain other parties filed an objection and offered a competing bid for the appeal rights. In something of a surprise, on February 28, 2008, the Bankruptcy Court issued a brief order denying the trustee's motion for approval of the settlement and instead approved a sale of the appeal rights and certain other assets to the objecting parties. The objecting parties thereafter posted the undertaking required by the Bankruptcy Court's order.

Appeal May Go Forward. As a result, the Ninth Circuit appeal may be revived, although no new oral argument has been scheduled yet. Barring further developments, trademark licensors and licensees may end up seeing a Ninth Circuit decision after all on the important issue of whether trademark licenses can be assumed in bankruptcy. Stay tuned.

 

Southern District Of New York Bankruptcy Court Proposes Amendments To Local Rules

The United States Bankruptcy Court for the Southern District of New York has announced proposed changes to its Local Bankruptcy Rules in light of the recent amendments to the Federal Rules of Bankruptcy Procedure that took effect on December 1, 2007. Many of the largest business bankruptcy cases are filed in the Southern District of New York, which includes Manhattan, making these proposed amendments to the Local Bankruptcy Rules of particular interest.

Cash Collateral And DIP Financing Disclosures. The most significant proposed changes for Chapter 11 bankruptcy cases address cash collateral and DIP financing motions and, if adopted, the local rule amendments would supplement the disclosures required by amended Federal Rule of Bankruptcy Procedure 4001. Proposed Local Bankruptcy Rule 4001-2 would require at least fifteen material provisions to be disclosed in cash collateral and DIP financing motions. These include the following:

  • the amount of cash to be used or borrowed, including any borrowing base formula and availability;
  • material conditions to closing, including budget provisions;
  • pricing and economic terms, including various fees;
  • any effect on existing liens;
  • any carve-outs from liens or superpriorities;
  • any cross-collateralization;
  • any roll-up provisions;
  • any provisions that would materially limit the Court's power or discretion or the fiduciary duties of a trustee, debtor in possession, or committee;
  • any limitation on the lender's obligation to fund activities of a trustee, debtor in possession, or committee;
  • termination or default provisions;
  • any change of control provisions;
  • any deadline for sale of property;
  • any prepayment penalty or other restriction on repayment;
  • terms governing joint liability of debtors; and
  • any funding of non-debtor affiliates.

Additional Proposed Financing Changes. Other provisions would require (1) disclosure regarding efforts to obtain financing, (2) adequate notice after an event of default and before a lender could exercise remedies, (3) disclosure regarding carve-outs and allocations of carve-outs, (4) investigation periods for committees, and (5) appearances at preliminary and final hearings. In addition, the proposed local rule would mandate certain provisions in proposed orders, including a reservation of the Court's right to unwind roll-ups if a successful challenge is later made. 

Other Proposed Amendments. The remaining proposed amendments are mainly technical. They would repeal local rules that have become unnecessary, drop the requirement that attorneys use an identifier that includes the last four digits of their social security number, conform attorney signature rules to current practice, and dispense with the need for a separate memorandum of law if a discussion of the law is included in the motion itself.

Opportunity For Comments. The Bankruptcy Court has not yet promulgated these local rule amendments and it is accepting comments on the proposed changes until April 23, 2008. Information on how to submit comments is available on the Court's website at the Local Rule page.

Assignments For The Benefit Of Creditors: Simple As ABC?

Companies in financial trouble are often forced to liquidate their assets to pay creditors. While a Chapter 11 bankruptcy sometimes makes the most sense, other times a Chapter 7 bankruptcy is required, and in still other situations a corporate dissolution may be best. This post examines another of the options, the assignment for the benefit of creditors, commonly known as an "ABC."

A Few Caveats. It's important to remember that determining which path an insolvent company should take depends on the specific facts and circumstances involved. As in many areas of the law, one size most definitely does not fit all for financially troubled companies. With those caveats in mind, let's consider one scenario sometimes seen when a venture-backed or other investor-funded company runs out of money.

One Scenario. After a number of rounds of investment, the investors of a privately held corporation have decided not to put in more money to fund the company's operations. The company will be out of cash within a few months and borrowing from the company's lender is no longer an option. The accounts payable list is growing (and aging) and some creditors have started to demand payment. A sale of the business may be possible, however, and a term sheet from a potential buyer is anticipated soon. The company's real property lease will expire in nine months, but it's possible that a buyer might want to take over the lease.

  • A Chapter 11 bankruptcy filing is problematic because there is insufficient cash to fund operations going forward, no significant revenues are being generated, and debtor in possession financing seems highly unlikely unless the buyer itself would make a loan. 
  • The board prefers to avoid a Chapter 7 bankruptcy because it's concerned that a bankruptcy trustee, unfamiliar with the company's technology, would not be able to generate the best recovery for creditors.

The ABC Option. In many states, another option that may be available to companies in financial trouble is an assignment for the benefit of creditors (or "general assignment for the benefit of creditors" as it is sometimes called). The ABC is an insolvency proceeding governed by state law rather than federal bankruptcy law.

California ABCs. In California, where ABCs have been done for years, the primary governing law is found in California Code of Civil Procedure sections 493.010 to 493.060 and sections 1800 to 1802, among other provisions of California law. California Code of Civil Procedure section 1802 sets forth, in remarkably brief terms, the main procedural requirements for a company (or individual) making, and an assignee accepting, a general assignment for the benefit of creditors:

1802.  (a) In any general assignment for the benefit of creditors, as defined in Section 493.010, the assignee shall, within 30 days after the assignment has been accepted in writing, give written notice of the assignment to the assignor's creditors, equityholders, and other parties in interest as set forth on the list provided by the assignor pursuant to subdivision (c).
   (b) In the notice given pursuant to subdivision (a), the assignee shall establish a date by which creditors must file their claims to be able to share in the distribution of proceeds of the liquidation of the assignor's assets.  That date shall be not less than 150 days and not greater than 180 days after the date of the first giving of the written notice to creditors and parties in interest.
   (c) The assignor shall provide to the assignee at the time of the making of the assignment a list of creditors, equityholders, and other parties in interest, signed under penalty of  perjury, which shall include the names, addresses, cities, states, and ZIP Codes for each person together with the amount of that person's anticipated claim in the assignment proceedings.

In California, the company and the assignee enter into a formal "Assignment Agreement." The company must also provide the assignee with a list of creditors, equityholders, and other interested parties (names, addresses, and claim amounts). The assignee is required to give notice to creditors of the assignment, setting a bar date for filing claims with the assignee that is between five to six months later.

ABCs In Other States. Many other states have ABC statutes although in practice they have been used to varying degrees. For example, ABCs have been more common in California than in states on the East Coast, but important exceptions exist. Delaware corporations can generally avail themselves of Delaware's voluntary assignment statutes, and its procedures have both similarities and important differences from the approach taken in California. Scott Riddle of the Georgia Bankruptcy Law Blog has an interesting post discussing ABC's under Georgia law. Florida is another state in which ABCs are done under specific statutory procedures. For an excellent book that has information on how ABCs are conducted in various states, see Geoffrey Berman's General Assignments for the Benefit of Creditors: The ABCs of ABCs, published by the American Bankruptcy Institute.

Important Features Of ABCs. A full analysis of how ABCs function in a particular state and how one might affect a specific company requires legal advice from insolvency counsel. The following highlights some (but by no means all) of the key features of ABCs:

  • Court Filing Issue. In California, making an ABC does not require a public court filing. Some other states, however, do require a court filing to initiate or complete an ABC.
  • Select The Assignee. Unlike a Chapter 7 bankruptcy trustee, who is randomly appointed from those on an approved panel, a corporation making an assignment is generally able to choose the assignee.
  • Shareholder Approval. Most corporations require both board and shareholder approval for an ABC because it involves the transfer to the assignee of substantially all of the corporation's assets. This makes ABCs impractical for most publicly held corporations.
  • Liquidator As Fiduciary. The assignee is a fiduciary to the creditors and is typically a professional liquidator.
  • Assignee Fees. The fees charged by assignees often involve an upfront payment and a percentage based on the assets liquidated.
  • No Automatic Stay. In many states, including California, an ABC does not give rise to an automatic stay like bankruptcy, although an assignee can often block judgment creditors from attaching assets.
  • Event Of Default. The making of a general assignment for the benefit of creditors is typically a default under most contracts. As a result, contracts may be terminated upon the assignment under an ipso facto clause.
  • Proof Of Claim. For creditors, an ABC process generally involves the submission to the assignee of a proof of claim by a stated deadline or bar date, similar to bankruptcy. (Click on the link for an example of an ABC proof of claim form.)
  • Employee Priority. Employee and other claim priorities are governed by state law and may involve different amounts than apply under the Bankruptcy Code. In California, for example, the employee wage and salary priority is $4,300, not the $10,950 amount currently in force under the Bankruptcy Code.
  • 20 Day Goods. Generally, ABC statutes do not have a provision similar to that under Bankruptcy Code Section 503(b)(9), which gives an administrative claim priority to vendors who sold goods in the ordinary course of business to a debtor during the 20 days before a bankruptcy filing. As a result, these vendors may recover less in an ABC than in a bankruptcy case, subject to assertion of their reclamation rights.
  • Landlord Claim. Unlike bankruptcy, there generally is no cap imposed on a landlord's claim for breach of a real property lease in an ABC.
  • Sale Of Assets. In many states, including California, sales by the assignee of the company's assets are completed as a private transaction without approval of a court. However, unlike a bankruptcy Section 363 sale, there is usually no ability to sell assets "free and clear" of liens and security interests without the consent or full payoff of lienholders. Likewise, leases or executory contracts cannot be assigned without required consents from the other contracting party.
  • Avoidance Actions. Most states allow assignees to pursue preferences and fraudulent transfers. However, the U.S. Court of Appeals for the Ninth Circuit has held that the Bankruptcy Code pre-empts California's preference statute, California Code of Civil Procedure section 1800. Nevertheless, to date the California state courts have refused to follow the Ninth Circuit's decision and still permit assignees to sue for preferences in California state court. In February 2008, a Delaware state court followed the California state court decisions, refusing either to follow the Ninth Circuit position or to hold that the California preference statute was pre-empted by the Bankruptcy Code. The Delaware court was required to apply California's ABC preference statute because the avoidance action arose out of an earlier California ABC.

The Scenario Revisited. With this overview in mind, let's return to our company in distress.

  • The prospect of a term sheet from a potential buyer may influence whether our hypothetical company should choose an ABC or another approach. Some buyers will refuse to purchase assets outside of a Chapter 11 bankruptcy or a Chapter 7 case. Others are comfortable with the ABC process and believe it provides an added level of protection from fraudulent transfer claims compared to purchasing the assets directly from the insolvent company. Depending on the value to be generated by a sale, these considerations may lead the company to select one approach over the other available options.
  • In states like California where no court approval is required for a sale, the ABC can also mean a much faster closing -- often within a day or two of the ABC itself provided that the assignee has had time to perform due diligence on the sale and any alternatives -- instead of the more typical 30-60 days required for bankruptcy court approval of a Section 363 sale. Given the speed at which they can be done, in the right situation an ABC can permit a "going concern" sale to be achieved.
  • Secured creditors with liens against the assets to be sold will either need to be paid off through the sale or will have to consent to release their liens; forced "free and clear" sales generally are not possible in an ABC.
  • If the buyer decides to take the real property lease, the landlord will need to consent to the lease assignment. Unlike bankruptcy, the ABC process generally cannot force a landlord or other third party to accept assignment of a lease or executory contract.
  • If the buyer decides not to take the lease, or no sale occurs, the fact that only nine months remains on the lease means that this company would not benefit from bankruptcy's cap on landlord claims. If the company's lease had years remaining, and if the landlord were unwilling to agree to a lease termination approximating the result under bankruptcy's landlord claim cap, the company would need to consider whether a bankruptcy filing was necessary to avoid substantial dilution to other unsecured creditor claims that a large, uncapped landlord claim would produce in an ABC.
  • If the potential buyer walks away, the assignee would be responsible for determining whether a sale of all or a part of the assets was still possible. In any event, assets would be liquidated by the assignee to the extent feasible and any proceeds would be distributed to creditors in order of their priority through the ABC's claims process.
  • While other options are available and should be explored, an ABC may make sense for this company depending upon the buyer's views, the value to creditors and other constituencies that a sale would produce, and a clear-eyed assessment of alternative insolvency methods. 

Conclusion. When weighing all of the relevant issues, an insolvent company's management and board would be well-served to seek the advice of counsel and other insolvency professionals as early as possible in the process. The old song may say that ABC is as "easy as 1-2-3," but assessing whether an assignment for the benefit of creditors is best for an insolvent company involves the analysis of a myriad of complex factors.

North Of The Border: Reorganization Under Canada's Companies' Creditors Arrangement Act

With the enormous amount of business between the United States and Canada these days, it's little wonder that from time to time U.S. companies find themselves affected by a Canadian insolvency proceeding. A better understanding of Canada's approach to bankruptcy and insolvency law can be helpful when sizing up how such a filing might affect your rights.

The Lay Of The Land. Canada has two primary federal insolvency acts, the Bankruptcy and Insolvency Act, known as the BIA, and the Companies' Creditors Arrangement Act, known as the CCAA. (A third statute, the Winding-up and Restructuring Act, is less frequently invoked.) You can access the text of each of three acts by clicking on the preceding links. These national statutes also operate in conjunction with applicable provincial law.

Canada's Reorganization Law. When larger Canadian companies need protection from creditors they often seek relief under Canada's CCAA. The CCAA is the Canadian insolvency law most analogous to Chapter 11 of the U.S. Bankruptcy Code. Company management generally remains in charge as a debtor in possession, although a monitor is appointed and has certain oversight authority. Unlike the much longer U.S. Bankruptcy Code, the CCAA currently has only 22 sections, leaving it to the courts to fill in the gaps. Courts generally do so, including issuance of an early "initial order" that commonly implements a stay similar to the automatic stay of U.S. bankruptcy  law. (Click on the link for an example of an initial order.) Other court orders permit contracts and leases to be disclaimed (rejected), assets to be sold, and a restructuring to be implemented through a plan of arrangement after voting by creditors.

Cross-Border Issues. Canada has not yet adopted the Model Law on Cross-Border Insolvency, which the U.S. did in 2005 as Chapter 15 of the U.S. Bankruptcy Code. At least for now, Canada continues to use its own cross-border procedures under Section 18.6 of the CCAA and cross-border protocols used to coordinate proceedings in different countries. (For more on Chapter 15, you may find this prior post entitled "Chapter 15: The Bankruptcy Code's New Cross-Border Insolvency Rules," of interest.)

Important Changes May Be Coming. Canada is currently working on adoption of significant revisions to its bankruptcy and insolvency laws. The legislation was originally proposed in 2005 as Bill C-55, and more recently was approved in legislation known as Bill C-12.  If it comes into force, this law would make a number of changes, including one of interest to licensees of intellectual property. The legislation would add to the CCAA a formal provision akin to Section 365(n) of the U.S. Bankruptcy Code, protecting the rights of licensees to continue to use licensed intellectual property if the underlying license agreement is disclaimed (rejected) in the CCAA proceeding.

Conclusion. Navigating Canadian insolvency law can be complex, especially when proceedings are pending in both the U.S. and Canada. Getting advice from U.S. and Canadian bankruptcy counsel can prove invaluable if your business becomes involved in an insolvency proceeding north of the border.   

Bankruptcy Rule Amendments: New Article Reviews The Important Changes

An article my partner Adam Rogoff, associate Seth Van Aalten, and I wrote was recently published in the January 2008 issue of Pratt's Journal of Bankruptcy Law. The article discusses the significant amendments to the Federal Rules of Bankruptcy Procedure that took effect on December 1, 2007. Those amendments covered a range of procedures from omnibus claims objections to motions to assume executory contracts and real property leases to "first day" motions in Chapter 11 cases. 

If you don't have a copy of the Journal, you can read the article, entitled "Important Changes To Bankruptcy Rules Take Effect," by clicking on its title in this sentence. For more details on the rule changes, use the links that follow for a copy of the full, "clean" set of rule amendments as well as the redline set showing changes made by the amendments to the existing rules, together with the Advisory Committee's comments.

New Article Examines Latest Deepening Insolvency Trends

For a number of years, the concept of deepening insolvency has been one of the more hotly debated issues in the insolvency arena. Two of my colleagues in the Bankruptcy & Restructuring group at Cooley Godward Kronish LLP, Michael Klein and Ronald Sussman, have written an interesting article entitled "Tide Has Turned On Deepening Insolvency - Courts Now Rejecting Theory As Cause Of Action," published in the February 2008 issue of the Journal of Corporate Renewal by the Turnaround Management Association. You can read the article by clicking on its title above.

The article gives a succinct overview of the impact of last year's Delaware Supreme Court decisions in the North American Catholic Educational Programming, Inc. v. Gheewalla and Trenwick America cases (as well as the Chancery Court's Trenwick decision that was adopted by the Supreme Court). In particular, the article describes how the Gheewalla decision altered the "zone of insolvency" analysis and how Trenwick's rejection of deepening insolvency as a cause of action in Delaware has led courts in other jurisdictions to follow suit. Directors of financially troubled companies and their counsel will find the article an informative read.

For more information on the Gheewalla decision, including a copy of the Delaware Supreme Court's opinion, click here. For more on the Trenwick decision, including copies of the Delaware Supreme Court order and Chancery Court opinion, click here.

Real Estate Workouts: Are Pre-Bankruptcy Waivers Of The Automatic Stay Enforceable?

This post examines a new decision from the Bankruptcy Court for the Southern District of Florida involving the enforceability of a pre-bankruptcy waiver of the automatic stay. Let's first set the stage by taking a look at a not so uncommon fact pattern involving a real estate project in financial trouble.

The Real Estate Workout: Forbearance With A Price. The owner of a troubled real estate development is about to default on a loan secured by the real property. On the eve of foreclosure, the lender agrees to forbear from foreclosing for two months to give the developer time to refinance and save the project.  However, in exchange the lender insists that the developer agree that, in the event of bankruptcy, the lender would have relief from the automatic stay to foreclose. The developer agrees and the forbearance agreement is executed.

The Bankruptcy Aftermath. Unfortunately, the hoped-for financing falls through and the developer files a Chapter 11 bankruptcy for the project just before the rescheduled foreclosure sale. The lender quickly files a motion for relief from stay, asking the bankruptcy court to enforce the pre-bankruptcy relief from stay waiver included in the forbearance agreement. The motion is opposed by the developer, now a Chapter 11 debtor in possession, as well as the official committee of unsecured creditors and junior lienholders.

Is The Waiver Of The Automatic Stay Enforceable? This was the question answered by Bankruptcy Judge John K. Olson in an 18-page decision, issued on February 12, 2008, in the In re Bryan Road, LLC Chapter 11 bankruptcy case. The facts were essentially as described above, but a few additional details help put the issue in context.

  • The real estate project involved a 210 unit "dry stack" boat storage facility in Dania Beach, Florida.
  • The lender, which commenced a judicial foreclosure proceeding against the 191 units still owned by the debtor, had been awarded final judgment setting a foreclosure sale.
  • On the morning of the foreclosure sale, the debtor and the lender entered into a forbearance agreement that was approved by the court in the foreclosure proceeding. The forbearance agreement provided for a two-month continuance of the foreclosure sale in exchange for the debtor's agreement that the lender would have relief from the automatic stay to foreclose in the event of a bankruptcy.
  • The day before the continued foreclosure sale was to take place, the debtor filed its bankruptcy petition.

The Bankruptcy Court's Analysis. In his decision on the lender's stay relief motion, Judge Olson first noted that prepetition waivers of the stay will be given "no particular effect as part of initial loan documents" but the "greatest effect if entered into during the course of prior (and subsequently aborted) chapter 11 proceedings." After concluding that a confirmed chapter 11 plan was not required, the Bankruptcy Court looked to four non-exclusive factors, drawn from In re Desai, 282 B.R. 527 (Bankr. S.D. Ga. 2002), in considering whether stay relief should be granted based on the prepetition waiver:

(1) the sophistication of the party making the waiver; (2) the consideration for the waiver, including the creditor's risk and the length of time the waiver covers; (3) whether other parties are affected including unsecured creditors and junior lienholders; and (4) the feasibility of the debtor's plan.

As to the first two factors, the Bankruptcy Court found that the debtor's counsel was very sophisticated and, although the forbearance period was short, it was sufficient consideration. On the third and fourth factors, the Bankruptcy Court first noted the existence of junior lienholders and approximately $1 million of disputed unsecured claims. However, the Bankruptcy Court then engaged in a detailed analysis leading to the conclusion that the debtor's plan simply was not feasible. As such, there likely was no value for unsecured creditors in the boat storage project beyond the secured debt and the junior lienholders could protect their own interests under state law. Putting these factors together, the Bankruptcy Court concluded that the forbearance agreement -- including the waiver of the automatic stay -- should be enforced and the stay was lifted.

A Few Key Take-Aways. With economic conditions continuing to strain a variety of real estate developments, workouts in the shadow of foreclosure may become more common. The In re Bryan Road, LLC decision highlights that in the right case a bankruptcy court may be willing to enforce prepetition stay relief agreements if a bankruptcy is later filed.

  • This is particularly true when the debtor is a single asset real estate entity, it signs an agreement on the eve of foreclosure, and it has few unsecured creditors. In fact, the more the bankruptcy appears to be just a two-party dispute between the debtor and lender, the more likely the prepetition automatic stay waiver will be enforced.
  • On the other hand, when a troubled real estate project has a real chance of reorganizing, and substantial unsecured creditor claims are involved, these agreements more likely will be rejected in favor of traditional relief from stay analysis under Section 362 of the Bankruptcy Code.

Conclusion. Prepetition stay relief agreements involve complex issues. As with most bankruptcy questions, real estate owners and lenders should get advice from bankruptcy counsel on their specific situation when considering whether to include such a waiver of the automatic stay in any forbearance agreement.

Delaware Bankruptcy Court Adopts New Local Rule For Section 363 Sales

The Delaware Bankruptcy Court has recently adopted amended Local Rules, which became effective on February 1, 2008, and they include meaningful changes to the procedures governing Section 363 sales of assets. New Local Rule 6004-1, entitled "Sale and Sale Procedures Motions," requires additional disclosure and the highlighting of certain key provisions often seen in sale motions.

By following the links in this sentence you can find the redline version and clean version of the new Delaware Bankruptcy Court Local Rules.

The Section 363 Sale. As a reminder, a bankruptcy asset sale often happens in the first few weeks or months of a Chapter 11 case, rather than as part of a plan of reorganization. Frequently this will involve a sale of all or substantially all of a debtor's business as a going concern. The sale is generally referred to as a "Section 363 sale" because Section 363 is the key Bankruptcy Code section that governs a debtor's sale of assets in bankruptcy. The debtor must seek bankruptcy court approval of a sale that is not in the ordinary course of business and of any effort to transfer executory contracts, intellectual property licenses, or commercial real estate leases to the buyer.

Sale Motion Requirements. The new local rule first addresses motions to sell property of the estate. A copy of the proposed or near-final purchase agreement must be attached to the motion, as well as a proposed sale order, and any request for a consumer privacy ombudsman under Section 332 of the Bankruptcy Code must be included. The most interesting changes, however, are in the list of provisions which, if included in the motion or sale order, must be highlighted together with a justification for each such provision. These include the following:

  • Sale to insiders
  • Agreements with management
  • Releases
  • Private sale or no competitive bidding
  • Closing and other deadlines
  • Good faith deposit
  • Interim agreements with proposed buyer
  • Use of sale proceeds
  • Section 1146 tax exemption
  • Retention of records
  • Sale of avoidance actions
  • Successor liability findings requested
  • Sale free and clear of leases or licenses
  • Credit bid
  • Waiver of 10-day stay under Rule 6004(h)

A Few Specifics. To get a sense of the changes made, here's what the amended rule now requires for disclosure of agreements with management included as part of a sale motion:

Agreements with Management. If a proposed buyer has discussed or entered into any agreements with management or key employees regarding compensation or future employment, the Sale Motion must disclose (a) the material terms of any such agreements, and (b) what measures have been taken to ensure the fairness of the sale and the proposed transaction in the light of any such agreements.

Similarly, if a finding is requested regarding a tax exemption under Section 1146(a) of the Bankruptcy Code, the motion must now detail the following:

Tax Exemption. The Sale Motion must highlight any provision seeking to have the sale declared exempt from taxes under section 1146(a) of the Bankruptcy Code, the type of tax (e.g., recording tax, stamp tax, use tax, capital gains tax) for which the exemption is sought. It is not sufficient to refer simply to "transfer" taxes and the state or states in which the affected property is located.

Another part of the new rule requires more disclosure of efforts to sell free and clear of leases and licenses:

Sale Free and Clear of Unexpired Leases. The Sale Motion must highlight any provision by which the debtor seeks to sell property free and clear of a possessory leasehold interest, license or other right.

Sale Procedures Motions. In addition to an actual sale motion, the new local rule includes new provisions addressing motions for approval of sale and auction procedures. Although these provisions are already typically set forth in motions, the rule makes mandatory the highlighting of certain ones, including the following:

  • Financial qualification procedures
  • Deadlines for submitting bids
  • Format of overbids
  • Good faith deposit
  • No-shop or no-solicitation rules
  • Break-up/topping fee and expense reimbursement
  • Bidding increments and use of break-up fees
  • Details of auction procedures

Other Important Local Rule Changes. In addition to a number of minor changes, the amended Local Rules include three significant additions governing (1) discovery motions, (2) service of discovery materials, and perhaps most importantly, (3) electronic or e-discovery. These new rules are found at Local Rules 7026-1, 7026-2, and 7026-3, respectively. Local Rule 3007-1 on omnibus claim objections, discussed in a prior post, has been revised to reflect Delaware's continued adherence to its local practice notwithstanding the recent national rule changes. (Click on the links in this sentence for more on the national rule amendments and Delaware's decision to retain its own omnibus claim objection procedures.) Also of note, amended Local Rule 9010-1 now makes explicit the requirement that associated Delaware counsel file all papers and attend proceedings before the Court.

Conclusion. While many of the amended sale motion rules are not new to Delaware practice, Local Rule 6004-1 will change the way sale and sale procedures motions are prepared going forward. Chapter 11 debtors must comply with the new rule and that should give creditors and potential overbidders an easier time spotting the material provisions in these motions.

Licensing Intellectual Property From An Israeli Company: What Happens If There's A Bankruptcy?

Many technology companies are based in Israel and license intellectual property to companies in the United States and around the world. This raises an interesting question: what happens if the Israeli company, as licensor, goes into bankruptcy or liquidation in Israel? The latest edition of Cross Border Commentary, a publication by the International Business Practice of my firm, Cooley Godward Kronish LLP, has just addressed that very question.

The U.S. Law Answer.  Before turning to Israeli law, let's look at how this issue plays out under the United States Bankruptcy Code. A licensor in bankruptcy or its bankruptcy trustee has the option of assuming (keeping) or rejecting (breaching) a license. Generally, a debtor licensor can assume a license if it meets the same tests (cures defaults and provides adequate assurance of future performance) required to assume other executory contracts.  Many licensees will not have a problem with assumption of their license as long as the debtor can actually continue to perform. Instead, the real concern for licensees is the fear of losing their rights to the licensed IP, which often can be mission critical technology, if the license is rejected.

  • Special protections. Recognizing this concern, the United States Bankruptcy Code, in Section 365(n), provides licensees with special protections.  If the debtor or trustee rejects a license, under Section 365(n) a licensee can elect to retain its rights to the licensed intellectual property, including even a right to enforce an exclusivity provision. In return, the licensee must continue to make any required royalty payments. The licensee also can retain rights under any agreement supplementary to the license, which includes source code or other forms of technology escrow agreements.  Taken together, these provisions protect a licensee from being stripped of its rights to continue to use the licensed intellectual property.
  • Watch out for trademarks. While many people would expect intellectual property to include trademarks, the Bankruptcy Code has its own limited definition of "intellectual property." The bankruptcy definition includes trade secrets, patents and patent applications, copyrights, and mask works.  Importantly, however, it does not include trademarks. This distinction means that trademark licensees enjoy none of Section 365(n)'s special protections and those licensees are at risk of losing their trademark rights in a bankruptcy. 

For more on these subjects, you may find these earlier posts, "Intellectual Property Licenses: What Happens In Bankruptcy?" and "Trademark Licensor In Bankruptcy: Special Risk For Licensees" of interest.

The Israeli Perspective. An article in Cooley's Cross Border Commentary, prepared by Einat Meisel of the Israeli law firm of Gross, Kleinhendler, Hodak, Berkman and Co., discusses a Tel-Aviv District Court decision involving these issues. When an Israeli company known as Commodio Ltd. entered liquidation, two of its intellectual property licensees sought to retain rights under their license agreements with Commodio. In ruling on the effort, the Israeli court made several important holdings:

  • The licensees could continue to use the IP as long as they made required any royalty payments and complied with the terms of use in the agreements, with payments to be made to the liquidator.
  • The licensees could gain access to the underlying source code behind the object code covered by their licenses provided this did not impose substantial expense on the company in liquidation.
  • No transfer of ownership in the IP could occur due to the liquidation, as this would be contrary to Israeli bankruptcy law.
  • A right of first refusal covering certain of the intellectual property would be enforceable in the bankruptcy.

Comparison To A U.S. Bankruptcy. With a few key differences, the outcome in the Commodio case is similar to the treatment under U.S. law. Under Section 365(n)'s provisions, licensees would have the ability to retain their rights to the IP, with any royalty payments being made to the bankruptcy estate. If an agreement contained a source code license, the licensees could also access the source code under Section 365(n). However, absent a license grant to the source code, the outcome would likely be different in a U.S. bankruptcy.  Provisions purporting to transfer ownership of the IP upon a bankruptcy or liquidation would not be enforceable in a U.S. bankruptcy. Finally, the right of first refusal enforced in the Israeli case might not be enforced in a U.S. bankruptcy if the agreement were rejected but could if the license were assumed. 

Get Advice. Licensing intellectual property from a foreign corporation raises a number of issues, including what happens if the foreign licensor goes bankrupt or becomes insolvent. Potential licensees should be sure to get expert advice on the applicable foreign law, including the implications of bankruptcy, when licensing IP from a foreign company. Although licensees from Israeli companies can find some comfort in the Commodio decision, it remains important to get advice on Israeli law specific to your situation. 

Two Ways To Get The Updated Bankruptcy Code Online For Free

Looking for a free, online and updated version of the entire Bankruptcy Code, reflecting the amendments made by the Bankruptcy Abuse Prevention and Consumer Protection Act ("BAPCPA")? Now there are two ways to access it.

These are handy resources for attorneys and others who need to find the up-to-date Bankruptcy Code online.

First Appellate Court Decision Addresses Question Left Open In The Supreme Court's Travelers Opinion: Can Unsecured Creditors Recover Post-Petition Attorney's Fees?

Happy New Year to everyone. I'm back from a holiday blogging break with a report on the first appellate decision to address the question left open in last year's U.S. Supreme Court decision in Travelers Casualty & Surety Co. of America v. Pacific Gas & Electric Co. -- whether post-petition attorney's fees can be added to unsecured claims. Although unrelated, this new decision also tackles the interesting question of whether a guarantor of a debt can become liable if the payment of the debt by the primary obligor later is returned in a preference settlement.

The Travelers Case. As a brief refresher, the U.S. Supreme Court overruled the Ninth Circuit's so-called Fobian rule in the Travelers Casualty & Surety Co. of America v. Pacific Gas & Electric Co. decision (available here) in March 2007. However, it did not decide whether unsecured creditors could recover, as part of their unsecured claims, post-petition attorney's fees incurred during the course of the bankruptcy case. For more on the Travelers decision, you may find this earlier post of interest.

A Developing Split. Since the Travelers decision, two bankruptcy courts issued decisions on the open issue, coming to different conclusions. 

  • In May 2007, in the In re Qmect, Inc. decision (available here), the U.S. Bankruptcy Court for the Northern District of California held that unsecured creditors could recover post-petition attorney's fees. For more on that decision, see this earlier post on the case and its analysis. 
  • In July 2007, in the In re Electric Machinery Enterprises, Inc. case (available here), the U.S. Bankruptcy Court for the Middle District of Florida came to the opposite conclusion, following a majority of courts that had addressed this issue unrestrained by the Ninth Circuit's Fobian decision. See this previous post for more on the Florida decision.
  • Commentators, including with the recent article written by the American Bankruptcy Institute's Scholar in Residence Professor Mark Scarberry, have joined the fray as well.

The SNTL Corp. Ruling. On December 19, 2007, the Ninth Circuit Bankruptcy Appellate Panel ("BAP") issued its decision in the In re SNTL Corp. case (available here). After carefully reviewing both the Qmect and Electric Machinery decisions, as well as pre-Travelers case law, the BAP chose to follow Qmect, holding that "claims for postpetition attorneys' fees cannot be disallowed simply because the claim of the creditor is unsecured." Judge Dennis Montali, writing for the unanimous BAP panel, first explained its analysis of the interplay between Sections 502 and 506(b):

We are not persuaded by the approach of the Electric Machinery court and, like Qmect, we reject the argument that section 506(b) preempts postpetition attorneys’ fees for all except oversecured creditors. While we cannot predict how the Ninth Circuit will decide this issue in Travelers, we do find a clue in Joseph F. Sanson Inv. Co. v. 268 Ltd. (In re 268 Ltd.), 789 F.2d 674, 678 (9th Cir. 1986), where the Ninth Circuit observed that section 506(b) defines secured claims and does not limit unsecured claims:

When read literally, subsection (b) arguably limits the fees available to the oversecured creditor. When read in conjunction with § 506(a), however, it may be understood to define the portion of the fees which shall be afforded secured status. We adopt the latter reading.

268 Ltd., 789 F.2d at 678.

Next, the BAP discussed Section 502(b)(1)'s requirement that the court determine the amount of an unsecured claim as of the petition date: 

The Electric Machinery court, like the bankruptcy court here and many of the pre-Travelers majority courts, disallowed the postpetition fees of an unsecured creditor because section 502(b)(1) provides that a bankruptcy court  “shall determine the amount of such claim . . . as of the date of the filing of the petition” and the postpetition fees did not exist as of that date. Elec. Mach., 371 B.R. at 551; Pride Cos., 285 B.R. at 373. Because the amount of fees incurred postpetition cannot be determined or calculated as of the petition date, section 502(b) purportedly precludes their allowance. Id. We disagree with this approach, as it is inconsistent with the Bankruptcy Code’s broad definition of “claim,” which -- as discussed previously -- includes any right to payment, whether or not that right is contingent and unliquidated. See 11 U.S.C. § 101(5)(A); Qmect, 368 B.R. at 884.

The BAP then held that the Supreme Court's 1988 Timbers decision did not apply:

We believe that Electric Machinery’s reliance on Timbers is misplaced. Timbers provided that an undersecured creditor could not receive postpetition interest on the unsecured portion of its debt. Timbers, 484 U.S. at 380. This holding is consistent with section 502(b)(2), which specifically disallows claims for unmatured interest. Inasmuch  as section 502(b) does not contain a similar prohibition against attorneys’ fees, the comparison between the current issue and that presented in Timbers is not persuasive.

Finally, the BAP held that it was unnecessary to reconcile the competing public policy considerations advanced by the Electric Machinery and Qmect decisions:

Because we find that the Bankruptcy Code itself provides the answer to this issue (by not specifically disallowing postpetition fees), we do not attempt to reconcile these policy concerns. In the end, it is the province of Congress to correct statutory dysfunctions and to resolve difficult policy questions embedded in the statute.

A Ninth Circuit Decision To Come? In the first quote above, you may have picked up the BAP's reference to the Ninth Circuit having this issue before it in the Travelers case. That case, on remand from the Supreme Court, appears to have been fully briefed. Any decision from the Ninth Circuit itself on the issue would, of course, supersede this BAP decision and be controlling authority in the circuit, but it may be months before such a ruling comes down.

A Bonus Issue: Guarantor's Liability Revived After A Preference Settlement. The facts of the SNTL Corp. case are complex, but the key facts are fairly straightforward. In short, one of the debtor's insurance company subsidiaries owed money to the creditor and the debtor guaranteed the debt. Although the subsidiary paid the creditor, the subsidiary was later placed into state insolvency proceedings. The state insurance commissioner sued the creditor for return of the payment on preference grounds. The creditor settled the preference case and returned most of the payment ($110 million of a $163.4 million original payment). The creditor thereafter amended its proof of claim in the debtor's Chapter 11 case, seeking recovery under the guaranty of the returned preference.

  • After first determining that the guaranty's language permitted the creditor to assert a claim to the extent provided by law, the BAP next held, "[w]hile we located no Ninth Circuit or California case precisely on point, we agree that the return of a preferential payment by a creditor generally revives the liability of a guarantor."
  • The BAP cited to various case and restatement authority for the proposition that although a guarantor is discharged on payment of a debt, a preferential payment is deemed to be no payment at all.
  • The BAP also held that repayment of a preference in a settlement, following a preference lawsuit, is not a voluntary payment that would avoid the guarantor's liability.
  • Given the risk of a preference recovery, the creditor's revival claim under the guaranty was a contingent claim as of the petition date and became allowable once the contingency occurred following the petition. As a result, the creditor's claim for the full $110 million of the preference settlement was an allowed claim.

An Important Decision. BAP decisions are not binding precedent in the Ninth Circuit, but this first appellate decision on the open, post-Travelers question may encourage unsecured creditors to include post-petition attorney's fees as part of their allowed unsecured claims when their contracts or a statute provides for them outside of bankruptcy.  We may see creditors begin to include such amounts in unsecured claims at an increasing pace, while we wait for the Ninth Circuit's decision on this issue in the remanded Travelers case. The added bonus of the SNTL Corp. court's guaranty analysis and holding makes this decision an even more interesting, and important, read.

Chapter 11 Plan Ballots: A New Resource Goes Online

The Altman Group, one of a number of companies that provides bankruptcy claims and balloting services, has just launched a new Bankruptcy Ballot Archive. The Archive makes available a range of different types of ballots, which are used for voting on Chapter 11 bankruptcy plans of reorganization. The ten ballot categories on the Archive include the following:

  • Asbestos/Mass Tort Cases
  • Bondholder Ballots
  • Contested Plan Solicitations
  • Convenience Class Election
  • Equity Holder Ballots
  • Pre-Packaged and Pre-Negotiated Plan Ballots
  • Ballots with Releases

For debtors and restructuring professionals looking for a broad spectrum of sample ballot forms to consider for a particular Chapter 11 plan, this new archive is a good place to start. 

Delaware Bankruptcy Court Opts Out Of Newly Amended Rule 3007's Procedures For Omnibus Claim Objections

As described in a post earlier this week, one of the major changes made by the new amendments to the Federal Rules of Bankruptcy Procedure that took effect on December 1, 2007 was the inclusion of limits on the use of omnibus claim objections. Newly revised Rule 3007 restricts omnibus objections to certain situations and imposes formatting standards on the motions that can be filed. 

When describing the amended rule, I commented that the Delaware Bankruptcy Court, through Local Rule 3007-1, has had its own omnibus objection procedures for some time and that they seemed to be in conflict with the new national rule. Well, taking advantage of the "unless otherwise ordered by the court" language in amended Rule 3007(c), Chief Judge Mary F. Walrath of the Delaware Bankruptcy Court issued this General Order noting the conflict but directing that the amended Rule 3007(c) "shall not be applicable to omnibus objections that are filed in accordance with Local Rule 3007-1." As a result, barring an individual judge choosing to apply the national Rule 3007 procedure in a particular situation, omnibus objections in Delaware cases will continue to be governed by Delaware's own local procedures.

Special thanks to Chuck Kunz of MorrisJames, publishers of the Delaware Business Bankruptcy Report, for alerting me to Delaware's new General Order.

Don't Miss The Important Business Bankruptcy Rule Amendments That Just Took Effect

On December 1st of almost every year, amendments to the Federal Rules of Bankruptcy Procedure -- the ones that govern how bankruptcy cases are managed -- take effect to address issues identified by an Advisory Committee made up of federal judges, bankruptcy attorneys, and others. Often the changes are relatively minor and of interest only to bankruptcy practitioners, but this year's set has made some significant changes that will directly impact debtors, creditors and other stakeholders.

A Look At The Amendments. You may find it interesting to see the entire group of amendments together, so I have included two links. The first is to the full "clean" set of the amended rules. The second is to a redline showing the changes made by these amendments to the existing rules, together with the Advisory Committee's comments.

The Omnibus Objection Problem. One of the most significant amendments will make changes to the popular practice of filing omnibus objections. In large cases the debtor or other estate representative has so many claims to address that they have combined objections to dozens -- sometimes hundreds -- of different claims in one single motion. The objection may have a name such as “Debtors' Fourteenth Omnibus Objections To Claims (Substantive)” or some similarly titled document. Click here for one example. In a post last year called "Objections To Claims: Ignore Them At Your Peril," I discussed how it can be hard to tell which claims an omnibus objection is targeting.

  • The format has often meant that the only reference to an individual creditor is buried within the objection’s many pages of text and exhibits, typically in an attached list or chart.
  • If the creditor doesn't respond to the objection timely, its claim will likely be disallowed and it will recover absolutely nothing from the bankruptcy estate.

The Amended Rule 3007: An "Anti-Gotcha" Solution. The new rules restrict the use of omnibus objections to certain limited circumstances and impose formatting standards. Otherwise, each claim will require its own separate claim objection unless the combined objection covers claims filed by the same person or entity. What grounds for objection can be made by an omnibus objection under the newly revised Rule 3007?

  • Duplicate claims;
  • Claims filed in the wrong case;
  • Original claims that were amended by later claims;
  • Claims that were not timely filed;
  • Claims that have already been paid or released;
  • Claims filed in a form that does not comply with applicable rules;
  • Claims that are really asserting an equity interest in the debtor; and
  • Priority claims that assert an amount in excess of the maximum amount in the Bankruptcy Code.

In short, if the claim is being challenged on substantive grounds, rather than more technical or procedural ones, then the objection will have to be filed one claimant at a time.

When an omnibus objection does make the permitted objections, it will now have to list claimants in alphabetical order, cross-reference claim numbers, give the ground for the objection and cross-reference that to the text of the objection, describe the objector and the reason for the objection in the document's title, and combine no more than 100 claims in a single objection. This is all designed to make it easier for the creditor to figure out whether its claim is included and the basis for the objection.

Amended Rule 4001: The Clearer Disclosure Rules. Changes have been made to the rule that governs motions and stipulations for use of cash collateral and obtaining debtor in possession (DIP) financing. The amended rules now require that more details about the key provisions of cash collateral and DIP financing terms and conditions be stated in the motion, that proposed forms of order be filed with the motion, and that cross-references be made in the motion to where in the cash collateral or DIP financing agreements and proposed orders the key provisions are reflected. Since some financing agreements can run hundreds of pages long, with complex formulas and provisions, this rule change is designed to make it easier for the court and the parties to understand their material features without wading through the entire document.

New Rule 6003: Putting The Breaks On Some "First Day" Orders. Another major change is the addition of Rule 6003. This new rule provides that "except and to the extent that relief is necessary to avoid immediate and irreparable harm, the court shall not, within 20 days after the filing of the petition, grant relief" regarding three key areas:

  • The employment of professionals;
  • A motion to pay any prepetition claims (read: critical vendors) or to use, sell, lease (Section 363 sales), or incur an obligation for property of the estate, other than cash collateral or DIP financing motions; or
  • Assumption or assignment of any executory contract or unexpired lease (including commercial real estate leases).

As drafted, unless there is an emergency, and then only to the extent it's really necessary, the bankruptcy court should defer these decisions until after the 20th day following the filing of the Chapter 11 bankruptcy petition (although technically these apply under the other chapters of bankruptcy). One reason for the rule is to give time for a creditors committee to be appointed and retain counsel before important decisions are made. That said, the exceptions for cash collateral and DIP financing, as well as for rejection of leases and other executory contracts, means a lot can still be done during the early part of a case. When Section 363 sale or critical vendor motions come up on an emergency basis, it'll be interesting to see how often courts, in applying this new rule, find the existence of irreparable harm.

Amended Rule 6006: Assumption, Assignment, And Rejection Of Executory Contracts. Similar to Rule 3007, Rule 6006 has been changed to put limits on when omnibus motions can be used to deal with executory contracts and leases. Under new Rule 6006(e), absent special court authorization, omnibus motions may be used for multiple executory contracts or leases only when all of the executory contracts to be assumed or assigned are (1) between the same parties, or (2) being assigned to the same assignee. This latter provision likely covers most Section 363 asset sales, so non-debtor contracting parties should continue to carefully review those motions, as discussed in this earlier post. An omnibus motion may also be used when a debtor or trustee seeks to assume, but not assign to more than one assignee, real property leases. In addition, omnibus motions may be used to request rejection of multiple executory contracts or leases.

New Rule 6006(f) provides that, when allowed, these omnibus motions can list no more than 100 executory contracts or leases in any one motion (unlike the chart on this fairly typical pre-amendment motion), and multiple motions will need to be numbered consecutively. The new rule also requires that permitted omnibus motions provide a variety of new information, including:

  • An alphabetical listing by party name;
  • The terms of the assumption or assignment, including for curing defaults; and
  • The identity of the assignee and the adequate assurance of future performance to be provided.

A Few Other Changes. The other amendments this year (1) permit a court to consider a change of venue, (2) clarify when corporate ownership disclosure needs to be made, (3) address constitutional challenges to statutes, and (4) specify procedures for protecting social security numbers and other private information in court filings. Check the clean or redline sets linked above to read these additional rule amendments.

Conclusion. This year's amendments to the Federal Rules of Bankruptcy Procedure have more than their share of real changes and they will have an impact on business bankruptcy cases. The omnibus motion changes should help creditors from missing when their claim is the target of an objection and contract parties from failing to see that their executory contract or lease is part of a motion to assume and assign. Although cash collateral and DIP financing motions are not affected, the new irreparable harm standard for certain relief in the first 20 days of a case may prove interesting when emergency Section 363 sales are attempted. Stay tuned.

Assumption Of Trademark Licenses In Bankruptcy: An Update On The N.C.P. Marketing Case

Over a year ago, I posted on a first of its kind decision in In re: N.C.P. Marketing Group, Inc., 337 B.R. 230 (D.Nev. 2005), in which the U.S. District Court for the District of Nevada held that trademark licenses are personal and nonassignable absent a provision in the trademark license to the contrary. Click here for a copy of the N.C.P Marketing Group decision and here to read the earlier post on the case.

The N.C.P. Marketing Court's Analysis. In reaching its conclusion, the District Court held that under the Lanham Act, the federal trademark statute, a trademark owner has a right and duty to control the quality of goods sold under the mark:

Because the owner of the trademark has an interest in the party to whom the trademark is assigned so that it can maintain the good will, quality, and value of its products and thereby its trademark, trademark rights are personal to the assignee and not freely assignable to a third party.  

The trademark owner in that case, Billy Blanks of the Billy Blanks® Tae Bo® fitness program, successfully moved the court to compel rejection of the trademark license because under the "hypothetical test" analysis of Section 365(c)(1) of the Bankruptcy Code adopted by the U.S. Court of Appeals for the Ninth Circuit, contracts that cannot be assigned by the debtor without the nondebtor party's consent cannot be assumed by the debtor either. (For a full discussion of these issues, take a look at this earlier post entitled "Assumption of Intellectual Property Licenses In Bankruptcy: Are Recent Cases Tilting Toward Debtors?")  

The Ninth Circuit Appeal. In December 2005, the parties appealed this decision to the Ninth Circuit. The appeal was fully briefed and had been scheduled for oral argument on November 5, 2007.

  • In July 2007, however, the N.C.P. Marketing Chapter 11 case was converted to Chapter 7. 
  • On October 24, 2007, the Chapter 7 trustee asked the Ninth Circuit to reschedule the oral argument because of a pending settlement in the case.
  • In response, the Ninth Circuit took the oral argument off calendar and directed the parties to move to dismiss the appeal if the settlement is approved by the Bankruptcy Court.

Still No Court Of Appeals Decision. If the settlement is approved, no Ninth Circuit decision will be issued. Instead, this case seems to be headed to an ending similar to that in In re Wellington Vision, Inc. (see this earlier post on the Wellington Vision case for more details), perhaps the only other bankruptcy decision to date to address this trademark issue. There, conversion of the case to Chapter 7 also led to a settlement without an appellate decision. With these recent developments in the In re N.C.P. Marketing case, trademark licensors and licensees will have to wait longer still for an appeals court decision on this important issue at the intersection of trademark and bankruptcy law.

A Fly In The Ointment: Sale Of Property May Cut Off Landlord's Section 502(b)(6) Lease Rejection Claim For Future Rent

Here's a scenario frequently seen in Chapter 11 cases. A tenant files bankruptcy and rejects a commercial real estate lease. The landlord files an unsecured lease rejection claim seeking to recover the lost future rent under the rejected lease. The claim amount is capped by Bankruptcy Code Section 502(b)(6) but may still be one of the larger unsecured claims in the case. Now let's add a small, but relatively common, twist. Sometime later, but before distributions are made on the claim, the landlord sells the real estate that the debtor had occupied under the rejected lease.

The FLYi Chapter 11 Case. That, complete with the twist, was the situation in the In re FLYi, Inc. Chapter 11 case pending in the Delaware Bankruptcy Court. After the landlord sold the property, the liquidation trust established under the debtor's Chapter 11 plan of reorganization objected to the landlord's claim, arguing that after the sale of the property the debtor had no further obligations under the lease. Virginia law applied because the property was located in Dulles, Virginia. As described by the Bankruptcy Court, the landlord had three options under Virginia law:

[D]o nothing and sue for the rent remaining under the Lease; reenter the Premises for the sole purpose of re-letting it without terminating the Lease; or re-enter the Premises and exercise full dominion over the premises thereby terminating the Lease and eliminating FLYi’s obligation to pay any future rent.

The landlord argued that this interpretation of the law was wrong but asserted that provisions in the lease protected the landlord's claim anyway. The Bankruptcy Court rejected those arguments and held that the landlord's sale of the property terminated both the lease and the landlord's right to future rent after the date of the sale. A copy of the Bankruptcy Court's decision is available here.

Be sure to read the Delaware Business Bankruptcy Report's interesting discussion for more details on the decision, including the arguments advanced and the Bankruptcy Court's treatment of them.

What Does This Mean For Landlords? A landlord contemplating a sale of the real property will have to consider what impact that sale might have on its lease rejection claim.

  • In states like Virginia where, according to the Bankruptcy Court in the FLYi case, termination of a lease cuts off a landlord's claim for future rent, landlords will have to be prepared to lose all or a portion of a lease rejection claim if they sell the real property. 
  • The outcome may be different in other states. Section 1951.2 of the California Civil Code, for example, expressly permits a landlord, upon termination of a lease, to recover the present value of the difference between the unpaid future rent under the lease and the amount of rent that could reasonably be avoided through mitigation efforts. This may permit a landlord to sell the property and still retain a lease rejection claim.
  • When state law allows it, landlords may seek to include provisions in a lease to preserve contractually the right to a post-sale lease damages claim.

What Does This Mean For Bankruptcy Estates? Debtors, liquidation trusts, and other estate representatives may have an incentive to determine whether the landlord still owns the property. In states where a post-rejection sale of the property operates to cut off the landlord's future rent claim, this fact could provide a new ground for an objection to the landlord's Section 502(b)(6) claim.

Conclusion. Time will tell how frequently this scenario will play out in future cases, but landlords should expect to see the "did you sell the property" question asked more often going forward.

New Article Tackles Whether Unsecured Creditors Should Be Able To Recover Post-Petition Attorney's Fees, The Question Left Open By The Travelers Decision

When the U.S. Supreme Court overruled the Ninth Circuit's so-called Fobian rule in the Travelers Casualty & Surety Co. of America v. Pacific Gas & Electric Co. decision (available here) in March 2007, it left for another day the question of whether unsecured creditors could recover, as part of their unsecured claims, post-petition attorney's fees incurred during the course of the bankruptcy case.

Early Decisions Take Different Views. Since the Travelers decision, two bankruptcy courts have issued decisions but have come to different conclusions on that question. 

  • In May 2007, in the In re Qmect, Inc. decision (available here), the U.S. Bankruptcy Court for the Northern District of California held that unsecured creditors could recover post-petition attorney's fees. For more on that decision, see this earlier post on the case and its analysis. 
  • In July 2007, in the In re Electric Machinery Enterprises, Inc. case (available here), the U.S. Bankruptcy Court for the Middle District of Florida came to the opposite conclusion, following a majority of courts that had addressed this issue unrestrained by the Ninth Circuit's Fobian decision. See this previous post for more on the Florida decision.

New Article Sides With Majority View. A new article to be published in the Winter 2007 issue of the American Bankruptcy Institute Law Review, gives context for these differing views and argues that the majority position is the correct one. The article, entitled "Interpreting Bankruptcy Code Sections 502 and 506: Post-Petition Attorneys' Fees in a Post-Travelers World," was written by Professor Mark S. Scarberry, Professor of Law at the Pepperdine University School of Law. Professor Scarberry is the current Robert M. Zinman Scholar in Residence at the American Bankruptcy Institute. A copy of the article is available for download from the Social Science Research Network website by following this link.

A Textual Argument. The centerpiece of the article is Professor Scarberry's interesting analysis of the interplay between Sections 502(b) and 506 of the Bankruptcy Code and the textual argument he advances to support the majority view.

  • A key building block of this argument is his conclusion that the language in Section 502(b), which provides that a claim is to be allowed in an amount "as of the date of the filing of the petition," precludes inclusion of post-petition amounts as part of the Section 502(b) claim allowance. 
  • He then argues that Section 506(b)'s function is to add post-petition interest and "reasonable fees, costs, and charges" to this Section 502(b) allowed amount but only for secured claims (determined under Section 506(a)) and only when the value of a secured creditor's collateral exceeds the allowed amount of the claim, determined under Section 506(a).
  • He contends that Section 506(b)'s use of the phrase "there shall be allowed" demonstrates that its purpose is to allow amounts not otherwise allowable under Section 502(b).

The Debate Continues. Professor Scarberry's article is an excellent resource for those seeking to understand the history and background of this issue. It also provides debtors, creditors committees, and their attorneys with arguments to oppose an unsecured creditor's attempt to recover post-petition attorney's fees. The issue, however, remains far from settled in the courts. 

  • The majority view, now bolstered by the arguments in Professor Scarberry's article, will probably prevail in many cases.
  • Still, the In re Qmect decision shows that at least some courts may allow these fees.

Until this issue is resolved by the Supreme Court, or at least by more Courts of Appeals, unsecured creditors with a contractual or nonbankruptcy statutory right to attorney's fees may try their luck and seek allowance of post-petition attorney's fees in bankruptcy cases as part of their unsecured claims.

The Terrible Twos? A Look At BAPCPA's Impact On Business Bankruptcy Cases At Its Second Anniversary

Tomorrow, October 17, 2007, marks the second anniversary of the effective date of the Bankruptcy Abuse Prevention and Consumer Protection Act of 2005, known as BAPCPA.  BAPCPA was enacted primarily to make sweeping changes to the consumer provisions of the Bankruptcy Code. However, BAPCPA also made significant revisions in the business bankruptcy arena.  When it was passed, bankruptcy lawyers, creditors, and potential debtors had many questions about how these changes would play out as new cases made their way through the system. Two years out, we now have answers to some of those questions.

In this post I'll look at a few of BAPCPA's more substantial revisions and how courts have addressed them so far. These include new rules governing real estate leases, reclamation, the "20 day goods" administrative claim, key employee retention plans, cross-border bankruptcy cases, and an important preference defense. As we walk down memory lane, I'll also point you to earlier posts where you can find more details on these issues.

Commercial Real Estate Leases. Under BAPCPA, if the debtor is the tenant under an unexpired commercial lease, it must either assume or reject the lease within 120 days of the filing of bankruptcy. The court can extend this time period without the landlord’s consent for 90 additional days, making a total of 210 days, but any further extensions require the landlord’s prior written consent. If the lease is not assumed (or assumed and assigned) within this period, the lease automatically will be deemed rejected and the debtor will have to move out. 

  • Before BAPCPA, debtors initially had only 60 days to assume or reject leases but there was no statutory limit on extensions of that period. Cumulative extensions of a year or more, over a landlord's objection, were not uncommon under the pre-BAPCPA version of the Bankruptcy Code. That is no longer possible under BAPCPA.
  • Below market leases can represent a significant asset, particularly for retailers with many store leases, and BAPCPA has forced these debtors to move very quickly to assume and assign leases or to sell designation rights to make the most of the 210 day maximum period. In a number of cases, this 210 day limit has depressed the value of the debtor's leases and the recovery for its creditors.
  • For more on real estate leases, you may want to read "Commercial Real Estate Leases: How Are They Treated In Bankruptcy?" previously posted on this blog.

Reclamation. When a debtor becomes insolvent or files bankruptcy, some vendors may be able to take advantage of a special, although limited, right to get back or "reclaim" certain of the goods. This reclamation right is part of both the Uniform Commercial Code and the Bankruptcy Code. BAPCPA made some changes in the reclamation area and post-BAPCPA cases have put some meat on the bones of those changes. A new, 45-day bankruptcy reclamation right was added to Section 546(c) of the Bankruptcy Code, expanding the Uniform Commercial Code's 10-day rule. Under BAPCPA, the goods must have been sold in the "ordinary course" of the vendor's business and the debtor must have received the goods while insolvent. The reclamation demand must be in writing and made within 45 days of the receipt of the goods by the customer (now the debtor in bankruptcy).  If the 45-day period expires after the bankruptcy case is filed, the vendor must make the reclamation demand within 20 days after the bankruptcy filing.

Two decisions from earlier this year have helped clarify the impact, and highlight the limitations, of BAPCPA's reclamation changes.

  • In January 2007, Judge Christopher S. Sontchi of the U.S. Bankruptcy Court for the District of Delaware refused to issue a temporary restraining order in favor of a reclamation claimant in the Advanced Marketing Services case who sought to prevent the sale of goods it was trying to reclaim. The Court cited the superior rights of the secured creditor, which had a lien on the goods. A discussion of the case and a copy of the Court's decision is available at this earlier post.
  • Then, in April 2007, Judge Burton R. Lifland of the U.S. Bankruptcy Court for the Southern District of New York applied the "prior lien defense" in favor of a secured creditor by valuing all reclamation claims in the Dana Corporation case at zero. You can find a discussion of that case and a copy of the decision at this previous post.

The "20 Day Goods" Administrative Claim. Although the post-BAPCPA decisions have not been favorable to vendors in the reclamation area, recent developments have underscored the value of the new Section 503(b)(9) administrative claim. That new provision, added by BAPCPA, gives vendors an administrative priority claim for "the value of any goods received by the debtor within 20 days before" the date a bankruptcy petition was filed "in which the goods have been sold to the debtor in the ordinary course of such debtor's business."  For an overview of the new provision, you may find the post entitled "20 Day Goods: New Administrative Claim For Goods Sold Just Before Bankruptcy," of interest.

Key Employee Retention Plans. One of BAPCPA's most notable changes was the significant restrictions imposed on key employee retention plans, known as KERPs. Prior to BAPCPA, KERPs were a very popular way of making sure that a company could retain its most important officers and employees to guide it through bankruptcy. Citing perceived abuses, however, Congress added language in BAPCPA that requires debtors to satisfy nearly impossible standards before courts would be permitted to approve payment of retention bonuses (or severance payments) as administrative claims to officers and other insiders of a bankrupt company. In short, a debtor would have to show that the individual was essential the the survival of the business and that he or she had a bona fide job offer from another business at the same or greater rate of compensation.

Debtors looking to compensate key officers have moved away from retention plans entirely and instead have turned to incentive plans. 

  • Several courts have approved incentive plans covering insiders but have applied certain factors to judge the reasonableness of the plan, including an assessment of the relationship between the plan and the results to be obtained, the cost of the plan, and whether the plan's overall scope is fair and reasonable.
  • In May 2007, the Delaware Bankruptcy Court even approved a downward adjustment to an incentive plan's targets, permitting a bonus to be paid to insiders, when the original plan's targets turned out to be unrealistic. 
  • For more on this topic, including copies of three significant decisions in the Dana Corporation, Global Home Products, and Nellson Nutraceuticals cases, follow the link to this earlier post on key employee incentive plans.

Chapter 15 On Cross-Border Bankruptcies. BAPCPA added a new chapter to the Bankruptcy Code to adopt an internationally drafted Model Law on Cross-Border Insolvency.  Chapter 15 is used principally by representatives of, or creditors in, foreign insolvency proceedings to obtain assistance in the United States, by a debtor or others seeking to obtain assistance in a foreign country regarding a bankruptcy case in the United States, or when both a foreign proceeding and a bankruptcy case in the United States are pending with respect to the same debtor. Follow the link in this sentence for a detailed overview of Chapter 15.

  • In a recent case involving two Bear Stearns hedge funds, the Bankruptcy Court in the Southern District of New York refused to recognize proceedings pending in the Cayman Islands as either a foreign main or foreign nonmain proceeding, denying those entities Chapter 15 protection in the United States.
  • You can find the details on this case (and a copy of the original and amended decisions) here and here.

Preferences. Before it took effect, one of BAPCPA's most talked about changes was a revision to the "ordinary course of business" defense to preference claims. BAPCPA dropped the requirement that a preference defendant establish that a transfer was both (i) made in the ordinary course of business or financial affairs between the debtor and the defendant and (ii) made according to ordinary business terms.

  • BAPCPA's main change was to replace the "and" with an "or", meaning that a preference defendant now has to establish only one of the two prongs (instead of both) to prevail on the defense. When it was enacted, many bankruptcy lawyers believed this change would favor preference defendants. 
  • In something of a surprise, however, the first case interpreting the revised statute applied a brand new standard to the "ordinary business terms" provision. Unlike the prior analysis of that prong, the new standard examined the question from the perspective of both the creditor (as had been done pre-BAPCPA) and the debtor (the new BAPCPA twist). As a result, in that decision the preference defendant lost. For more on the decision, in the In re National Gas Distributors, LLC case, check out this post on David Rosendorf's BAPCPA Blog.
  • There have been surprisingly few cases interpreting this section, so it remains to be seen whether other courts will follow the National Gas Distributors interpretation.

Another Great BAPCPA Resource. In addition to the BAPCPA Blog, which has posts on many decisions from BAPCPA's first year, don't miss Steve Jakubowski's Bankruptcy Litigation Blog, in particular his BAPCPA and BAPCPA Outline topics. Steve has posted on a range of BAPCPA issues, including major consumer decisions and many business bankruptcy decisions.

Acting Like A Two Year Old? As we begin the third year under BAPCPA, the law is beginning to take early steps toward greater clarity in some areas but much remains to be decided. In particular, few appellate decisions have been issued on BAPCPA's key changes, giving us little guidance on how the Courts of Appeals will interpret the new law.  As always, stay tuned for more developments and feel free to subscribe to the blog by email or by RSS to your feedreader.

The Bull Rips A Hole In The Matador's Cape: New Ninth Circuit Decision Limits Reach Of Section 502(b)(6)'s Landlord Cap

A commercial real estate lease often represents the largest single liability of many debtors. For retailers, which typically have scores or even hundreds of store leases, the liability involved is orders of magnitude larger. It's fair to say that the management of lease obligations can be of enormous consequence to debtors, landlords, and other creditors in Chapter 11 bankruptcy cases.

Rejected Leases And The Capped Claim. As explained in an earlier post on how commercial real estate leases are treated in bankruptcy, one of a debtor's options in a Chapter 11 case is to reject uneconomic or otherwise burdensome leases, terminating the debtor's obligation to pay rent and turning the landlord's claim for termination of the lease into a prepetition claim. Section 502(b)(6) of the Bankruptcy Code goes further and caps the landlord's prepetition rejection claim at an amount equal to the greater of (1) one year's rent or (2) fifteen percent of the remaining lease term, up to a maximum of three years' worth of rent. The starting date for calculating the claim is the earlier of the date when the bankruptcy petition was filed or when the landlord recovered possession of, or the tenant surrendered, the premises. A landlord with six years left on a rejected lease, for example, would have its claim capped at one year's worth of rent.

What's Covered By The Cap? This ability to cap a landlord's claim in bankruptcy can be a major benefit to debtor tenants. Ever since a 1995 decision by the Bankruptcy Appellate Panel (BAP) of the Ninth Circuit in In re McSheridan, 184 B.R. 91 (B.A.P. 9th Cir. 1995), debtors have been successful in many cases in capping a variety of claims by landlords. In McSheridan, the BAP held that the cap applied to all damages for the lessee's nonperformance of the lease, not just to claims based on future rent. Landlords have challenged that analysis but, at least in the Ninth Circuit, have had little success -- until this week.

The Ninth Circuit's El Toro Decision. In an eight-page opinion (available here) issued on October 1, 2007 in the In re El Toro Materials Company, Inc. Chapter 11 case,, the U.S. Court of Appeals for the Ninth Circuit took a very different view of the landlord cap under Section 502(b)(6). In the El Toro case, the debtor was a mining company that leased property from the Saddleback Community Church, paying $28,000 per month in rent. After the lease was rejected, Saddleback brought an adversary proceeding against El Toro for $23 million in damages alleging that El Toro left a million tons of wet clay "goo," mining equipment, and other materials on the property.

  • The bankruptcy court held that Saddleback's claim, which asserted waste, nuisance, and other tort theories, would not be limited by the Section 502(b)(6) cap. 
  • Following its McSheridan precedent, the BAP reversed and held that any damages would be subject to the cap. 
  • Interestingly, two of the three judges on the BAP panel filed concurring opinions, voicing doubts about the wisdom of the McSheridan case. A copy of the BAP's unpublished El Toro decision from July 2005 is available here.

Judge Kozinski's Analysis. On appeal, the Ninth Circuit reversed the BAP's decision, holding that the cap did not apply to the landlord's tort claims. Judge Alex Kozinski authored the opinion and analyzed the key issues this way:

The structure of the cap—measured as a fraction of the remaining term—suggests that damages other than those based on a loss of future rental income are not subject to the cap. It makes sense to cap damages for lost rental income based on the amount of expected rent: Landlords may have the ability to mitigate their damages by re-leasing or selling the premises, but will suffer injury in proportion to the value of their lost rent in the meantime. In contrast, collateral damages are likely to bear only a weak correlation to the amount of rent: A tenant may cause a lot of damage to a premises leased cheaply, or cause little damage to premises underlying an expensive leasehold.

One major purpose of bankruptcy law is to allow creditors to receive an aliquot share of the estate to settle their debts. Metering these collateral damages by the amount of the rent would be inconsistent with the goal of providing compensation to each creditor in proportion with what it is owed. Landlords in future cases may have significant claims for both lost rental income and for breach of other provisions of the lease. To limit their recovery for collateral damages only to a portion of their lost rent would leave landlords in a materially worse position than other creditors. In contrast, capping rent claims but allowing uncapped claims for collateral damage to the rented premises will follow congressional intent by preventing a potentially overwhelming claim for lost rent from draining the estate, while putting landlords on equal footing with other creditors for their collateral claims.

The statutory language supports this interpretation. The cap applies to damages “resulting from” the rejection of the lease. 11 U.S.C. § 502(b)(6). Saddleback’s claims for waste, nuisance and trespass do not result from the rejection of the lease—they result from the pile of dirt allegedly left on the property. Rejection of the lease may or may not have triggered Saddleback’s ability to sue for the alleged damages.But the harm to Saddleback’s property existed whether or not the lease was rejected. A simple test reveals whether the damages result from the rejection of the lease: Assuming all other conditions remain constant, would the landlord have the same claim against the tenant if the tenant were to assume the lease rather than rejecting it? Here, Saddleback would still have the same claim it brings today had El Toro accepted the lease and committed to finish its term: The pile of dirt would still be allegedly trespassing on Saddleback’s land and Saddleback still would have the same basis for its theories of nuisance, waste and breach of contract. The million-ton heap of dirt was not put there by the rejection of the lease—it was put there by the actions and inactions of El Toro in preparing to turn over the site.

(Footnotes omitted.)

McSheridan Holding Overruled. The Ninth Circuit opinion noted the two concurrences from the BAP decision questioning McSheridan and suggested that the BAP consider adopting an en banc procedure to reconsider such doubtful precedents. Given the Ninth Circuit's holding, it will come as no surprise that the Court of Appeals also explicitly overruled McSheridan:

To the extent that McSheridan holds section 502(b)(6) to be a limit on tort claims other than those based on lost rent, rent-like payments or other damages directly arising from a tenant’s failure to complete a lease term, it is overruled.

The Ninth Circuit noted that McSheridan also holds that "damages flowing from the failure of a party that has rejected a lease to perform future routine repairs or pay utility bills are capped," but declined to address -- or overrule -- that holding.

Post-El Toro Ramifications.  At least in the Ninth Circuit, with McSheridan overruled landlords will work hard to characterize their damage claims as arising from tort theories or otherwise not being based on "lost rent, rent-like payments or other damages directly arising from a tenant's failure to complete the lease term." At the negotiation stage, when the market permits landlords may demand larger security deposits and letters of credit on the view that the Section 502(b)(6) cap no longer limits every type of damage recoverable against such security. They may also structure leases to separate claims for items such as clean-up costs, hazardous waste removal, property damage, and even tenant improvement repayments from rent claims, in an attempt to bolster the argument that these claims fall outside of the cap.

Conclusion. Like a bull charging a matador, the El Toro decision has ripped a hole in the Section 502(b)(6) cape previously used to turn away cap-busting landlord claims. Time will tell just how significant the decision turns out to be, but at first blush it seems that debtors and non-landlord creditors may be the ones who end up seeing red. 

Ordinary Course Preference Case Takes Extraordinary Turn: Ninth Circuit Strikes Down Local Bankruptcy Rule On Jury Trials

Preference lawsuits are filed all the time in bankruptcy cases and the ordinary course of business defense is frequently asserted. Still, it's the rare case that ends up with a federal court of appeals decision addressing jury trial rights and invalidating a bankruptcy court's local rule. This post is about just such a case.

The Bankruptcy Preference. As a quick refresher, preferences are payments or other transfers made in the 90 days prior to a bankruptcy filing, on account of antecedent or pre-existing debt, at a time when the debtor was insolvent, that allow the transferee (the preference defendant) to be "preferred" by recovering more than it would have had the transfer not been made and the defendant instead had simply filed a proof of claim for the amount involved. The 90-day reachback period is extended to a full year prior to the bankruptcy petition for insiders such as officers, directors, and affiliates.

Jury Trials In Bankruptcy Cases? Preference defendants who do not file proofs of claim in the main bankruptcy case have the option to demand a trial by jury in the preference lawsuit. This is a right protected by the Seventh Amendment to the Constitution. The parties in the lawsuit can consent to having the bankruptcy court conduct the jury trial but this doesn't happen very often. Why would a preference defendant make a jury demand? Here are three common reasons:

  • The defendant believes a jury would be more inclined to find in its favor than a bankruptcy judge;
  • The defendant wants the case moved to federal district court from the bankruptcy court, which some defendants perceive as more debtor-friendly; and
  • Jury trials are more expensive and complex, a fact the preference defendant may hope will translate into settlement leverage.

The HealthCentral.com Case. In a recent case, Sigma Micro Corporation, a company sued for an alleged preference by debtor HealthCentral.com, made just such a jury trial demand. It then filed a motion for certification before the bankruptcy court seeking to have its case moved to the district court, in accordance with Local Rule 9015-2(b) of the United States Bankruptcy Court for the Northern District of California. That Local Rule, entitled "Certification to District Court," provides:

If the Bankruptcy Judge determines that [a] demand was timely made and the party has a right to a jury trial, and if all parties have not filed written consent to a jury trial before the Bankruptcy Judge, the Bankruptcy Judge shall certify to the District Court that the proceeding is to be tried by a jury and that the parties have not consented to a jury trial in the Bankruptcy Court. Upon such certification, [the jurisdictional] reference of the proceeding shall be automatically withdrawn, and the proceeding assigned to a Judge of the District . . . .

The Bankruptcy Court held that Sigma had a right to a jury trial but then stayed its order to retain jurisdiction for pre-trial matters. It later granted the debtor's motion for summary judgment in the preference case, finding no genuine issue of material fact and rejecting Sigma's ordinary course of business defense. On appeal, Sigma argued that the Bankruptcy Court did not have jurisdiction to enter summary judgment because it should have transferred the case to the District Court upon finding that Sigma was entitled to a jury trial. It also argued that it had raised genuine issues of material fact on its ordinary course of business defense, precluding summary judgment.

The Ninth Circuit's Decision. On September 21, 2007, the Ninth Circuit issued its opinion in the case (available here).  In addressing the jurisdiction question, the Ninth Circuit confronted "an issue of first impression in this circuit, that is, the validity of Local Rule 9015-2(b)." After reviewing the right of courts to promulgate local rules, it came to the core of the issue:

Considering these rules we hold Local Rule 9015-2(b) to be invalid as it establishes a procedure for withdrawing the district court’s jurisdictional reference inconsistent with the Acts of  Congress and Federal Rules of Bankruptcy Procedure. Cf. Coffey v. Marina Management Servs. (In re Kool, Mann, Coffee), 23 F.3d 66, 67-69 (3rd Cir. 1994) (finding local rule invalid because of inconsistency with Bankruptcy Code); In re Morrissey, 717 F.2d 100, 104-05 (3rd Cir. 1983) (same).

The Ninth Circuit noted that 28 U.S.C. § 157(d) provides that a "district court" may withdraw the reference of all or a part of a case or proceeding and that Federal Rule of Bankruptcy Procedure 5011(a) expressly states that a "motion for withdrawal of a case or proceeding shall be heard by a district judge." Putting these two provisions together, the Court of Appeals held:

After careful review we find the procedure established by Local Rule 9105-2(b) cannot be squared with the procedure established by 28 U.S.C. § 157(d), an “Act of Congress,” and Rule 5011(a), a “Federal Rule of Bankruptcy Procedure.” Fed. R. Bankr. Proc. 9029. At least two inconsistencies bear mentioning. First, Local Rule 9015-2(b) allows for the bankruptcy court to “withdraw[ ]” the jurisdictional reference, whereas 28 U.S.C. § 157(d) and Rule 5011(a) make it explicit that only a district court may “withdraw” the jurisdictional reference. See FTC v. First Alliance Mortg. Co. (In re First Alliance Mortg. Co.), 282 B.R. 894, 901 (C.D. Cal. 2001) (holding that “a motion [to withdrawal] is heard by the district court”) (emphasis added). Second, Local Rule 9015-2(b) permits a party to obtain a withdrawal of the reference upon a “Motion for Certification,” while 28 U.S.C. § 157(d) and Rule 5011(a) make it clear that a party may only obtain a withdrawal of the reference upon a “Motion for Withdrawal.” See Hawaiian Airlines, Inc. v. Mesa Air Group, Inc., 355 B.R. 214, 218 (D. Hi. 2006) (holding that “a litigant who believes that a certain [action] or portion of a [action] pending in the bankruptcy court should be litigated in the district court may make a motion to withdraw the reference”) (emphasis added).

Having invalidated the Local Rule, the Ninth Circuit found no error in the Bankruptcy Court's decision not to adhere to it or to withdraw the reference. The Court of Appeal then considered whether the Seventh Amendment jury trial right itself required immediate transfer to the District Court, even for pre-trial proceedings. The Ninth Circuit agreed with courts outside the circuit that, it stated, had universally agreed that a jury trial right "does not mean that the bankruptcy court must instantly give up jurisdiction and that the case must be transferred to the district court."

Concluding that the Bankruptcy Court properly retained the case for pre-trial matters, the Ninth Circuit did ultimately reverse its grant of summary judgment. It found that Sigma had raised genuine issues of material fact on its ordinary course of business defense under the version of Section 547(c)(2) of the Bankruptcy Code in force prior to the amendments made by the Bankruptcy Abuse Prevention and Consumer Protection Act of 2005.

What About Local Rules In Other Courts? It appears that the Northern District of California's local bankruptcy rule on certification of a jury trial right and transfer to the District Court is unusual. Some bankruptcy courts, including the District of Delaware and the Southern District of New York, have no specific rule addressing withdrawal of the reference based on a jury demand. Others require a prompt motion for withdrawal of the reference to be filed with the District Court, as provided in Central District of California Local Bankruptcy Rule 9015-2(g)

Conclusion. Although it appears that the decision's direct impact is limited to the Northern District of California and its jury demand procedures, this case proves that even well-established local rules will be struck down if inconsistent with governing statutes. That's a pretty extraordinary outcome for an ordinary course of business preference case. 

New Developments In The Cayman Islands Hedge Fund Chapter 15 Case

In a post earlier this month, I reported on the August 30, 2007 decision by Judge Burton R. Lifland of the U.S. Bankruptcy Court for the Southern District of New York denying Chapter 15 recognition to foreign proceedings pending in the Cayman Islands for two Bear Stearns hedge funds. In the August decision (available here), the Bankruptcy Court held that although the two hedge funds were organized under the laws of the Cayman Islands, their business operations were in New York and not in the Cayman Islands, which essentially served as a "letter box."

The Involuntary Bankruptcy Option. After denying recognition, the Bankruptcy Court indicated that an alternative path would be for the foreign representatives to file an involuntary bankruptcy petition. The Bankruptcy Court noted that Section 303(b)(4) of the Bankruptcy Code, permitting a foreign representative to file an involuntary bankruptcy petition, had not been repealed when Chapter 15 was enacted. The foreign representatives were given time to pursue that option.

An Amended Opinion To Note An Inconsistency. A few days later, on September 5, 2007, Judge Lifland issued an amended opinion (available here) adding an interesting footnote on that very issue. In it, he suggested that the failure to repeal the involuntary bankruptcy provision may have been a mistake. Here's the new footnote 15 to the amended opinion:

It would appear that the failure to repeal section 303(b)(4) along with section 304 may be a drafting error in view of the newly enacted section 1511(b) which likewise addresses the commencement of a case under sections 301 and 303. The inconsistencies of the two statutes have not been conformed.

The footnote did not change the decision but it raises a question whether the filing of an involuntary case after denial of Chapter 15 recognition is consistent with the intent of Chapter 15's changes to the Bankruptcy Code. If the failure to repeal that section was truly a mistake, fixing it would mean that without Chapter 15 recognition, a foreign representative couldn't obtain any bankruptcy protection in the United States.

The Foreign Representatives File A Motion For Stay Pending Appeal. On September 21, 2007, the foreign representatives for the two hedge funds filed an appeal from the decision and also a motion for stay pending appeal (click on link for a copy). The motion sought to have the order dissolving the stay of litigation against the two funds itself stayed until the appeal is resolved. In addition to arguing that the Bankruptcy Court's decision was in error, the motion stated that the involuntary bankruptcy option was too expensive and could subject the hedge funds to competing main proceedings, one in the United States and one in the Cayman Islands, each with their own legal obligations.

Conditional Stay Granted Pending Appeal. According to media reports, at a hearing held on September 24, 2007, the Bankruptcy Court granted the motion to stay subject to the return to the United States of funds that had been transferred to the Cayman Islands in connection with the foreign proceedings. Stay tuned.

Patent Law Collides With Bankruptcy: Federal Circuit Denies Bankruptcy Liquidation Trust Standing To Sue For Patent Infringement

The United States Court of Appeals for the Federal Circuit has jurisdiction over, among other areas, patent appeals, so it's not every day that a Federal Circuit decision appears on this business bankruptcy blog. (Actually, it's been about a year since this post discussing another Federal Circuit decision.) However, a September 19, 2007 opinion (available here) of the Federal Circuit rested largely on the intersection of patent law and the terms of a Chapter 11 plan of reorganization. Since the decision denied a trust created under the plan standing to bring the debtor's patent infringement claims, it's a significant one for debtors and creditors alike. After discussing the court's decision I'll conclude with my suggested take-away from the case.

The At Home Corporation Plan And Liquidation Trusts. The litigation arose in the At Home Corporation Chapter 11 bankruptcy case, which was filed in September 2001. As part of the confirmed plan of liquidation, a general unsecured creditor liquidation trust (called GUCLT) was created to pursue various claims for the benefit of creditors, including certain patent infringement claims against Microsoft Corporation. A separate liquidation trust (called AHLT) received ownership of the At Home patent at issue in the litigation, among other assets. GUCLT was not granted a license to the patent.

The Patent Litigation And Federal Circuit Decision. The patent litigation reached the Federal Circuit in 2006. Although the plan and related documents granted GUCLT the express right to pursue the patent litigation claims at issue, the Federal Circuit found that to be insufficient to confer standing. It held that the patent statutes provide protection to the party with a right to exclude, not the party with a right to sue. Because the right to exclude others from practicing the patent (part of AHLT's rights) had been separated from the right to sue for infringement (GUCLT's rights), GUCLT was not protected under the patent statutes. The Federal Circuit summed up the situation this way:

The problem for GUCLT and AHLT is that the exclusionary rights have been separated from the right to sue for infringement. The liquidation plan contractually separated the right to sue from the underlying legally protected interests created by the patent statutes—the right to exclude. For any suit that GUCLT brings, its grievance is that the exclusionary interests held by AHLT are being violated. GUCLT is not the party to which the statutes grant judicial relief. See Warth, 422 U.S. at 500. GUCLT suffers no legal injury in fact to the patent’s exclusionary rights. As the Supreme Court stated in Independent Wireless, the right to bring an infringement suit is “to obtain damages for the injury to his exclusive right by an infringer.” 269 U.S. at 469; see also Sicom, 222 F.3d at 1381 (“Standing to sue for infringement depends entirely on the putative plaintiff’s proprietary interest in the patent, not on any contractual arrangements among the parties regarding who may sue…”); Ortho, 52 F.3d at 1034 (“[A] right to sue clause cannot negate the requirement that, for co-plaintiff standing, a licensee must have beneficial ownership of some of the patentee’s proprietary rights.”).

Since GUCLT had the right to sue but not the right to exclude others from practicing the patent, and since AHLT had the right to exclude others but not the right to sue for infringement, neither liquidating trust could sue for the infringement alleged in the GUCLT's underlying lawsuit. The Federal Circuit ruled that the problem could not be solved by the typical practice of joining the legal title holder, here AHLT, to the patent litigation as a party. Although such joinder solves prudential standing requirements, the court held that it does not solve the constitutional standing requirement of actual legal injury. GUCLT did not suffer legal injury because it had no right to exclude others from practicing the patent.

The Federal Circuit's majority opinion prompted an interesting dissent, which ended with the following:

While I do not read any precedent as directly governing the peculiar circumstances of this case, I also do not read any as precluding co-plaintiff standing for GUCLT. I believe that, in denying all possibility for enforcing the patent, the majority opinion extends limitations on co-plaintiff standing without a reasoned basis. Accordingly, while neither GUCLT nor AHLT individually may pursue infringement litigation, I would not deprive the patent of all value. Because I would allow GUCLT and AHLT, as co-plaintiffs, standing to sue Microsoft, I respectfully dissent.

The View From IP Bloggers. Dennis Crouch of the Patently-O patent law blog has an interesting post on the case, and he gets special thanks for first reporting on the decision. For another view, you may find this post from the Patry Copyright Blog published by William Patry, Google's Senior Copyright Counsel, of interest.

Important Lessons. On his patent law blog, Dennis Crouch gives the practice pointer that he believes patent lawyers should learn from the decision: "A non-title-holder must be granted an exclusive license as well as full litigation rights in order to have standing to sue for patent infringement." That is helpful advice for patent lawyers, but I have a suggestion of my own.

  • When intellectual property such as patents, copyrights, or trademarks is involved in a bankruptcy case, get expert advice from IP counsel, in addition to bankruptcy advice. The problem may be separating exclusionary rights from the right to sue for patent infringement one day and transferring a trademark without its goodwill the next.
  • This suggestion applies when dealing with, for example, the transfer of IP in a bankruptcy case, whether by liquidation trusts, Section 363 asset sales, or something else, or assessing the risk of continuing patent infringement when purchasing IP assets.
  • As the Federal Circuit's decision shows, the interplay between IP issues and bankruptcy cases can be complex and the possible outcomes surprising. Getting expert advice can help you avoid these and other traps for the unwary.

The Best Of Both Worlds: Can A Secured Creditor Get A Section 503(b)(9) "20 Day Goods" Administrative Claim Too?

In a decision from August 17, 2007, just released for publication, the Ninth Circuit's Bankruptcy Appellate Panel (BAP) faced a previously unanswered question under Section 503(b)(9) of the Bankruptcy Code, the section enacted as part of the Bankruptcy Abuse Prevention and Consumer Protection Act of 2005 (known as BAPCPA).  Is a Section 503(b)(9) administrative claim available to secured creditors or only to unsecured creditors? You may find the BAP's answer surprising.

A Section 503(b)(9) Refresher. For those who haven't dealt with this relatively new section, here are the highlights. Section 503(b)(9) gives vendors an important right beyond the expanded reclamation claim also enacted as part of BAPCPA. Vendors are entitled to an administrative priority claim for "the value of any goods received by the debtor within 20 days before" the date a bankruptcy petition was filed "in which the goods have been sold to the debtor in the ordinary course of such debtor's business." 

  • In most cases, particularly Chapter 11 cases in which a plan of reorganization is confirmed, administrative claims are paid in full on the effective date of the plan. General unsecured claims, by contrast, often receive only cents on the dollar, and even secured creditors can be "crammed down" and forced to accept payments over a period of time. This new administrative claim is therefore a significant benefit, in effect putting vendors selling goods to a debtor in the 20 days before the bankruptcy filing on par with vendors selling goods after the bankruptcy filing. It's available even if a seller of goods fails to provide the required notice to have a post-bankruptcy reclamation claim. 
  • For a more detailed analysis of Section 503(b)(9), you may find this earlier post entitled "20 Day Goods: New Administrative Claim For Goods Sold Just Before Bankruptcy" useful, as well as a later post giving an update on a few early court decisions on the section. 
  • For more on the changes BAPCPA made to reclamation, you may want to read an earlier post entitled "Reclamation: Can A Vendor "Get The Goods" From An Insolvent Customer" and this post on some of the limitations of reclamation.

The Brown & Cole Stores Case. It was against this backdrop that the BAP analyzed the question before it in the In re Brown & Cole Stores, LLC case. Brown & Cole is a privately held grocery chain operating in Washington state. Its principal supplier and wholesaler, Associated Grocers, Incorporated (AGI), is a cooperative whose largest shareholder is Brown & Cole itself. In Brown & Cole's Chapter 11 case, AGI asserted a "20 day goods" claim of more than $6 million, and also asserted that it was a secured creditor with a pledge of AGI's own stock owned by Brown & Cole. Brown & Cole alleged a number of claims against AGI and argued that it had a right of setoff on those claims against any "20 day goods" claim.

When AGI moved for allowance of a Section 503(b)(9) claim, Brown & Cole argued that AGI was not eligible for that administrative claim because it was a secured creditor. The bankruptcy court rejected that argument and granted AGI's motion. It also denied Brown & Cole's request for a setoff of its own prepetition claims against the administrative claim, among other reasons because of what the bankruptcy court found to be Brown & Cole's inequitable conduct in ordering goods just prior to its bankruptcy filing.

The BAP's Decision. After hearing the appeal, the BAP issued its opinion and identified the first question presented as "Is a secured claim entitled to an administrative priority pursuant to section 503(b)(9)?" The opinion's introduction shows that the BAP was aware of the interest creditors would have in its decision:

This case presents us with an issue of first impression regarding new section 503(b)(9) (“§  503(b)(9)”) of the Bankruptcy Code, as amended in 2005. We expect that the issue is of great importance to many sellers of goods to troubled companies. The new provision gives expense-of-administration priority (“administrative priority”) to a claim for the value of goods received by a debtor within 20 days before the commencement of the case and sold in the ordinary course of business (“twenty-day sales”). The bankruptcy court granted administrative priority to a claim that may also be secured and denied the debtor’s claim of setoff. We AFFIRM the grant of administrative priority; we REVERSE the denial of setoff.

(Footnotes omitted.)

Secured Creditors Are Entitled To Section 503(b)(9) Claims. In reaching its holding, the BAP majority rejected Brown & Cole's primary argument that the Court should interpret Section 503(b)(9) as applying only to unsecured claims. Brown & Cole argued that at the same time as it added Section 503(b)(9), BAPCPA amended another subsection of Section 503 dealing with tax claims, specifically Section 503(b)(1)(B)(i), to clarify that it was available to "secured or unsecured" creditors.  In contrast, Congress did not include the words "secured claim" in Section 503(b)(9). This difference, Brown & Cole argued, should lead the BAP to hold that the "20 day goods" administrative claim is not available to secured creditors. The BAP's response was clear:

We reject that invitation. The provision is not ambiguous; as such, we must enforce it according to its terms and should not inquire beyond its plain language. Lamie, 540 U.S. at 534. Apart from finding no ambiguity in § 503(b)(9), we note that Congress also declined to put the word  “unsecured” into the same statute. The obvious conclusion, therefore, is that all claims arising  from twenty-day sales are entitled to administrative priority.

(Footnote omitted). The BAP majority also rejected a policy argument advanced by Brown & Cole (B&C), and adopted by Judge Alan Jaroslovsky in his dissent:

We can do nothing about B&C’s contention that giving priority to a secured creditor may be inequitable to other creditors. First, it is up to Congress to decide which creditors have leverage and which do not. More importantly, if AGI’s twenty-day sales claim is fully secured, then payment of it by B&C will free the value of the security for that claim for the benefit of other  creditors. If AGI’s claim proves to be undersecured or unsecured, then to deny administrative priority would be to ignore the statute, something we cannot do.

In a footnoted response to the dissenting opinion, Judge Dennis Montali, writing for himself and Judge Randall L. Dunn, expanded on the point:

The dissent is concerned that we are ignoring bankruptcy policy that permits a Chapter 11 debtor to “cramdown” a secured claim in full over time. Congress gave tremendous leverage to a twenty-day sales claimant such as AGI by permitting it to demand full payment as of confirmation, and in doing so, perhaps dramatically affecting the outcome of the case. The fact that the claim is also secured represents less leverage (albeit more than held by non-priority general unsecured claims) than having administrative priority. It is not our place to reallocate that leverage. In any event, if the dissent’s view were the law, the holder of a twenty-day sales claim could simply waive its security, obtain administrative priority, and have equally powerful influence over the outcome of the case.

Setoff May Be Proper. The BAP (the dissent joined in this part of the majority opinion) also reversed the denial of Brown & Cole's setoff request, holding that although prepetition unsecured claims (the kind Brown & Cole asserted against AGI) cannot generally be set off against administrative claims because of a lack of mutuality, here the administrative claim itself arose prepetition, specifically in the 20 days before the bankruptcy filing. On the finding of inequitable conduct in ordering goods and receiving just prior to bankruptcy, the BAP held that there was insufficient evidence of inequitable conduct and that a "debtor contemplating reorganization is under no legal obligation to inform suppliers that it is contemplating a bankruptcy filing." The BAP reversed and remanded that issue to the bankruptcy court.

A Dissenting Voice. Judge Jaroslovsky dissented from what he described as the majority's "overly-sterile conclusion that a fully secured creditor can also have rights under § 503(b)(9)," stating that "[n]ot only is my statutory analysis different, but I see compelling policy reasons for a different result." He found that the plain language of Section 503(b)(9) did not resolve the question of whether secured creditors could be entitled to the administrative priority in light of the change made to Section 503(b)(1)(B)(i). He then turned to the policy issues:

Moreover, some fundamental policy considerations are at stake in this case. While allowing a priority claim to a secured creditor may not have a big impact in most Chapter 7 cases, it can  make a huge difference in a Chapter 11 case like this one. If AGI’s $6 million claim is entitled to priority status, § 1129(a)(9)(A) requires that it must be paid in full in cash upon confirmation. If  it is treated as a secured claim, it still must be paid in full but is subject to cramdown pursuant to § 1129(b)(2)(A). If we incorporate by implication the “secured or unsecured” language into § 503(b)(9), we may be in effect giving a secured creditor veto power over a plan of reorganization when § 1129(b)(2)(A) and sound bankruptcy policy dictate that a secured creditor can be forced  to accept a plan which is fair and equitable to it, honors its secured status and pays its secured claim in full over time.

I would weave the new § 503(b)(9) into the tapestry of American bankruptcy law, preserving the clear intent of Congress to protect recent suppliers of goods to debtors without unraveling other provisions of the Code meant to facilitate reorganization. I prefer this result to the crazy quilt patched together by my brethren.

In his footnote to the prior paragraph, Judge Jaroslovsky stated: "Specifically, I would hold that a creditor would not be entitled to priority status for its twenty-day sales claim to the extent the claim is indubitably secured, applying any security first to claims other than the twenty-day sales claim. I note that AGI might well end up with an allowed priority twenty-day sales claim under this rule."

More Leverage For Secured Vendors. As both the majority and dissent discussed, a secured creditor who has the benefit of a Section 503(b)(9) administrative claim will have considerable leverage in getting paid in full upon confirmation of a Chapter 11 plan. Most secured creditors lend money instead of supplying goods, but a number of vendors do hold collateral for their claims. Even though BAP decisions (in contrast to Court of Appeals decisions) generally are not binding precedent, other courts may find this decision persuasive. If followed widely, secured creditors entitled to assert a Section 503(b)(9) claim will have a noticeable advantage in getting paid. In addition, as the dissent noted, this decision may also make it more difficult for debtors to confirm Chapter 11 plans unless they have the cash to pay all "20 day goods" administrative claims upon their exit from bankruptcy.

S&P Warns A Big Increase In Debt Defaults Is Coming

In an article entitled "Defaults wave to hit corporate US," the Financial Times reports that Standard & Poor's is predicting that $35 billion in corporate debt will go into default by the end of 2008. This is similar to the view taken by Moody's, reported in a recent post.

According to the Financial Times, S&P believes that the slowing economy, together with liquidity issues caused by credit market problems, puts approximately 75 issuers of junk debt at a high risk of default. These companies are primarily in the media, healthcare, and consumer products industries. Not surprisingly, S&P believes that the default rate could go up significantly if the economy were to decline more than currently predicted.

Struggling companies that took on substantial debt during the recent favorable credit environment “are highly reliant on financial market access to support operational cash needs, but the plentiful liquidity for high-yield borrowers is almost surely a thing of the past,” according to S&P.

Of course, debt defaults frequently lead to Chapter 11 bankruptcy filings. With S&P joining Moody's in predicting a rise in defaults, the ride could get bumpy from here.

A UK Perspective On The Turmoil In The Credit Markets

On his Insolvency BlogChris Laughton, a recovery and insolvency partner at the UK's Mercer & Hole firm of chartered accountants, gives a UK and European perspective on the recent gyrations in the credit markets. His new post is entitled "The boom-bust cycle: where are we now?" and it chronicles the progression of the credit crunch from the United States to the UK and beyond. 

After providing links to a number of recent articles from the UK press on the subject, Chris sums up his views:

So what does all this mean? Yes the capital markets are in turmoil, banks are lending much more cautiously and some high risk investment vehicles are failing, but essentially this is only a liquidity problem. Its effect though is that stressed businesses will no longer be able to borrow their way out of trouble as they have become hard-wired to do over the last 3 years.

Crisis cash management and operational and corporate restructuring will come back into vogue as refinancing becomes passé. Only if stressed businesses fail to seek appropriate and timely assistance will the business insolvency statistics really start to rise.

His informative post, and the UK articles highlighted, underscores the interconnected nature of today's global credit markets. It makes for interesting reading -- wherever you are.

Are "Termination On Bankruptcy" Contract Clauses Enforceable?

Practically every contract has a provision that makes the bankruptcy or insolvency of one contracting party a trigger for the other party to terminate the contract. These are standard fare and rarely negotiated unless they also include a provision for the reversion back of ownership of property, often intellectual property, upon bankruptcy or insolvency. This post takes a look at these provisions and examines whether they are enforceable.

The Typical Ipso Facto Clause. Termination on bankruptcy provisions are often known as ipso facto clauses (the Latin phrase meaning "by the fact itself") because the language provides that the fact of bankruptcy itself is enough to trigger the termination of the agreement. Here's a common provision:

This Agreement shall terminate, without notice, (i) upon the institution by or against either party of insolvency, receivership or bankruptcy proceedings or any other proceedings for the settlement of either party's debts, (ii) upon either party making an assignment for the benefit of creditors, or (iii) upon either party's dissolution or ceasing to do business.

Variants of this language are found in many types of contracts, including licenses, leases, and development agreements. Some provide that termination is automatic and others first require notice. Termination triggers may include:

  • Filing a voluntary bankruptcy;
  • Having an involuntary bankruptcy filed against a party;
  • Becoming insolvent (frequently the term is left undefined in the contract);
  • Admitting in writing that the party is insolvent;
  • Making a general assignment for the benefit of creditors (a liquidation alternative recognized under the laws of many states); or
  • Tripping a financial condition covenant.

The bankruptcy or insolvency of either party is frequently a termination trigger. However, when the financial condition of only one contracting party is in doubt, the more financially stable party may insist on a one-sided provision allowing it to get out of the agreement upon the weaker party's insolvency or bankruptcy. 

Notso Fasto: The Bankruptcy Code Stops The Clause In Its Tracks. These termination provisions may be common, but are they enforceable? The short answer, which may be surprising to some, is generally "no." Two key provisions of the Bankruptcy Code lead to this result. First, Section 541(c) of the Bankruptcy Code provides that an interest of the debtor (the bankrupt company or person) in property becomes "property of the estate," meaning that the debtor does not lose the property or contract right, despite a provision in an agreement:

that is conditioned on the insolvency or financial condition of the debtor, on the commencement of a case under this title, or on the appointment of or taking possession by a trustee in a case under this title or a custodian before such commencement, and that effects or gives an option to effect a forfeiture, modification, or termination of the debtor’s interest in property.

11 U.S.C. §541(c). Translated from bankruptcy-ese, this statute means that a clause that terminates a contract because of the "insolvency" or "financial condition" of the debtor, or due to the filing of a bankruptcy case, will be unenforceable once a bankruptcy case has been filed.

A second Bankruptcy Code provision, Section 365(e)(1), governs ipso facto clauses in executory contracts, which are agreements under which both sides still have important performance remaining (discussed in more detail in this earlier post). Section 365(e)(1) provides:

Notwithstanding a provision in an executory contract or unexpired lease, or in applicable law, an executory contract or unexpired lease of the debtor may not be terminated or modified, and any right or obligation under such contract or lease may not be terminated or modified, at any time after the commencement of the case solely because of a provision in such contract or lease that is conditioned on—

(A) the insolvency or financial condition of the debtor at any time before the closing of the case;
(B) the commencement of a case under this title; or
(C) the appointment of or taking possession by a trustee in a case under this title or a custodian before such commencement.
11 U.S.C. §365(e)(1). This statute generally makes ipso facto provisions in executory contracts and leases unenforceable.

Why Put Ipso Facto Clauses In Contracts In The First Place? If these termination provisions are generally unenforceable, why do parties seem to include them in almost every contract? There are three main reasons.

Force Of Habit. One reason is that under the old Bankruptcy Act of 1898, replaced by the Bankruptcy Code in 1979, these ipso facto clauses were enforceable. Over the years, lawyers and businesses got used to including them in their contract forms and they have continued to write them into many agreements. Since it's always possible that the Bankruptcy Code could be changed to reinstate the old rule, lawyers often see little reason to take them out.

It Takes An Actual Bankruptcy. Another and perhaps more important reason is that the rule applies only if a bankruptcy is actually filed. If an ipso facto provision provides that the agreement terminates upon a party's insolvency, and no bankruptcy case is ever filed, it's possible that the solvent party could terminate the agreement using the ipso facto provision. But be forewarned: if a bankruptcy case is later filed, an insolvency-based termination made before the bankruptcy filing may not be enforced in the bankruptcy case. This means that the debtor may still have a chance to retain the rights under the contract, including assuming or assigning an executory contract during the bankruptcy case.

A Limited Exception In Bankruptcy. A third reason is that an important, albeit limited, exception to the rule applies even after a bankruptcy is filed. The exception stems less from the ipso facto clause itself and more from the rules governing assumption of certain types of executory contracts, including intellectual property licenses (at least in some circuits).

  • Section 365(e)(2) of the Bankruptcy Code, in conjunction with Section 365(c)(1), provides that an ipso facto clause can be enforceable if the debtor or trustee is not permitted by "applicable law" to assume or assign the executory contract. Simply put, if applicable law provides that an IP license or another executory contract cannot be assumed by the debtor or trustee without the other party's consent, then the non-debtor contracting party can force rejection of the license or seek relief from the automatic stay to terminate the agreement based on the ipso facto clause.
  • Although an analysis of the law governing assumption and assignment of IP licenses and related agreements is beyond the scope of this post, you can find a detailed discussion in an earlier one entitled "Assumption of IP Licenses In Bankruptcy: Are Recent Cases Tilting Toward Debtors?

A Word To The Wise. Parties include "termination on bankruptcy" provisions in contracts all the time, despite the general rule making them unenforceable in bankruptcy. Unfortunately, some do so without realizing that the provision may be ineffective, and that can lead to trouble. If enforcing an ipso facto clause is important to one of your agreements, especially if you also seek the highly problematic reversion of intellectual property or other rights upon such a termination, be sure to get specific legal advice on your situation, including whether alternative approaches may exist to help achieve your objectives.

Is The Default Rate On High-Yield Debt About To Double?

According to Moody's, the credit rating and investor service firm, the default rate on high-yield or junk bond debt is likely to increase substantially from the current level of 1.4%. Moody's predicts that the default rate will rise to 4.1% by August 2008 and then to 5.1% by August 2009. 

  • As reported by Credit, Moody's director of corporate default research believes that "higher spreads and diminished liquidity" have increased the default risk for distressed issuers.
  • Unless the U.S. economy falls into a recession, however, the default rate is predicted to stay below its long-term average of 5.0%, at least until 2009. Any real downturn in the economy could push the default rate higher.

The New York Times DealBook Blog has a similar story, pointing out that Moody's predicted in another report that the U.S. industries likely to have the highest default rate are packaging, construction, consumer durables, and automotive. Also, companies that need new financing will be more at risk than firms that already obtained financing on the favorable terms available in the credit markets until recently.

As The DealBook Blog points out, a rising default rate will likely lead to an increase in Chapter 11 bankruptcy filings. Stay tuned. 

Another Court Follows The Footstar Decision On Assumption Of IP Licenses In Bankruptcy

Intellectual property licenses continue to be significant to companies across a wide range of industries. This fact makes their treatment in business bankruptcy cases a topic of keen interest. 

Can A Debtor Licensee Retain IP License Rights? When the debtor in possession is a licensee under a patent, copyright, or trademark license, a key question arises: Can the license be assumed (bankruptcy-speak for kept) or will the bankruptcy filing put the licensor in a position to force rejection of the license -- resulting in the ultimate termination of the debtor's right to use the licensed IP?  A new case, discussed below, recently sided with the debtor in possession.

One Statute, Three Tests. This issue has led to a significant split of authority among bankruptcy courts and courts of appeal around the country, stemming from different interpretations of the language in Section 365(c)(1) of the Bankruptcy Code. That section provides as follows:

(c) The trustee may not assume or assign any executory contract or unexpired lease of the debtor, whether or not such contract or lease prohibits or restricts assignment of rights or delegation of duties, if—

(1)(A) applicable law excuses a party, other than the debtor, to such contract or lease from accepting performance from or rendering performance to an entity other than the debtor or the debtor in possession, whether or not such contract or lease prohibits or restricts assignment of rights or delegation of duties; and

(B) such party does not consent to such assumption or assignment.

Some courts, including the U.S. Court of Appeals for the Ninth Circuit, have sided with the licensor and interpret Section 365(c)(1) to prohibit both assignment and assumption. Other courts, including the First Circuit, have permitted such licenses to be assumed.

  • Despite the split, most courts agree that Section 365(c)(1) prohibits assignment of executory contracts without the non-debtor contracting party's consent if "applicable law" requires such consent because that would require the non-debtor party to accept performance from a new party. 
  • A number of courts have held that when the "applicable law" is federal patent, copyright, or trademark law, such consent is required.
  • Courts diverge, however, on whether the statute's language should be read to prohibit a debtor in possession from assuming such executory contracts or only from assigning them.

Rather than cover that ground here, if this topic is new to you I suggest reading an earlier post entitled "Assumption Of Intellectual Property Licenses In Bankruptcy: Are Recent Cases Tilting Toward Debtors?" It discusses in detail how different courts have interpreted Section 365(c)(1), leading to the licensor-favorable "hypothetical test," the debtor-favorable "actual test," and the newer, debtor-favorable Footstar analysis. 

A Word On Footstar. Before moving on to the new decision, a brief word about the Footstar case may be helpful. In In re Footstar, Inc,, 323 B.R. 566 (Bankr. S.D.N.Y. 2005), Judge Adlai Hardin of the U.S. Bankruptcy Court for the Southern District of New York took a somewhat different approach in analyzing the statute. He concluded that Section 365(c)(1)'s use of the word "trustee" does not (as other courts had taken for granted) include the debtor or debtor in possession when assumption is sought because assumption does not require the non-debtor party to accept performance from a new party other than the debtor or debtor in possession. A trustee is a new party and the statute logically provides that a trustee may not "assume or assign" such an executory contract.

A Common Scenario. How does this issue come up in Chapter 11 cases? Well, here's a typical situation. The debtor is the licensee under a prepetition patent license. The patent licensor files a motion to compel the debtor in possession to reject the patent license agreement or alternatively to have the automatic stay lifted to permit the licensor to cancel the agreement. The licensor argues that under the "hypothetical test" interpretation of Section 365(c)(1), the debtor in possession cannot assign the license and, as a result, cannot assume the license either. With neither option open, the licensor argues, the debtor in possession should be compelled to reject the license.

The Aerobox Decision. This was the situation that recently played out in the In re Aerobox Composite Structures, LLC Chapter 11 bankruptcy case. Ruling on just such a motion by a patent licensor, on July 27, 2007, Judge Mark B. McFeeley of the U.S. Bankruptcy Court for the District of New Mexico issued an 11-page decision holding that the actual test, and Judge Hardin's analysis in Footstar, was the correct interpretation of Section 365(c)(1). As such, he denied the licensor's motion and held that the debtor in possession was not barred by Section 365(c)(1) of the Bankruptcy Code from assuming the prepetition patent license at issue in that case. The Bankruptcy Court summed up its holding as follows:

Similarly, the bankruptcy court in Footstar reasons that it makes perfect sense for the statute, which uses the term, “trustee,” to prohibit the trustee from assuming or assigning a contract, because the trustee is an “entity other than the debtor in possession” but it makes no sense to read “trustee” to mean “debtor in possession.” Footstar, 323 B.R. at 573. Doing so

would render the provision a virtual oxymoron, since mere assumption [by the debtor in possession] (without assignment) would not compel the counterparty to accept performance from or render it to “an entity other than” the debtor.

Id.

This Court agrees.

Thus, where the debtor-in-possession seeks to assume, or, as is the situation in the instant case, where the debtor-in-possession has neither sought to assume nor reject the executory contract but simply continues to operate post-petition under its terms, 11 U.S.C. § 365(c)(1) does not prohibit assumption of the contract by the debtor-in-possession and cannot operate to allow the non-debtor party to the executory contract to compel the Debtor to reject the contract. In reaching this conclusion, the Court finds that the “actual test” articulated in Cambridge Biotech, and the reasoning of the court in Footstar, is the better approach to § 365(c)(1) when determining whether a debtor-in-possession is precluded from assuming an executory contract.

Venue Still Matters. The decision is interesting because it represents another bankruptcy court, this time outside of the Southern District of New York, endorsing the analysis in the Footstar decision. That said, Judge McFeeley wrote on something of a clean slate because the Tenth Circuit has not yet taken a view on whether the hypothetical test, the actual test, or the Footstar analysis controls. As this circuit-by-circuit chart of Section 365(c)(1) decisions shows (last updated in March 2007), many other circuits have staked out a position on the issue. Absent a Supreme Court decision or new legislation resolving the circuit split, where a debtor files bankruptcy will continue to make a big difference in the relative rights of licensors and debtors over intellectual property licenses in Chapter 11 cases.

Northern District Of California Bankruptcy Court Proposes Amendments To Local Rules

As bankruptcy lawyers know, complying with local rules is an essential part of appearing before a particular court. In response to the changes made by the Bankruptcy Abuse Prevention and Consumer Protection Act of 2005 (known as BAPCPA), as well as the implementation of the electronic case filing system (called ECF), the Bankruptcy Judges for the Northern District of California have proposed a set of amendments to the Court's local bankruptcy rules.

  • You can find a clean version and a redline version of the proposed amended local rules by clicking on the appropriate link in this sentence.
  • Attorneys or others wishing to comment on the local rules may do so by going to this website form or by sending those comments to the address indicated on that page. The deadline is September 27, 2007.

Among the amendments affecting Chapter 11 corporate bankruptcy cases are those governing  replacement of a "responsible individual" for a Chapter 11 debtor or debtor in possession, entry of a final decree closing a case, and the general electronic case filing procedures. A number of other revisions are aimed at consumer bankruptcy cases.

Although the changes do not appear to be dramatic, attorneys who practice before the Northern District of California, and businesses with cases or adversary proceedings pending in that court, will want to stay up to date on these local rule amendments.

Lack Of Recognition: New Case Shows That Chapter 15 International Bankruptcy Protection Isn't Automatic

On August 30, 2007, in twin decisions in recent cases involving two Bear Stearns hedge funds (available here and here), Judge Burton R. Lifland of the U.S. Bankruptcy Court for the Southern District of New York made clear that recognizing a foreign insolvency proceeding in a Chapter 15 cross-border bankruptcy case is not to be "rubber stamped by the courts."  The decision is of particular interest because Judge Lifland was one of the authors of Chapter 15 and the Model Law on Cross-Border Insolvency on which it is based.

The Bankruptcy Court's Ruling. In a nutshell, the Bankruptcy Court held that although the two hedge funds were organized under the laws of the Cayman Islands, their business operations were in New York and not in the Cayman Islands. As such, the Bankruptcy Court would not recognize the Cayman Islands insolvency proceeding as either a "foreign main proceeding" or a "foreign nonmain proceeding." If you're unfamiliar with this terminology, keep reading for an overview of Chapter 15 and more details on the decision.

A Chapter 15 Refresher. On October 17, 2005, as part of the Bankruptcy Abuse Prevention and Consumer Protection Act (known as BAPCPA), a new Chapter 15 of the Bankruptcy Code went into effect governing ancillary and other cross-border cases. (For those already familiar with ancillary proceedings, Section 304 of the Bankruptcy Code, which previously governed those proceedings, was repealed although many of its concepts were retained in Chapter 15.)

  • The main purpose of enacting Chapter 15 was to incorporate the Model Law on Cross-Border Insolvency as part of the Bankruptcy Code. 11 U.S.C. § 1501(a). My partner Adam Rogoff, who has significant experience with international insolvency matters, has prepared a very helpful chart comparing Chapter 15 and the Model Law's provisions.
  • Chapter 15 is used principally by representatives of, or creditors in, foreign insolvency proceedings to obtain assistance in the United States, by a debtor or others seeking to obtain assistance in a foreign country regarding a bankruptcy case in the United States, or when both a foreign proceeding and a bankruptcy case in the United States are pending with respect to the same debtor. 11 U.S.C. § 1501(b). 

Several important terms involving the different types of foreign insolvency proceedings are key to understanding the scope of Chapter 15 and Judge Lifland's ruling. 

  • A “foreign proceeding” means “a collective judicial or administrative proceeding in a foreign country, including an interim proceeding, under a law relating to insolvency or adjustment of debts in which proceeding the assets and affairs of the debtor are subject to control or supervision by a foreign court, for the purpose of reorganization or liquidation.” 11 U.S.C. § 101(23). 
  • For purposes of Chapter 15, “debtor” means “an entity that is the subject of a foreign proceeding.” 11 U.S.C. § 1502(1). 
  • A "foreign main proceeding" means a foreign proceeding pending in the country where the debtor has the center of its main interests which, in the absence of contrary evidence, is presumed to be the location of the debtor’s registered office. 11 U.S.C. §§ 1502(4) and 1516(c). 
  • A "foreign nonmain proceeding" means a foreign proceeding, other than a foreign main proceeding, pending in a country in which the debtor has an “establishment,” defined as a place of operations where the debtor carries out a nontransitory economic activity. 11 U.S.C. §§ 1502(2) and (4). 

Chapter 15’s basic procedure is straightforward. A case is commenced when a foreign representative, often a liquidator or provisional liquidator, files a petition for recognition of a foreign proceeding. 11 U.S.C. §§ 1504 and 1515(a). If properly filed, the bankruptcy court is entitled to presume that the facts stated in the petition are correct and the attached documents are authentic. 11 U.S.C. §§ 1516(a) and (b). As long as recognition would not be manifestly contrary to the public policy of the United States, the court must enter an order recognizing the foreign proceeding (here's an example order). 11 U.S.C. §§ 1506 and 1517(a). 

Evidence Trumps Presumptions. With all this in mind, Judge Lifland held that the Cayman Islands proceeding could not be considered either a "foreign main" or a "foreign nonmain" proceeding. Despite Chapter 15's presumption that the registered office or place of incorporation, here the Cayman Islands, would be a debtor's "center of main interests" (known in the trade as the "COMI"), other evidence showed that the actual center of their activity was in New York. This, Judge Lifland held, precluded recognition of the Cayman Island proceeding as a foreign main proceeding. Also, without a true business presence there, the Bankruptcy Court could not conclude that the Cayman Islands was a place where the funds had "nontransitory economic activity," precluding foreign nonmain recognition. Judge Lifland held that even in the absence of objection, Chapter 15 places the burden of proof on these issues on the foreign representatives. Here, the facts in the petition and related papers showed that New York, and not the Cayman Islands, was the COMI for the funds.

Is Non-Recognition The End Of The Road? One of the most interesting aspects of Judge Lifland's decision is the door he left open to the foreign representatives. Although the two hedge funds could not get protection under Chapter 15 of the Bankruptcy Code based on their filing in the Cayman Islands, they have the option of filing an involuntary Chapter 7 or Chapter 11 bankruptcy case in the United States.

  • Although Section 304 of the Bankruptcy Code, the old "ancillary proceedings" section, was repealed when Chapter 15 was enacted, Section 303 -- and the ability of foreign representatives to file an involuntary Chapter 7 or Chapter 11 bankruptcy case -- was not repealed.
  • Judge Lifland noted that Section 303(b)(4) of the Bankruptcy Code allows a foreign representative, such as the provisional liquidators appointed by the Cayman Islands court, to file an involuntary bankruptcy petition against the hedge funds and obtain bankruptcy protection in this manner.

Additional Reading In The Blogs. For more on the case, be sure to read Jordan Bublick's informative post on his Miami Florida Bankruptcy Law blog and Chris Laughton's commentary on his Insolvency Blog out of the UK. For the hedge fund industry's perspective, you may find this post on the Hedgefunds Weblog of interest.

A Few Observations. With many offshore investment funds operating in the United States, Chapter 15 filings may become even more commonplace in the future, especially if we continue to encounter the kind of turbulence recently seen in the financial markets. Although the enactment of Chapter 15 made it easier for foreign representatives to get bankruptcy protection in the United States, the process is not automatic. As Judge Lifland's decision shows, bankruptcy courts will scrutinize the facts -- even in essentially unopposed cases -- before agreeing to formally recognize a foreign proceeding. Without such recognition, foreign representatives will have to fall back on the more cumbersome involuntary bankruptcy process or find themselves with no U.S. bankruptcy protection at all.

Delaware Supreme Court Issues Long-Awaited Decision In Deepening Insolvency Case

On August 14, 2007, the Delaware Supreme Court, sitting en Banc and following oral argument, issued its decision in the Trenwick America Litigation Trust v. Billet deepening insolvency case. Rather than write its own opinion, the Delaware Supreme Court released a two-page order affirming Vice Chancellor Strine's August 10, 2006 Chancery Court decision "on the basis of and for the reasons assigned by" the Chancery Court in its opinion. A copy of the Chancery Court opinion is available here

The End Of Deepening Insolvency In Delaware. By adopting the basis and reasoning of the lower court's opinion, the Delaware Supreme Court ratified Vice Chancellor Strine's decision that there is no cause of action for deepening insolvency under Delaware law. Apparently concluding that no opinion of its own was necessary given the Chancery Court's clear opinion below, the Delaware Supreme Court has put to rest the cause of action for deepening insolvency under Delaware law. Prior to the lower court's decision in Trenwick, some bankruptcy and other federal courts had incorrectly predicted that Delaware would recognize this cause of action.

A Second Look At Vice Chancellor Strine's Trenwick Opinion. Now that the Delaware Supreme Court has affirmed the Chancery Court's decision and its reasons, the lower court's opinion merits further consideration. As discussed in this August 2006 post on the Chancery Court's decision, Vice Chancellor Strine held, in unequivocal terms, that there is no cause of action for deepening insolvency under Delaware law. To give context to the opinion's legal analysis, some of its more important sections are quoted below at length:

Delaware law does not recognize this catchy term as a cause of action, because catchy though the term may be, it does not express a coherent concept. Even when a firm is insolvent, its directors may, in the appropriate exercise of their business judgment, take action that might, if it does not pan out, result in the firm being painted in a deeper hue of red. The fact that the residual claimants of the firm at that time are creditors does not mean that the directors cannot choose to continue the firm’s operations in the hope that they can expand the inadequate pie such that the firm’s creditors get a greater recovery. By doing so, the directors do not become a guarantor of success.  Put simply, under Delaware law, 'deepening insolvency' is no more of a cause of action when a firm is insolvent than a cause of action for 'shallowing profitability' would be when a firm is solvent. Existing equitable causes of action for breach of fiduciary duty, and existing legal causes of action for fraud, fraudulent conveyance, and breach of contract are the appropriate means by which to challenge the actions of boards of insolvent corporations.

Refusal to embrace deepening insolvency as a cause of action is required by settled principles of Delaware law. So, too, is a refusal to extend to creditors a solicitude not given to equityholders. Creditors are better placed than equityholders and other corporate constituencies (think employees) to protect themselves against the risk of firm failure.

The incantation of the word insolvency, or even more amorphously, the words zone of insolvency should not declare open season on corporate fiduciaries. Directors are expected to seek profit for stockholders, even at risk of failure.  With the prospect of profit often comes the potential for defeat.

The general rule embraced by Delaware is the sound one.  So long as directors are respectful of the corporation’s obligation to honor the legal rights of its creditors, they should be free to pursue in good faith profit for the corporation’s equityholders.  Even when the firm is insolvent, directors are free to pursue value maximizing strategies, while recognizing that the firm’s creditors have become its residual claimants and the advancement of their best interests has become the firm’s principal objective.

Delaware law imposes no absolute obligation on the board of a company that is unable to pay its bills to cease operations and to liquidate. Even when the company is insolvent, the board may pursue, in good faith, strategies to maximize the value of the firm. As a thoughtful federal decision recognizes, Chapter 11 of the Bankruptcy Code expresses a societal recognition that an insolvent corporation’s creditors (and society as a whole) may benefit if the corporation continues to conduct operations in the hope of turning things around.

If the board of an insolvent corporation, acting with due diligence and good faith, pursues a business strategy that it believes will increase the corporation’s value, but that also involves the incurrence of additional debt, it does not become a guarantor of that strategy’s success. That the strategy results in continued insolvency and an even more insolvent entity does not in itself give rise to a cause of action. Rather, in such a scenario the directors are protected by the business judgment rule. To conclude otherwise would fundamentally transform Delaware law.

The rejection of an independent cause of action for deepening insolvency does not absolve directors of insolvent corporations of responsibility.  Rather, it remits plaintiffs to the contents of their traditional toolkit, which contains, among other things, causes of action for breach of fiduciary duty and for fraud.  The contours of these causes of action have been carefully shaped by generations of experience, in order to balance the societal interests in protecting investors and creditors against exploitation by directors and in providing directors with sufficient insulation so that they can seek to create wealth through the good faith pursuit of business strategies that involve a risk of failure.  If a plaintiff cannot state a claim that the directors of an insolvent corporation acted disloyally or without due care in implementing a business strategy, it may not cure that deficiency simply by alleging that the corporation became more insolvent as a result of the failed strategy.

Moreover, the fact of insolvency does not render the concept of “deepening insolvency” a more logical one than the concept of “shallowing profitability.”  That is, the mere fact that a business in the red gets redder when a business decision goes wrong and a business in the black gets paler does not explain why the law should recognize an independent cause of action based on the decline in enterprise value in the crimson setting and not in the darker one.  If in either setting the directors remain responsible to exercise their business judgment considering the company’s business context, then the appropriate tool to examine the conduct of the directors is the traditional fiduciary duty ruler.  No doubt the fact of insolvency might weigh heavily in a court’s analysis of, for example, whether the board acted with fidelity and care in deciding to undertake more debt to continue the company’s operations, but that is the proper role of insolvency, to act as an important contextual fact in the fiduciary duty metric. In that context, our law already requires the directors of an insolvent corporation to consider, as fiduciaries, the interests of the corporation’s creditors who, by definition, are owed more than the corporation has the wallet to repay.

In so ruling, I reach a result consistent with a growing body of federal jurisprudence, which has recognized that those federal courts that became infatuated with the concept, did not look closely enough at the object of their ardor.  Among the earlier federal decisions embracing the notion – by way of a hopeful prediction of state law – that deepening insolvency should be recognized as a cause of action admittedly were three decisions from within the federal Circuit of which Delaware is a part.  None of those decisions explains the rationale for concluding that deepening insolvency should be recognized as a cause of action or how such recognition would be consistent with traditional concepts of fiduciary responsibility.

The Delaware Supreme Court's adoption of the basis and reasoning of the Chancery Court's strongly-worded opinion represents the end of the road for the deepening insolvency cause of action under Delaware law.

Hints In The Gheewalla Decision? Interestingly, in its brief order the Delaware Supreme Court dropped a footnote giving not only the citation for the Chancery Court's decision, Trenwick America Litig, Trust v. Ernst & Young, L.L.P., 906 A.2d 168 (Del. Ch. 2006), but also an intriguing comment: "Accord North American Catholic Educational Programming Foundation, Inc. v. Gheewalla, 2007 WL 1453705 (Del. Supr. 2007)." This was a reference to its own decision of May 18, 2007 (opinion available here) holding that creditors cannot bring a direct cause of action for breach of fiduciary duty against directors of corporations that are insolvent or in the zone of insolvency.

  • As discussed in an earlier post on the Gheewalla decision, the Delaware Supreme Court opinion cited the lower court decision in Trenwick favorably, as well as the earlier Chancery Court decision in Production Resources (opinion available here), discussed in another earlier post
  • The "Accord" reference in its Trenwick order suggests that the Delaware Supreme Court believed that its May 2007 Gheewalla decision foreshadowed this week's affirmance of the Chancery Court's Trenwick decision and reasoning.

More Clarity For Directors. With the adoption of the Chancery Court's opinion in Trenwick, and its own opinion in Gheewalla, the Delaware Supreme Court has effectively endorsed the trend in recent Chancery Court decisions to limit certain efforts to expand the liability of directors of insolvent or nearly insolvent corporations. Nearly sixteen years have passed since the Chancery Court's decision in Credit Lyonnais Bank Nederland, N.V. v. Pathe Communications Corp., 1991 WL 277613 (Del. Ch. 1991), introduced us to the terms "vicinity of insolvency" and "zone of insolvency." Although the Delaware Supreme Court has left some questions open, these new decisions help provide meaningful guidance on how directors of financially troubled Delaware corporations should discharge their fiduciary duties.  

Have Section 363 Sale Orders Gone Too Far?

Concerned about the broad-reaching and complex forms of Section 363 asset orders being submitted for approval, this past week the U.S. Bankruptcy Court for the Northern District of California issued a set of "Guidelines re Sale Orders" as well as a form of "Model Sale Order." (Each document is available by clicking on its respective title in the prior sentence.) The Bankruptcy Court's opening discussion of the Guidelines expresses its reasons for issuing them now:

The bankruptcy judges of the Northern District of California have become increasingly concerned about the orders they are being asked to sign on motions to approve sales of property of the estate under section 363(b) and 363(f).  Many of the proposed orders submitted:  (a) seek relief beyond the scope of the motion before the court; (b) seek to affect parties not before the court; (c) seek advisory rulings where there is no case or controversy; (d) include findings of fact that should be stated orally or in a separate memorandum; and (e) are so wordy and complex that the court has difficulty determining their meaning. 

The crafting of orders is a judicial function. Accordingly, the judges have approved a model order for motions seeking authority to sell property of the estate and motions to sell such property free and clear of liens.  The following guidelines are intended to explain how to use the model order, and what provisions the court will and will not generally approve as additions to the model order or where the parties draft their own order.  These guidelines do not apply to any separate orders approving bidding procedures, break-up fees or other matters related to the sale of property.  In addition, these guidelines do not apply in Chapter 13 cases.

The model order is not mandatory, but the judges will use the model order on their own motion where parties vary from these guidelines without sufficient cause and explanation. 

In the event that a party submits a sale order that deviates from these guidelines, the party shall, unless otherwise instructed by the court, submit a declaration to the court in which the party identifies the provisions that vary from these guidelines and sets forth the justification therefore.

(Emphasis in original.) Many bankruptcy lawyers who practice regularly in the Northern District of California, with divisions in San Francisco, San Jose, Oakland, and Santa Rosa (and courthouses in Eureka and Salinas), have already understood the prevailing view of the bankruptcy judges on these issues. However, the new guidelines help clarify matters for everyone facing these issues in the Northern District of California. 

The Section 363 Sale. As a reminder, a bankruptcy asset sale often happens in the first few weeks or months of a Chapter 11 case, rather than as part of a plan of reorganization. Frequently this will involve a sale of all or substantially all of a debtor's business as a going concern. The sale is generally referred to as a "Section 363 sale" because Section 363 is the key Bankruptcy Code section that governs a debtor's sale of assets in bankruptcy. The debtor must seek bankruptcy court approval of a sale that is not in the ordinary course of business and of any effort to transfer executory contracts, intellectual property licenses, or commercial real estate leases to the buyer.

The Sale Order. For a buyer of assets in a Section 363 bankruptcy sale, a big question is what type of factual findings and legal rulings will the bankruptcy court include -- or refuse to include -- in the order approving the sale. Buyers typically desire that the sale be ordered "free and clear" of all liens, claims, interests, and encumbrances, rather than only certain ones specifically identified in the notice of the sale motion. They also prefer to have findings added to the order on issues such as fair value paid and no successor liability, and often ask for an injunction against actions affecting the buyer that are inconsistent with the sale order's findings and provisions.

Big Differences From District To District. As bankruptcy lawyers know, courts in different districts around the country have taken surprisingly divergent views on what is, and is not, appropriate in Section 363 sale orders.

  • It's hard not to notice the striking differences between the new Model Sale Order from the Northern District of California and examples of sale orders entered over the past few years by bankruptcy courts in the District of Delaware (example here), the Southern District of New York (example here), and the Northern District of Illinois (example here), three courts where a number of large Chapter 11 cases have been filed. 
  • The new Guidelines issued by the Northern District of California appear to be in reaction to the submission of sale orders more in keeping with the accepted practice in Delaware and New York than in Northern California.

Although one wonders if the Northern District of California's approach will spread to other courts, the more likely scenario is that each district will continue to follow its own path.

Section 363 Sales: Interesting Article Takes A Further Look

David Powlen, Managing Director and Partner at Western Reserve Partners LLC, has an interesting article on the Turnaround Management Association website entitled "Bargains Await Buyers Skilled At Navigating Section 363 Minefields." It gives a good overview of the range of issues that arise in the context of a sale under Bankruptcy Code Section 363. Among the article's observations:

  • Unlike traditional private company M&A deals, Section 363 sales take place in the "fishbowl" of a bankruptcy proceeding;
  • Although the bankruptcy process generally leads the debtor to seek an auction, some typical M&A bidders may not participate in a bankruptcy sale, potentially reducing the competition to a stalking horse bidder;
  • Compensating for the usual lack of representations and warranties in an asset purchase agreement with a bankrupt company is the court's sale approval order, which generally approves a sale free and clear of liens, claims, and interests; and
  • A Section 363 sale may not be free of every claim or interest, however, as certain environmental and product liability claims may nevertheless pass to the buyer. 

The article also includes a helpful chart giving a graphic presentation of the relative risks and benefits of an out-of-court sale, a Section 363 sale, and the less common sale through a Chapter 11 plan of reorganization. For more on these issues, you may also be interested in this earlier post and linked article on buying assets from a financially distressed company.

The "Ride Through" Doctrine Rides Again: Ninth Circuit BAP Lets A License Agreement Ride Through Chapter 11

In a June 18, 2007 decision in In re J.Z. L.L.C. (available here), the Bankruptcy Appellate Panel (BAP) of the U.S. Court of Appeals for the Ninth Circuit faced an interesting question: Did the so-called "ride through" doctrine from the old Bankruptcy Act of 1898 survive enactment of the Bankruptcy Code in 1978? The BAP's introduction to the decision sums up its answer:

We confront the puzzle of the status of an executory contract that was neither assumed nor rejected during a chapter 11 case in which there was a confirmed plan that did not involve transfers of property of the estate or creation of new entities. We conclude that the “ride through” doctrine developed under the former Bankruptcy Act retains vitality in chapter 11 cases when the debtor continues operating and does not change form.

After a chapter 11 case was closed, the reorganized debtor sued in state court to enforce a license that it had granted prepetition regarding the use of its manufacturing technology. The state court declined to act without a bankruptcy court ruling that the license, which had been neither assumed nor rejected during the chapter 11 case, remained in effect. The bankruptcy court ruled that the license contract survives under the “ride through” doctrine, that the debtor has standing to enforce the contract because all property of the estate vested in the debtor on confirmation, and that the reorganized debtor should not be judicially estopped. We AFFIRM.

Executory Contracts And Bankruptcy. I have previously discussed the importance of executory contracts in bankruptcy, and specifically how licenses of intellectual property are treated. Both of those posts were premised on the bankruptcy court being asked to decide whether an intellectual property license could be assumed, assumed and assigned, or rejected during the bankruptcy. This case, however, presented a very different situation in which the Chapter 11 debtor did not take any action during the Chapter 11 case to assume or reject the executory contract (here a license agreement permitting the non-debtor party to manufacture, promote, and sell a horizontal grinder on an exclusive basis for five years). In addition, although aware of the bankruptcy case, the non-debtor party to the contract also did not seek to force a decision on assumption or rejection pursuant to Section 365(d)(2).

The BAP's Reasoning. The BAP's 28-page decision carefully analyzes the issues raised in the case and makes a number of interesting conclusions.

  • First, not only did the debtor neither assume nor reject the license agreement, it also failed to list it on its bankruptcy schedules (specifically Schedule G). Nevertheless, the BAP held that the non-debtor licensee's failure to disclose it to the Bankruptcy Court or creditors left it "in the grandstand and not on the playing field" on its argument that the debtor should lose the right to enforce the agreement.
  • Second, even though the license agreement was unscheduled, once the debtor's Chapter 11 plan was confirmed, all property of the estate -- including this unscheduled asset -- revested in the reorganized debtor under Section 1141(b) of the Bankruptcy Code.
  • Third, while judicial estoppel can sometimes apply to limit the debtor's ability to sue on an unscheduled asset,  the BAP decided against applying judicial estoppel here, noting that when creditors could be harmed by such limits one "should not become so angry at a debtor that a creditor is taken out and shot." The BAP did acknowledge that the state court hearing the debtor's lawsuit against the licensee could reach a different conclusion.
  • Fourth, under the language and structure of the Bankruptcy Code, an "executory contract that is not assumed in a chapter 11 case is not 'deemed rejected.' As a matter of straightforward statutory construction, it follows that some other alternative, i.e., 'ride through,' must be available."
  • Fifth, the "ride through" or "pass through" doctrine was well established under the Bankruptcy Act of 1898 and nothing in the Bankruptcy Code of 1978 requires a conclusion that Congress intended to disturb that existing doctrine. In addition, the lack of clarity over which contracts are executory and which are non-executory (and thus not subject to assumption or rejection) bolsters the view that a "ride through" alternative exists for contracts.

For more background on the Bankruptcy Court's decision below (available here), affirmed by the BAP, be sure to read Warren Agin's December 2006 post on his Tech Bankruptcy Blog, which gives his always insightful perspective on these IP and bankruptcy issues. 

Significance Of A BAP Decision. It's worth noting that unlike a U.S. Court of Appeals, the BAP is made up of bankruptcy judges only, not federal circuit judges. Given a BAP's place in the judicial system's hierarchy, its decisions are not given the same precedential weigh as U.S. Court of Appeals decisions. This means that it's possible that the U.S. Court of Appeals for the Ninth Circuit could reach a different, and overruling, conclusion. However, the BAP's decision in this case is well-reasoned and three other circuits (the First, Second, and Fifth) have also ruled that the ride through doctrine still applies today. This makes the BAP's decision of special interest.

A Strategic Use Of The "Ride Through" Doctrine? As discussed in an earlier post on assumption of IP licenses, in several circuits a debtor cannot even assume many in-licenses of intellectual property without the licensor's consent.

  • In those circuits, a debtor may consider whether it could retain licenses simply by choosing to have them "ride through" the Chapter 11 case, neither moving to assume the license nor (the debtor hopes) having the licensors move to compel rejection. This scenario makes the old "ride through" doctrine of particular interest, especially if the debtor licensee has not defaulted under the agreement and is seeking only to keep the license agreement after reorganizing in Chapter 11.
  • While it's true that the occasional executory contract may slip through without a formal decision to assume or reject, it's the prospect of a debtor being able to use the doctrine as alternative way of preserving valuable intellectual property licenses that has bankruptcy lawyers giving the "ride through" doctrine a closer look.

Stay tuned, but the BAP's decision in In re JZ L.L.C. may encourage more such efforts in the future.

Florida Bankruptcy Court Considers The Supreme Court's Travelers Decision And Refuses To Allow Post-Petition Attorney's Fees To An Unsecured Creditor

In March 2007, the U.S. Supreme Court overruled the so-called Fobian rule in the Travelers Casualty & Surety Co. of America v. Pacific Gas & Electric Co. decision. (Click here for a copy of the decision.) That rule, named for the decision by the United States Court of Appeals for the Ninth Circuit in a case called In re Fobian, 951 F.2d 1149 (9th Cir. 1991), had barred unsecured creditors from recovering as part of their unsecured claim attorney's fees incurred post-petition litigating bankruptcy issues. 

The Open Question. As discussed in an earlier post, although the Supreme Court dispatched the Fobian rule, in Travelers it did not decide whether an unsecured creditor could actually recover its attorney's fees. Among other issues, it left for another day the issue of whether Section 506(b) of the Bankruptcy Code, which expressly allows attorney's fees to oversecured creditors, precludes recovery of post-petition attorney's fees as part of an unsecured claim.

A New Decision From Florida. Jordan Bublick has an interesting post on his Miami Florida Bankruptcy Law blog about a July 6, 2007 decision in the In re Electric Machinery Enterprises, Inc. Chapter 11 case. In the decision, the court held that an unsecured creditor is not permitted to add post-petition attorney's fees and costs to its unsecured claim. A copy of the decision, by Judge Michael G. Williamson of the the U.S. Bankruptcy Court for the Middle District of Florida, is available here. As Jordan points out, the Florida bankruptcy court held that the pre-Travelers majority rule denying unsecured creditors post-petition attorney's fees was still good law. Among the reasons the court cited:

  • Section 506(b)'s language permits only oversecured creditors to receive interest and fees, and this effectively excludes recovery by unsecured creditors.
  • The reasoning of the Supreme Court's decision in United Savings Ass'n v. Timbers, 484 U.S. 365 (1988), that post-petition interest can only be paid to secured creditors with the benefit of an equity cushion, applies to attorney's fees as well.
  • Section 502(b) requires the amount of a claim to be determined "as of the date of the filing of the petition," before post-petition fees have accrued.
  • Allowing fees to contract creditors would be inequitable because tort and many trade creditors, who lack the ability to recover attorney's fees, would have their relative recovery diminished.

Judge Williamson called out another reason for his decision:

Furthermore, the Court is particularly mindful of the practical impact a contrary ruling would have on the administration of a bankruptcy case. There would be no finality to the claims process as bankruptcy courts would constantly have to revisit the issue of the amount of claims to include ever-accruing attorneys' fees. The 'cash registers' would ring on a daily basis, as attorneys for unsecured creditors that were active in the case would continually be filing new claims or seeking to reconsider previously allowed claims in order to add post-petition attorneys' fees and costs. Essentially, there could be no finality to the claims resolution process if the ever-accruing fees and costs attendant to the representation of unsecured creditors were allowed as part of an unsecured claim.

An Earlier California Bankruptcy Court Decision. Interestingly, the Florida bankruptcy court did not cite to the In re Qmect, Inc. decision, issued by the U.S. Bankruptcy Court for the Northern District of California in May 2007 and discussed in this earlier post. In that decision, the California bankruptcy court took the opposite view. It held that an unsecured creditor could recover, as part of its unsecured claim, post-petition attorney's fees if its contract with the debtor provided for recovery of such fees. Adopting a different view of the bankruptcy policies at issue, that court held:

The strongest rationale for implying a prohibition on the inclusion of post-petition attorneys’ fees in a unsecured creditor’s pre-petition claim is that, unless the debtor is solvent, the unsecured creditor’s augmented claim will diminish the dividend to other unsecured creditors. However, a similar effect flows from allowing secured creditors to include their post-petition attorneys’ fees in their secured claims. While equality of distribution is one of the basic tenets of bankruptcy law, another important policy in bankruptcy is the preservation of nonbankruptcy legal rights except to the extent necessary to facilitate the purpose of the bankruptcy proceeding. Absent a clear provision of the Bankruptcy Code modifying a creditor’s nonbankruptcy legal rights, the Court concludes that those rights should be deemed to be left intact.

More Decisions To Follow. Bankruptcy courts are now beginning to address whether unsecured creditors can recover post-petition attorney's fees in the wake of the Travelers decision. These two early decisions have reached completely different conclusions. More decisions will undoubtedly follow as creditors with attorney's fees provisions in their contracts seek to include post-petition fees in their unsecured claims. With the issue far from settled, be sure to stay tuned.

Signs Of A Turn In The Private Equity Buyout Market?

Last week saw what may prove to be early signs of a turn in the robust market for the debt that finances private equity buyouts. In just a week's time, The New York Times reported on a possible cooldown in the buyout market, and the Financial Times published a commentary on signs of a possible "bondholder revolt" against issuer-favorable debt terms (including low debt coverage ratios mentioned in an earlier post) that have prevailed for the past several years. In addition, the DealBook Blog's post entitled "Buyout Boom Could Slow As Investors Push Back" discussed how several buyout debt offerings were recently curtailed or modified, a first in this previously strong debt market.

Then, in a separate but interesting move, the former co-head of investment banking at UBS, Jeff McDermott, left last week to start a new private equity firm, Stony Lane Partners. Stony Lane's focus? Buying and turning around distressed businesses. When asked by the Financial News why he's making the move, McDermott answered:

I think a credit crunch will play out over time, and it will be like a slow rolling wave. It’s won’t be a one-day cataclysmic event. I think there will be double leverage in the system. I think CDOs are buying margin leverage and are buying corporate credits, which are priced like there’s no end to economic growth in the future. Of course, there are economic cycles.

If he's right, a rise in defaults, restructurings, and Chapter 11 bankruptcy filings may be coming down the road.

New Case Addresses Whether A Security Interest In A Patent Can Be Perfected With Just A PTO Filing

When a debtor grants a security interest in a patent issued by the U.S. Patent and Trademark Office (PTO), the creditor must take steps to perfect that security interest. Given that the PTO issues patents but the Uniform Commercial Code (UCC) generally governs perfection of security interests, creditors have often filed both a UCC-1 financing statement and made a filing in the PTO to cover all the bases.

Perfection By UCC Filing. In 2001, the Ninth Circuit held that a creditor who filed a UCC-1 financing statement properly perfected a security interest in a patent even if it did not also make a filing with the PTO. The decision in the In re Cybernetic Services, Inc. case, officially Moldo v. Matsco, Inc., 252 F.3d 1039 (9th Cir. 2001), rested on the Ninth Circuit's determination that the federal Patent Act does not cover liens on patents and does not preempt the UCC with respect to perfection of security interests. This seemed to settle the question of whether a UCC filing alone was enough to perfect a security interest in a patent, at least in the Ninth Circuit.

Does A PTO Filing Alone Perfect? Judge William C. Hillman of the U.S. Bankruptcy Court for the District of Massachusetts faced the opposite question in the In re Coldwave Systems, LLC case. There the creditor sought to rely on a PTO filing alone to perfect its security interest in a patent because the Bankruptcy Court avoided as a preference a tardy UCC filing made long after the security interest was granted but within 90 days of the bankruptcy petition. The creditor's much earlier PTO filing of a Recordation Form Cover Sheet, recording the conveyance of the security agreement between the debtor and the creditor, was not subject to avoidance as a preference. The creditor argued that the PTO filing was sufficient to perfect its security interest, even in the absence of a UCC filing.

UCC Perfection Or Bust. In his 14-page decision issued on May 15, 2007, Judge Hillman held that the PTO filing was insufficient to perfect the creditor's security interest because the Patent Act (specifically Section 261 of Title 35), did not create a system for the perfection of security interests in patents. After first concluding that "[t]he Federal statute does not protect holders of security interests," Judge Hillman held as follows:

There is nothing in §261 that addresses in any way the conflict between one who is not a holder of an interest by way of assignment, grant, or conveyance and a bankruptcy trustee. We must look to other law for the answer. 

That other law was the UCC. Holding that a patent is a general intangible, the Court ruled that nothing in the UCC excepts general intangibles from the rule requiring perfection by a UCC filing. Since no valid UCC filing perfected the creditor's security interest, it was unperfected and the Chapter 7 trustee prevailed.

The Bottom Line. The Coldwave Systems decision is consistent with the Ninth Circuit's earlier Cybernetic Services ruling. Together they teach creditors that the only way to perfect a security interest in a patent is by an unavoidable and proper UCC filing. Any creditor relying on a PTO filing alone will end up unperfected and unsecured. While there may be other reasons for a creditor to make a PTO filing, such as potentially protecting against an improper assignment of the patent, perfection of a security interest is not one of them.

Want More? For more on the Coldwave Systems and Cybernetic Services decisions, be sure to read Warren Agin's excellent post on the Tech Bankruptcy blog, entitled "An Expert Builds On Cybernetic Services." Warren also gets special thanks for first posting on Judge Hillman's interesting decision.

Third Circuit Holds Contemporaneous Exchange Defense To Preference Claim Is Available Even For Credit Transactions

On June 7, 2007, the U.S. Court of Appeals for the Third Circuit issued a decision in the In re Hechinger Investment Company case holding that the "contemporaneous exchange for new value" defense to preference claims can apply even if the payments were made in the context of a credit arrangement. The key is whether the parties intended the payments involved to be contemporaneous exchanges for new value, the linchpin of this particular preference defense. A copy of the Third Circuit's decision is available here.

Bankruptcy Preferences. As a reminder, preferences are payments or other transfers made in the 90 days prior to a bankruptcy filing, on account of antecedent or pre-existing debt, at a time when the debtor was insolvent, that allow the transferee (the preference defendant) to be "preferred" by recovering more than it would have had the transfer not been made and the defendant instead had simply filed a proof of claim for the amount involved. The 90-day reachback period is extended to a full year prior to the bankruptcy petition for insiders such as officers, directors, and affiliates.

The Contemporaneous Exchange Defense. This defense, found in Section 547(c)(1) of the Bankruptcy Code, is short and to the point:

(c) The trustee may not avoid under this section a transfer--

(1) to the extent that such transfer was--

(A) intended by the debtor and the creditor to or for whose benefit such transfer was made to be a contemporaneous exchange for new value given to the debtor; and

(B) in fact a substantially contemporaneous exchange.

In interpreting this language, the Bankruptcy Court held that a "credit relationship is inconsistent with the intent required in order to sustain" the defense. Essentially, under its view the defense would presumably be limited to situations in which no credit was allowed to remain outstanding but instead a C.O.D. purchase or other similarly immediate "goods for cash" swap was involved.

The Third Circuit's Focus On Intent. The Third Circuit reversed the Bankruptcy Court's ruling, explaining its reasoning as follows:

The Bankruptcy Court found that the disputed transfers were not intended by the parties to be contemporaneous exchanges because the transfers were credit transactions. In reaching this result, the Court relied upon several factually distinguishable cases, none of which stand for the proposition that parties can never intend credit transactions to be contemporaneous exchanges under § 547(c)(1)(A). We disagree with the Bankruptcy Court’s conclusion. Indeed, it would appear that § 547(c)(1) covers little other than credit transactions. The § 547(c)(1) defense applies only to transfers that the debtor has shown are payments on an “antecedent debt” under § 547(b). See 11 U.S.C. § 547(b)(2) (definition of avoidable transfers). If there is no delay between when the debt arises and payment of the obligation, then the transfer is outside the scope of § 547(b), and § 547(c)(1) is not implicated. The existence of a delay between the creation of a debt and its payment is a hallmark of a credit relationship, which is, by definition, a relationship in which the creditor entrusts the debtor with goods without present payment. OXFORD ENGLISH DICTIONARY (2d ed. 1989) (defining “credit” as “[t]rust or confidence in a buyer’s ability and intention to pay at some future time, exhibited by entrusting him with goods, etc. without present payment.”).

We do not think that the District Court’s interpretation of the Bankruptcy Court’s order – namely, as concluding that the parties intended to have a credit relationship – necessarily resolves the question. The inquiry still remains: even if a credit relationship was intended, was it nonetheless their intent that the ongoing payments would be contemporaneous exchanges for new value? A court may find the parties intended a contemporaneous exchange for new value even when the transaction is styled as a “credit” transaction. See In re Payless Cashways, Inc., 306 B.R. 243 (8th Cir. BAP 2004), aff’d, 394 F.3d 1082 (8th Cir. 2005). The question is one of intent, and although a delay between the incurrence of the debt and its payment can evidence that the exchange was not intended to be contemporaneous, the passage of time does not necessarily negate intent.

(Footnotes omitted.)

The Bottom Line. Under this decision, a contemporaneous exchange defense to a preference is available even if the defendant has extended credit to the debtor. Nevertheless, to prevail the defendant will have to prove that it and the debtor actually intended the payments to be contemporaneous exchanges for new value and they were, in fact, substantially contemporaneous with the exchange of goods or services.

A Final Note. The Third Circuit decision covered other issues as well, including the ordinary course of business defense and whether prejudgment interest is available for preference claims. For more on those issues, plus a copy of the Bankruptcy Court's decision below, be sure to read the detailed post on the case by the Delaware Business Bankruptcy Report.

Who Gets The Benefit Of A D&O Policy's Proceeds, The Directors And Officers Or A Bankruptcy Trustee?

On June 8, 2007, Delaware Bankruptcy Judge Kevin Gross issued a decision in the World Health Alternatives, Inc. bankruptcy case that corporate directors, officers, attorneys, and bankruptcy professionals alike will find of interest. A copy of the Court's 13-page decision and short order is available here.

The Three-Sided D&O Policy. The issue in the case was whether a Chapter 7 bankruptcy trustee could get an injunction to prevent directors and officers from using the proceeds of a Director and Officer (D&O) liability policy to settle a shareholder lawsuit pending in another court (known as the Consolidated Action). The underlying question centered on who owns the proceeds of a D&O policy when the policy provides:

  • Side A coverage for directors and officers;
  • Side B coverage for the corporation's expenses in indemnifying directors and officers; and
  • Side C coverage for the corporation's own exposure for securities litigation claims.  

As is true with many D&O policies, the policy involved in this case also had a "Priority of Payments" endorsement that gave payments under the Side A coverage for the directors and officers priority over both the Side B and Side C coverages.

Does The Automatic Stay Stop Use Of A D&O Policy's Proceeds? The Chapter 7 trustee sought to block the use of the D&O policy's limited proceeds to settle the shareholder lawsuit, arguing that they were property of the bankruptcy estate and that the effort to use them to settle this Consolidated Action violated the automatic stay of bankruptcy.  The Chapter 7 trustee had his own lawsuit pending against the directors and officers and he wanted to keep the "wasting" D&O policy (called "wasting" because the policy proceeds also had to cover defense costs) available to cover his claims. The debtor corporation had been dismissed from the shareholder litigation so no Side C coverage was implicated, and because no indemnification had been or was likely to be paid, the Side B coverage had not been triggered.

In denying the Chapter 7 trustee an injunction, the Delaware Bankruptcy Court held that although the policy was property of the bankruptcy estate since the debtor corporation had purchased it, the policy's proceeds were not. Although acknowledging that some other courts had ruled differently, Judge Gross followed an earlier Delaware Bankruptcy Court decision in In re Allied Digital Technologies Corp., 306 B.R. 505 (Bankr. D.Del. 2004), and held as follows:

Applying the rulings in the cases cited above to the case at hand, it appears that the proceeds of the Debtor’s insurance policy are not property of the estate. The Court arrives at this conclusion from its review of the ‘language and scope of the [P]olicy at issue.’ Allied Digital, 306 B.R. at 509. The Policy proceeds which are being used to fund the Settlement and are being held in escrow by Lead Counsel are from the Policy’s Coverage A. World Health, and now the Trustee as successor, has no right to any Coverage A proceeds, which insures only World Health’s officers and directors. World Health must look to Coverage B which insures it for indemnification claims. There are no such claims against World Health. If the Trustee is seeking to recover for the wrongs of the defendants in the Trustee’s Action pending in this Court, it is not entitled to preference over the settlement of the Consolidated Action. As the Court held in Allied Digital:

The Trustee’s real concern is that payment of defense costs may affect his rights as a plaintiff seeking to recover from The D&O Policy rather than as a potential defendant seeking to be protected by the D&O Policy. In this way, Trustee is no different than any third party plaintiff suing defendants covered by a wasting Policy.

Id. at 512.

Judge Gross ruled that the automatic stay did not apply to the policy proceeds at issue and, as a result, the Chapter 7 trustee was not entitled to an injunction to stop them from being used to settle the other litigation. 

The Take-Aways. When D&O policy proceeds are being used by insured directors and officers to fund a defense or settlement of a covered claim, a bankruptcy trustee generally will not be able to interfere if none of the other coverages -- specifically the Side B and C coverages -- has been invoked.

  • If claims have been made against the Side B or Side C coverages, the outcome could very well be different.
  • A Priority of Payments endorsement, which gives priority to the Side A coverage for directors and officers, is one tool to consider to help ensure that the D&O policy is available for directors and officers first. However, the law is not clear whether that endorsement would trump the automatic stay if the other coverages were invoked.
  • These issues are complicated and those with a stake in these questions should be sure to get legal advice on both the bankruptcy and insurance coverage issues involved.

For more discussion of the decision and the insurance issues raised, be sure to read Kevin M. LaCroix's excellent post at The D&O Diary. Special thanks to Francis G.X. Pileggi of the Delaware Corporate and Commercial Litigation Blog for highlighting Kevin's post.

New Article Examines What Might Happen To Private Equity Buyouts In A Downturn

The Globe And Mail has a story on its Report On Business.com site entitled "Private equity's high-wire act: Can leveraged buyout artists build firm foundations on soft money?" The article discusses the current low default rate on the debt that has been financing private equity buyouts and considers who will get hurt when the default rate rises.

The article makes a number of interesting observations about the risks in the current buyout market, including the following:

  • Banks hold a smaller percentage of leveraged debt, having sold off debt to hedge funds and others though pooling vehicles such as collateralized loan obligations, known as CLOs.
  • This trend has put some banks in something of a loan broker role, making the initial acquisition loan but later selling the position.
  • The free cash flow to interest expense ratios are now in the 1.7 range, a noticeable reduction from the 2.6 average three years ago.
  • Toggle bonds, which allow borrowers to issue new bonds, often at higher rates, to finance interest costs on the existing bonds, have become more common.

The article concludes with a discussion of what might bring this private equity cycle to an end, a question on many people's minds these days. For more on this issue, you may find interesting three past posts on the general subject, available here, here, and here.

Ninth Circuit Clarifies Earmarking Defense To Preference Claims

On June 4, 2007, the U.S. Court of Appeals for the Ninth Circuit brought some additional clarity to the earmarking defense to preference claims in its decision in Metcalf v. Golden, an adversary proceeding within the In re Adbox, Inc. Chapter 7 case. In this post, I'll give a little background on preferences and the earmarking defense and then discuss how the defense works in the Ninth Circuit.

Preferences And Earmarking. Before reaching its decision on the earmarking issues, the Court set the legal context by discussing what preferences are and how earmarking can sometimes be a defense to a preference claim.

Under 11 U.S.C. § 547 the bankruptcy trustee may recover certain transfers made by the debtor within 90 days before filing for bankruptcy, if the trustee proves:

(1) a transfer of an interest of the debtor in property;

(2) to or for the benefit of a creditor;

(3) for or on account of an antecedent debt;

(4) made while the debtor was insolvent;

(5) made on or within 90 days before the date of the filing of the petition; and

(6) one that enables the creditor to receive more than such creditor would receive in a Chapter 7 liquidation of the estate.

In re Superior Stamp & Coin Co., Inc., 223 F.3d 1004, 1007 (9th Cir. 2000) (citing 11 U.S.C. § 547(b)). Such a transfer is known as an 'avoidable preference' or a 'preferential transfer.' Id. at 1007-09. The 'earmarking doctrine' is a courtmade exception to this rule that applies when a third party advances funds to the debtor subject to an agreement requiring the debtor to use the funds to pay off another creditor. Id.; In re Sierra Steel, Inc., 96 B.R. 271, 274 (B.A.P. 9th Cir. 1989). In such circumstances, the funds are deemed 'earmarked' and are not considered part the debtor’s estate. Sierra Steel, 96 B.R. at 274.

For more information on preferences, and some tips on how creditors can protect themselves when dealing with a financially troubled customer, you may find this post of interest.

Is Earmarking An Affirmative Defense? One previously unresolved issue involving the earmarking defense was whether it is a true "affirmative defense," which would mean that to assert it a preference defendant would have to include it in its answer to the preference complaint. In Metcalf, the Ninth Circuit said no:

Earmarking is not one of the affirmative defenses enumerated in Rule 8, and we decline to construe it as such under Rule 8’s residuary clause for 'any other matter constituting an avoidance or affirmative defense.' Properly understood, the earmarking doctrine is not an affirmative defense under Rule 8, but rather a challenge to the trustee’s claim that particular funds are part of the bankruptcy estate under 11 U.S.C. § 547. See Libby Int’l., 247 B.R. at 467 [In re Libby Int’l., Inc., 247 B.R. 463 (B.A.P. 8th Cir. 2000)]. Thus, the Metcalfs did not waive their earmarking defense by failing to plead it in their answer in the preference action.

Who Has The Burden Of Proof? With the affirmative defense issue out of the way, the Ninth Circuit then tackled the even more important question of whether the trustee or the defendant has the burden of proof on the earmarking defense. The Court held that although the trustee has the burden to prove that the funds at issue came from the debtor's account, the real burden of proof to establish the actual earmarking defense shifts back to the defendant:

As the district court noted, there is 'substantial confusion' over who bears the burden of proof on an earmarking defense. The Ninth Circuit Bankruptcy Appellate Panel addressed this question in Sierra Steel, where it denied an earmarking defense because the defendant 'ha[d] not traced the funds to money received by the debtor from [the lender].' 96 B.R. at 275. While the Sierra Steel court started from the general principal that the trustee has the burden of establishing that property is part of the bankruptcy estate, it also noted that the funds in question were disbursed from the defendant’s general account. Id. at 274 n.5. The source of the funds raised the presumption that the funds were property of the bankruptcy estate and the burden of proof accordingly shifted from the trustee—to establish that the funds were part of the estate —to the defendant—to show that they were not. Id. (citing In re Bullion Reserve of N. Am., 836 F.2d 1214, 1217 n.3 (9th Cir. 1988)).

We follow well-established law in holding that the trustee bears the initial burden of establishing that a transfer is an avoidable preference under § 547. See Sierra Steel, 96 B.R. at 274. If, however, the trustee establishes that the transfer of the disputed funds was from one of the debtor’s accounts over which the debtor ordinarily exercised total control, we follow the approach of Sierra Steel and find that the trustee makes a preliminary showing of an avoidable transfer “of an interest of the debtor” under § 547(b). The burden then shifts to the defendant in the preference action to show that the funds were earmarked.

In the Metcalf case, the Court ultimately held that the defense was not established. The defendants could not prove the existence of an agreement between the debtor and the lender that had advanced the funds requiring them to be paid to the defendants. Since the debtor could have used those funds for another purpose, the payment to the defendants was a preferential transfer from the debtor's estate.

Where Does This Leave The Earmarking Defense? The Ninth Circuit's decision reaffirmed the existence of the earmarking defense and resolved two important procedural questions about how the defense may be asserted. The decision also highlighted the level of proof needed to make a successful earmarking defense. If a creditor is getting paid with loaned funds and hopes to use the defense, it should make sure that there is an actual agreement requiring the debtor to use the newly loaned funds to pay that creditor. Without proof of such an actual agreement, the earmarking defense will fail. 

English Translation Of China's New Enterprise Bankruptcy Law Is Now Available

On June 1, 2007, China's new Enterprise Bankruptcy Law took effect. Years in the drafting, it represents a major change from the prior law. If implemented consistently throughout China, the new law may give foreign creditors more protection than they have received in the past. 

Covering twelve chapters and 136 articles, the new law is designed to create a framework for business insolvencies in China. Among the key features are a court-appointed administrator, a creditors' meeting and creditors' committee, voluntary and creditor-initiated bankruptcy proceedings, and reorganization, liquidator, and settlement mechanisms. For more information on the new law, you may find this article from Asia Times Online of interest as well as this discussion by the King & Wood law firm in China. The Bankruptcy Litigation Blog has a recent post that includes an introductory discussion on the topic, as well as several useful links.

In conjunction with its China Law Digest, China-based Lehman, Lee & Xu has prepared a very helpful English translation of the Enterprise Bankruptcy Law of the People's Republic of China. They have also made available a PDF version of the unofficial translation. Among the firm's other resources is the China Blawg, a blog covering Chinese legal topics and related information.

China has not yet adopted the Model Law on Cross-Border Insolvency, which the United States enacted as Chapter 15 of the U.S. Bankruptcy Code, but this new Enterprise Bankruptcy Law appears to be moving China more toward the mainstream of international insolvency legal systems.

Delaware Bankruptcy Court Considers Whether Key Employee Incentive Plan Milestones Can Be Lowered Without Triggering The Restrictions On Retention Plans

One of the significant changes made by the Bankruptcy Code amendments that took effect in October 2005 was the imposition of severe restrictions on "key employee retention plans," known in the bankruptcy world as KERPs.  In this post I'll discuss how several courts have handled these issues in the year and a half since the Bankruptcy Abuse Prevention and Consumer Protection Act of 2005, known as BAPCPA, became effective. The most recent decision, issued late last week by the Delaware Bankruptcy Court in the Nellson Nutraceutical case, gives debtors added flexibility when trying to craft plans consistent with these new restrictions.

Changes Aimed At Curbing KERPs. Prior to BAPCPA, KERPs were a very popular way of making sure that a company could retain its most important officers and employees to guide it through bankruptcy. Citing perceived abuses, however, Congress added language in BAPCPA that requires debtors to satisfy nearly impossible standards before courts would be permitted to approve payment of retention bonuses (or severance payments) as administrative claims to officers and other insiders of a bankrupt company. The restrictions apply only to insiders; no similar limitations have been placed on payment of retention bonuses and severance to non-insiders.

The New Law's High Hurdles. To give you a flavor of the restrictions BAPCPA added to Section 503(c) of the Bankruptcy Code, a debtor company must now prove the following before it can gain approval for payment of a retention bonus to an insider:

  • the transfer or obligation is essential to retention of the person because the individual has a bona fide job offer from another business at the same or greater rate of compensation;
  • the services provided by the person are essential to the survival of the business; and
  • either

      • the amount of the transfer made to, or obligation incurred for the benefit of, the person is not greater than an amount equal to 10 times the amount of the mean transfer or obligation of a similar kind given to nonmanagement employees for any purpose during the calendar year in which the transfer is made or the obligation is incurred; or
      • if no such similar transfers were made to, or obligations were incurred for the benefit of, such nonmanagement employees during such calendar year, the amount of the transfer or obligation is not greater than an amount equal to 25 percent of the amount of any similar transfer or obligation made to or incurred for the benefit of such insider for any purpose during the calendar year before the year in which such transfer is made or obligation is incurred.

The requirement of a bona fide job offer in particular has led some to observe that if an officer of a company in Chapter 11 really had such an offer he or she would probably just take it, mooting the entire retention issue. In any event, these provisions have had their desired effect. It is now rare to find a debtor proposing a KERP that seeks to make retention payments to officers or other insiders.

Debtors Opt For Plan B. Despite these restrictions, debtors still usually want to keep their key officers and may worry that they will leave for more stable companies absent some incentives to remain with the debtor. So what are debtors doing? Since October 2005, they have shifted gears and are proposing not retention plans but incentive plans instead. To date, only a few decisions, discussed below, have addressed what is necessary for an incentive plan to pass muster. In other instances, incentive plans have been approved with little or no opposition. Perhaps the earliest such approval came in May 2006 when Judge Burton R. Lifland approved one in the Calpine Corporation Chapter 11 case.

The Dana Corporation Case. The first significant contested plan motion came shortly after the Calpine incentive plan's approval. Dana Corporation, whose Chapter 11 case was also pending before Judge Lifland, filed a motion seeking approval of a plan similar to that approved in the Calpine case. After considering objections filed by various creditors and others, however, in September 2006 Judge Lifland refused to approve Dana Corporation's proposed plan, finding that it was a prohibited retention plan. For an excellent and entertaining discussion of the circumstances leading to denial of that first effort in the Dana Corporation case, including why the Calpine plan was approved while the first Dana plan was not, be sure to read Steve Jakubowski's detailed post on the Bankruptcy Litigation Blog.

A few months later, on Dana Corporation's second try, Judge Lifland approved the revised incentive plan. In his second ruling, he found that with certain modifications the debtor's revised proposals met the sound business judgment test required for approval. In addition, he ruled that the new plan incentivized the key officers "to produce and increase the value of the estate" and, because the benchmarks in the plan were difficult targets to reach and not easy "lay-ups," the proposal was an actual incentive plan and not a retention plan in disguise.

Evaluating Incentive Plans. In evaluating whether the Dana plan represented the exercise of sound business judgment, Judge Lifland considered the following factors:

  • Is there a reasonable relationship between the plan proposed and the results to be obtained, i.e., will the key employee stay for as long as it takes for the debtor to reorganize or market its assets, or, in the case of a performance incentive, is the plan calculated to achieve the desired performance? (emphasis added)
  • Is the cost of the plan reasonable in the context of the debtor's assets, liabilities and earning potential?
  • Is the scope of the plan fair and reasonable; does it apply to all employees; does it discriminate unfairly?
  • Is the plan or proposal consistent with industry standards?
  • What were the due diligence efforts of the debtor in investigating the need for a plan; analyzing which key employees need to be incentivized; what is available; what is generally applicable in a particular industry?
  • Did the debtor receive independent counsel in performing due diligence and in creating and authorizing the incentive compensation?

These factors provide useful guidance not only to bankruptcy courts but also to boards of directors of financially troubled companies, whether in or out of bankruptcy, when considering proposals for retention or incentive plans.

The Global Home Products Decision. In March 2007, Judge Kevin Gross of the Delaware Bankruptcy Court approved two incentive plans in the Global Home Products case. In that decision, as the Delaware Business Bankruptcy Report described here, the court followed the analysis Judge Lifland used in the Dana Corporation case and approved the two incentive plans. Specifically, Judge Gross found that the plans were true incentive plans, which he called "pay for value" plans and were not KERPs, or "pay to stay" plans. For this reason, Judge Gross evaluated the plans under the business judgment standard of Section 363 of the Bankruptcy Code, holding that the strict Section 503(c) limitations simply did not apply.

The Nellson Nutraceutical Decision. On May 24, 2007, Judge Christopher S. Sontchi of the Delaware Bankruptcy Court issued a decision in the Nellson Nutraceutical Chapter 11 case approving revisions to a previously-approved incentive plan. There, the debtors' first incentive plan provided for certain performance milestones based on target levels of EBITDA, or earnings before interest, taxes, depreciation, and amortization. Unfortunately, the debtors did not achieve those EBITDA milestones and sought to lower them to align with what they considered to be more realistic performance goals. After receiving testimony that the debtors had made similar reductions in bonus targets in the past, Judge Sontchi concluded that the debtors' current proposal was in the ordinary course of business and involved a good faith business judgment.

On the issue of whether Section 503(c)'s retention payment restrictions applied, Judge Sontchi found that the lowering of the incentive plan milestones did not turn the plans into retention plans. He held that if the primary purpose of a plan is to incentivize insiders and other employees, rather than merely retain them, it remains an incentive plan:

Under the facts of this case, although the modification of the 2006 bonus program has some retentive effect, it is for the primary purpose of motivating employees and, thus, the limitations of section 503(c)(1) are not applicable.

*     *    *

The [United States Trustee] argues with some force that if an incentive plan is based on achievement of EBITDA targets and those targets are not achieved, yet the bonus is still received, that the plan cannot be an incentive plan but must, in fact, be solely a retention plan.

*   *    *

While the Court agrees that the payment of bonuses under the modified 2006 [plan] has some retentive effect, the Court disagrees with the [United States Trustee's] argument that its sole or primary purpose is retention. Consistent with the Debtors’ pre-petition practice, the 2006 [plan] must be considered as a whole. It consists of two parts: the establishment of 'aspirational goals' in the early part of the year; and a review at the end of the year to consider whether those goals have been met and, if not, why. In this case, the Debtors did just that and determined that the 2006 [plan] served its purpose by motivating the employees to do a 'great job' in connection with the matters that those employees could reasonably be expected to influence. As such, the Debtors seek to award bonuses at a reduced level to compensate the employees for their success (albeit somewhat limited) in 2006 and to motivate the employees in 2007.

Finally, Judge Sontchi held that Section 503(c)(3)'s additional limitations, which among other things prohibit transfers to insiders that are "outside of the ordinary course of business and not justified by the facts and circumstances of the case," by its terms apply only to payments outside of the ordinary course of business. Given his earlier holding that the debtors' plans and their modifications were made in the ordinary course of business, Judge Sontchi concluded that Section 503(c)(3)'s requirements did not apply at all.

Conclusion. BAPCPA has effectively ended the use of KERPs for officers and other insiders of a debtor. However, more than a year and a half after BAPCPA became effective, bankruptcy courts in New York and Delaware, and perhaps elsewhere, are willing to approve incentive plans for insiders. The Nellson Nutraceutical decision goes further and, in the right circumstances, will allow the incentive plan's performance milestones themselves to be lowered without jeopardizing the "incentive" character of the plan. This area of the law is plainly evolving, so stay tuned for more developments.

California Bankruptcy Court Answers Open Question From Supreme Court's Travelers Decision: Can Post-Petition Attorney's Fees Be Added To Unsecured Claims?

In March, the U.S. Supreme Court overruled the so-called Fobian rule in the Travelers Casualty & Surety Co. of America v. Pacific Gas & Electric Co. decision. (Click here for a copy of the decision.) That rule, named for decision by the United States Court of Appeals for the Ninth Circuit in a case called In re Fobian, 951 F.2d 1149 (9th Cir. 1991), had barred unsecured creditors from recovering as part of their unsecured claim attorney's fees incurred post-petition litigating bankruptcy issues.

The Open Question. As discussed in a post on the Travelers decision, although the Supreme Court dispatched the Fobian rule, it did not decide whether an unsecured creditor could actually recover its attorney's fees. Left unresolved, among other issues, was whether Section 506(b) of the Bankruptcy Code, which expressly allows attorney's fees to oversecured creditors, precludes recovery of post-petition attorney's fees as part of an unsecured claim.

The Question Gets Asked Post-Travelers. In the In re Qmect, Inc. Chapter 11 cases pending in the U.S. Bankruptcy Court for the Northern District of California, an unsecured creditor sought allowance of post-petition attorney's fees, incurred litigating bankruptcy issues, as part of its unsecured claim against debtors who were individual guarantors of its debt owed by the corporation. The creditor had prevailed in an adversary proceeding on its guaranty (an appeal is pending) and sought post-petition attorney's fees as part of its judgment.

After first denying the creditor's request without prejudice last November, the Bankruptcy Court asked for supplemental briefing on the issue after the Travelers decision was decided. In the debtors' supplemental brief, they argued that Section 506(b) of the Bankruptcy Code implicitly provides for the disallowance of post-petition attorney's fees as part of unsecured claims (as opposed to secured claims). In the creditor's supplemental brief, it argued that all of the other circuits that have addressed the issue agree that such fees are recoverable and that there is nothing in Section 502(b) or Section 506(b) that prohibits their recovery. Both the debtors and the creditor filed reply briefs as well, further arguing their contentions.

California Bankruptcy Court Gives An Answer. On May 17, 2007, in perhaps the first post-Travelers decision to rule on the issue, Judge Leslie Tchaikovsky held that an unsecured creditor was entitled to include post-petition attorney's fees incurred litigating bankruptcy-related issues in its unsecured claim, where the parties' underlying contract provided for recovery of attorney's fees. In its Memorandum of Decision re Motion for Post-Petition Attorneys' Fees, the Bankruptcy Court held that (1) the creditor's post-petition attorney's fees qualify as a "claim" under Section 101(5) of the Bankruptcy Code, and (2) none of the exceptions in Section 502(b) of the Bankruptcy Code apply to require disallowance of the fees as part of the claim.

The Court's Analysis. In elaborating on the second holding, the Bankruptcy Court explained as follows:

The only category [of Section 502(b)’s exceptions] that arguably supports the disallowance of an unsecured claim for post-petition attorneys’ fees is 11 U.S.C. § 502(b)(1): i.e., that 'such claim is unenforceable against property of the debtor and property of the debtor, under any agreement or applicable law for a reason other than because such claim is contingent or unmatured....' 11 U.S.C. § 502(b)(1). The debtor contends that this category applies to post-petition attorneys’ fees because 11 U.S.C. § 506(b) renders the claim for post-petition attorneys’ fees unenforceable against the debtor and property of the debtor. Section 502(b)(1) refers to 'applicable law,' not 'applicable nonbankruptcy law.' Thus, Section 506(b) qualifies as 'applicable law.' Section 506(b) provides as follows:

(b) To the extent that an allowed secured claim is secured by property, the value of which is greater than the amount of such claim, there shall be allowed to the holder of such claim, interest on such claim, and reasonable fees, costs or charges provided for under which such claim arose.

Thus, according to the debtor, by providing that a secured claim shall be allowed reasonable fees to the extent the claim is secured by property, the Bankruptcy Code is implicitly saying that fees are not available to an unsecured creditor. The Court finds this reading of 11 U.S.C. §§ 502(b) and 506(b) too strained to be persuasive. First, 11 U.S.C. § 506 is entitled 'Determination of Secured Status.' A statute so entitled would not be a logical place to provide for the disallowance of an element of an unsecured claim. If Congress, in enacting the Bankruptcy Code, had wanted to disallow claims for post-petition attorneys’ fees, the logical place for it to have done so was surely in 11 U.S.C. § 502(b). Moreover, 11 U.S.C. § 506(b) does not distinguish between pre-petition and post-petition attorneys’ fees. Thus, if 11 U.S.C. § 506(b) is read as an additional ground for objecting to claims, arguably, an unsecured creditor would be prohibited from including its pre-petition attorneys’ fees in its claim as well as its postpetition fees.

(Footnotes omitted.) After being unable to find any Court of Appeals decision decided under the Bankruptcy Code directly addressing the issue, the Bankruptcy Court then examined the policy argument underlying the debtors' objection:

The strongest rationale for implying a prohibition on the inclusion of post-petition attorneys’ fees in a unsecured creditor’s pre-petition claim is that, unless the debtor is solvent, the unsecured creditor’s augmented claim will diminish the dividend to other unsecured creditors. However, a similar effect flows from allowing secured creditors to include their post-petition attorneys’ fees in their secured claims. While equality of distribution is one of the basic tenets of bankruptcy law, another important policy in bankruptcy is the preservation of nonbankruptcy legal rights except to the extent necessary to facilitate the purpose of the bankruptcy proceeding. Absent a clear provision of the Bankruptcy Code modifying a creditor’s nonbankruptcy legal rights, the Court concludes that those rights should be deemed to be left intact.

Now What? If the Bankruptcy Court's decision is followed by other courts, the main question left open in Travelers will have been answered. However, this decision raises some additional issues:

  • Will the potential allowance of post-petition attorney's fees for bankruptcy-related issues impact a debtor's reorganization prospects?
  • What procedures will debtors propose for managing the process as unsecured creditors amend their claims to add attorney's fees incurred in protecting their rights during the course of a bankruptcy case?
  • Will individual unsecured creditors become more active in Chapter 11 cases, particularly in those cases in which a large distribution is likely?
  • What standards will bankruptcy courts use to assess the reasonableness of an unsecured creditor's post-petition attorney's fees for bankruptcy-related issues?  
  • Will claims buyers pay more for unsecured claims based on contracts providing for recovery of post-petition attorney's fees now that bankruptcy-related fees are recoverable?
  • Will creditors be more insistent on including attorney's fees provisions in contracts?

It will be interesting to see how these issues unfold as the impact of this decision, and those of other courts facing this issue, are felt. Stay tuned.

A Second District Court Decides Whether A Trademark License Can Be Assumed In Bankruptcy

Once again, a district court has faced the issue of whether a non-exclusive trademark license can be assumed by a debtor in possession. Before the November 2005 decision in In re: N.C.P. Marketing Group, Inc., 337 B.R. 230 (D.Nev. 2005), no court had directly addressed that question. The decision in the N.C.P. Marketing case, now on appeal to the Ninth Circuit, held that trademark licenses are personal and nonassignable, absent a provision in the trademark license to the contrary, and in a hypothetical test jurisdiction such as the Ninth Circuit, they cannot be assumed by the debtor in possession. For a more detailed discussion on the N.C.P. Marketing case, you may find this post of interest. For an analysis of some recent trends on the broader topic of assumption of IP licenses, try this post.

The Wellington Vision Case. Earlier this year, a second district court, this time the U.S. District Court for the Southern District of Florida, faced the same question in an appeal in the In re Wellington Vision, Inc. Chapter 11 bankruptcy case.

  • Pearle Vision sought relief from the automatic stay to terminate a franchise agreement with Wellington Vision, arguing that Wellington could not assume the agreement because it Included a non-exclusive license of Pearle Vision trademarks.
  • The U.S. Bankruptcy Court for the Southern District of Florida granted the motion for stay relief by this two-page order, holding that the inclusion in the franchise agreement of a trademark license made the agreement, under federal trademark law, non-assignable absent consent by Pearle Vision.

Appeal To The District Court. Wellington Vision filed an appeal from the Bankruptcy Court's decision.

  • In its opening brief, Wellington argued that (1) Pearle Vision had failed to establish that the franchise agreement included a trademark license, (2) a provision in the franchise agreement allowing for assignments on consent that cannot be unreasonably withheld meant that the parties had opted out of applicable law, and (3) Section 365(c)(1) of the Bankruptcy Code only prohibits assumption or assignment by a trustee, not by a debtor in possession, citing the Footstar case.
  • Pearle Vision argued in its answer brief that "applicable law" is the federal Lanham Act, which makes trademark licenses personal and non-assignable, and that Section 365(c)(1) creates a hypothetical test and precludes assignment or assumption of the license.
  • Wellington's reply brief asserted that the District Court should not apply Section 365(c)(1) to debtors in possession and further that it should hold that this license was assignable by its terms.

The District Court's Decision On Appeal. On February 20, 2007, Judge Alan S. Gold of the U.S. District Court for the Southern District of Florida affirmed the Bankruptcy Court's decision in this 14-page decision. The District Court first held that the franchise agreement expressly included a non-exclusive license to certain Pearle Vision trademarks, making the Lanham Act the "applicable law" to be considered under Section 365(c)(1). It then held that the agreement's provisions contemplating assignment under certain conditions did not constitute consent to any specific assignment or an "opt out" of the Lanham Act's general restrictions on assignment, distinguishing In re Quantegy, 326 B.R. 467 (Bankr. M.D. Ala. 2005), relied on by Wellington. Finally, the District Court held that Section 365(c)(1) did apply to debtors in possession and not just to trustees, citing the Eleventh Circuit's decision in City of Jamestown v. James Cable Partners, L.P., 27 F.3d 534 (11th Cir. 1994).

No Further Appeal Has Been Filed. Unlike the N.C.P. Marketing case, the District Court's decision in this case will not be appealed. While the appeal was pending, the Wellington case was converted to a Chapter 7 case. Also, within the past two months litigation between Pearle, Wellington, and a guarantor of certain debt owed to Pearle was settled, resolving the issues decided by the District Court.

Trademark Owners Win Another One. Although it did not cite the N.C.P. Marketing decision, the Wellington Vision court becomes only the second district court to address the assumability of trademark licenses -- and the second to hold that they are not assumable when the hypothetical test applies. This is more good news for trademark owners, who typically want as much control as possible over licenses to their marks, but bad news for debtors, who face the prospect of losing valuable trademark licenses (and franchise agreements including them) if they file bankruptcy. Stay tuned for more developments on this issue, including the Ninth Circuit's decision in N.C.P. Marketing, which is likely still months away.

Special thanks to Warren Agin of the Tech Bankruptcy blog, whose post entitled The Descent Into Darkness Continues, first discussed the Wellington Vision case. The title of that post also gives you a sense of how many bankruptcy lawyers feel about the hypothetical test, its application to IP licenses, and its impact on debtors. 

Are We In A Global Financial Bubble?

The San Francisco Business Times reports in a new article that the CEOs of Bank of America and GMO, a global investment management firm, have both commented recently about what they see going on in the financial and asset markets. Their views are similar to those expressed by the CEO of a major private equity fund, as reported here.

The San Francisco Business Times article quotes Ken Lewis of Bank of America as stating, "We need a little more sanity in a period in which everyone feels invincible and thinks this time is different," and "[w]e are close to a time when we'll look back and say we did some stupid things." A Bloomberg article on his remarks can be found here.

Jeremy Grantham, CEO of GMO, went further and said he believes we are in the first "global bubble" in everything from stocks to junk bonds to land in Panama. His definition of a bubble is also interesting: "Perfect conditions create very strong 'animal spirits' reflected statistically in low risk premium," and "[w]idely available cheap credit offers investors the opportunity to act on their optimism." A version of his comments, published in the Financial Times and available courtesy of MSNBC.com, can be found here.

I can vividly recall a comment made by a highly respected senior corporate attorney shortly before the dot com bubble burst in early 2000. Although he didn't use the term bubble, his description of the way venture funds were rapidly investing in companies and how, in turn, the public equity markets were snapping up shares in IPOs, still rings in my ears: "In thirty years of practice, I have never seen anything like it."

Jeremy Grantham of GMO reminds us that "Every bubble has always burst." It's still hard to tell whether this period is a really a bubble or something short of it, and the recent comments from CEOs and others may be aimed at reducing some of the froth in various asset classes. However, if we actually are in another bubble there's little reason to think the outcome will be "different this time." If so, at some point we may see a new wave of restructurings and Chapter 11 filings.

Third Circuit Shoots Down Plan Confirmation, Finding Improper Gerrymandering

In an interesting decision issued last month in a case called In re Machne Manachem, Inc., the Third Circuit upheld a district court's decision to reverse confirmation of a Chapter 11 plan of reorganization. The decision stemmed from steps taken to obtain votes required for approval of the plan. Before discussing the details, a bit of background on bankruptcy plans and the rules governing voting is in order.

Classes And Plans Of Reorganization. Bankruptcy plans must classify creditors and equity holders into various classes, usually based on the type of debt or equity security they hold or on other characteristics of their claims or interests. Each secured creditor is typically put in a separate class or subclass, bondholders may be put in a separate class based on the bond issue involved, general unsecured creditors may be grouped together in one class, and the claims held by insiders are occasionally put in a separate class.

Voting Requirements For Plans. The Bankruptcy Code spells out the voting rules for Chapter 11 plans of reorganization.

  • Under Section 1129(a)(10) of the Bankruptcy Code, at least one "impaired" class must vote to accept a plan. In the bankruptcy world, "impaired" means that under the plan the holder of the claim or interest will receive treatment that is different (usually worse) than what it would get outside of bankruptcy. This may involve stretching out repayment terms over time, paying less than 100 cents on the dollar, or canceling all shares of prepetition stock.
  • To accept a plan, the tally of votes from the impaired class must meet or exceed two thresholds. Two-thirds in dollar amount and a majority in number of those creditors voting must accept the plan.
  • If these tests are satisfied, as happened in the Third Circuit case, and if other requirements are met, the debtor may be able to "cram down" the plan on the rest of the creditor body, even if other creditors voted to reject the plan. 

A Case Of Gerrymandering. In this case, the plan got the required votes from the impaired class. So what prompted the Court of Appeals to throw out the plan? In short, the Court found that by purchasing a select set of impaired claims, an insider of the debtor gerrymandered the vote in favor of the debtor's plan. The Court ruled that the insider's purchase of four claims in the only impaired class that accepted the plan was done to win the vote of that class. Once they were purchased, those claims were shifted out of the key class and into another class where their votes would not matter. This conduct, the Court held, was improper and "undermined the critical confirmation requirements of the bankruptcy code."

  • Although there was little evidence either way, the Court seem concerned that the vote in that one critical accepting class -- 7 claims accepting and 4 claims rejecting -- could have ended up as 7 claims accepting and 8 claims rejecting if the four purchased claims had stayed in the original class.
  • The Court also found troubling that the purchased claims received less than 100 cents on the dollar, which was the treatment the proposed plan provided for the rest of the creditors in the key class.

Conclusion. Classifying claims into classes for Chapter 11 plans and the voting process are critical aspects of the reorganization process in a business bankruptcy case.  From time to time objecting creditors may accuse the debtor or other plan proponent of gerrymandering those classes to win confirmation, but when the Third Circuit issues a decision finding that improper gerrymandering actually took place, it's a case worth reading.  Special thanks to the Delaware Business Bankruptcy Report for first posting on the case.

A Debt Bubble In Private Equity Deals?

The New York Times DealBook blog has another interesting post on the debt being used to finance private equity deals. This one is entitled "Is Private Equity Riding A Debt Bubble?" It discusses a recent article in the Boston Globe which, among other things, quotes the CEO of a major private equity firm as using the term "debt bubble" to describe the current situation in the debt market.

The Boston Globe article points to low interest rates, large loans relative to the acquired company's cash flow, and the lack of covenants -- sometimes known as "covenant lite" loans -- as driving the phenomenon. Some deals are also being structured with so-called toggle notes, giving the borrower the option to make "payment in kind" or PIK payments -- additional debt instead of cash -- although at a higher interest rate. The absence of significant covenants led the quoted CEO to ask, "How do you default?" 

This DealBook post follows one from last week, reported here, discussing the rising risk level of the debt behind private equity deals. If these generous lending terms are putting us in a "debt bubble," would an economic hard landing burst the bubble and lead to even more defaults, restructurings, and bankruptcies? Time will tell. 

Are Risk Levels Rising For The Debt That's Financing Private Equity Deals?

The New York Times DealBook blog has an interesting post about the risks posed by all the debt that helps fund the many private equity buyouts these days. It points to two articles in the UK press on the topic.

The first article, in the Financial Times, discusses comments by Larry Fink, the CEO of BlackRock, about how increasing levels of debt, lowered risk premiums, and less restrictive lending standards in connection with today's private equity deals may end up creating "tomorrow's problem." A major downturn in the economy could transform buyout debt into distressed debt.

The second article, in The Guardian, reports on the Bank of England's warning about "how quickly credit quality can deteriorate following a period of lax credit standards." Sir John Gieve, one of the Bank of England's deputy governors, is quoted as saying that the "rapid growth in credit risk transfer markets is also making more participants dependent on continuous market liquidity and could amplify the impact of a sharp reversal in credit spreads from their current low levels."

In addition, an increasing amount of corporate debt now involves second lien loans, and out-of-court restructurings and bankruptcy cases could be noticeably more complex.  Although neither article suggests that defaults are about to spike, the perspectives offered about how quickly that could change -- if economic conditions turn for the worse -- makes for interesting reading. 

In Important New Ruling, New York Bankruptcy Court Applies Prior Lien Defense To Post-BAPCPA Reclamation Claims

On Thursday, April 19, 2007, in perhaps only the second decision on reclamation since the Bankruptcy Abuse Prevention and Consumer Protection Act (BAPCPA) took effect in October 2005, Judge Burton R. Lifland of the U.S. Bankruptcy Court for the Southern District of New York issued this Memorandum Decision in the In re Dana Corporation Chapter 11 bankruptcy case. Employing an analysis similar to that of Judge Sontchi in his January 2007 decision in In re Advanced Marketing Services, Inc. (discussed in this post), Judge Lifland valued all pending reclamation claims in the Dana Corporation case at zero, effectively denying them in their entirety.

A Quick Primer On Reclamation Under BAPCPA. Section 546(c) of the Bankruptcy Code, as amended by BAPCPA, gives vendors the ability to assert a reclamation claim for goods received by a debtor in the 45 days prior to the bankruptcy filing. In addition to extending the reclamation period to 45 days, BAPCPA also added a provision in Section 546(c) making reclamation claims "subject to the prior rights of a holder of a security interest in such goods or the proceeds thereof." This quoted language refers to a secured creditor with a prior senior lien in the same goods, a defense to reclamation often referred to as the "Prior Lien Defense." (For more details on reclamation claims, both before and after a bankruptcy is filed, you may find this earlier post on reclamation of interest.)

The Reclamation Claims Process. As is typical in large Chapter 11 cases, a reclamation procedure was established in the Dana Corporation case. After setting a deadline for the filing of reclamation claims, the following events unfolded:

  • As debtor and debtor in possession, Dana Corporation filed a motion seeking bifurcation of the Prior Lien Defense from the more fact-based defenses it also intended to advance.
  • The Bankruptcy Court granted the motion and entered this bifurcation order, which separated out the Prior Lien Defense for discovery, briefing, and decision while staying discovery and other efforts relating to the remaining defenses.
  • The debtor then filed an initial brief on the Prior Lien Defense and related arguments, asserting that the scores of reclamation claims filed by creditors all were "subject to" pre-existing liens on the goods in question, rendering the reclamation claims valueless. Relying on the pre-BAPCPA case of In re Dairy Mart Convenience Stores, Inc., 302 B.R. 128 (Bankr. S.D.N.Y. 2003), the debtor argued that the use of DIP financing with liens on the goods in question to satisfy prepetition loans meant that those goods were effectively disposed of, were not subject to reclamation, and that reclamation claims based on them were valueless.
  • Many reclamation claimants filed objections to the debtor's motion (this objection is representative of the types of arguments advanced). They contended that reclamation claims are valueless only if the goods sought to be reclaimed are actually used to pay the lien of the secured creditor to which they are "subject." Relying on In re Phar-Mor, Inc., 301 B.R. 482, 497 (Bankr.N.D. Ohio 2003), amended on rehearing, 2003 Bankr. LEXIS 2009 (Bankr.N.D.Ohio Dec. 18, 2003), they argued that the prepetition loans were repaid with funds from the DIP loans, not from liquidation of the goods subject to the reclamation claims.
  • The debtor then filed this reply brief, again arguing that Dairy Mart is still good law and that its principles made all reclamation claims valueless in this case.

The Dana Corporation Decision. In his 21-page decision, Judge Lifland made two important rulings. First, he addressed whether amended Section 546(c) creates a new federal common law of reclamation or whether it still relies on the Uniform Commercial Code and other state law:

The Reclamation Claimants contend that the deletion of the reference to state law in the amended section 546(c) no longer incorporates the state law right of reclamation, and instead creates a brand new federal bankruptcy law right. I disagree.

*           *           *

It is not a section dedicated to granting an independent federal right of reclamation nor does it create a coherent comprehensive federal scheme for reclamation. First, Congress did not use the language of creation - Congress did not say that “a seller may reclaim goods when....”

*          *          *

Moreover, if amended section 546(c) was a new federal reclamation right arising under the Bankruptcy Code, it would not be subject to the avoiding powers. [footnote omitted]

Second, having concluded that amended Section 546(c) did not supplant existing reclamation law, Judge Lifland examined Phar-Mor, Dairy Mart, and related case law and ruled that the Prior Lien Defense made the reclamation claims valueless in this case:

Here, the prepetition collateral, including the reclaimed goods, was subject to the Prepetition Lien. Pursuant to the Interim DIP Order, the Debtors were authorized to use the Prepetition Lenders’ cash collateral, with the Replacement Lien providing a replacement security interest in all of the Debtors collateral subject to the DIP Lien, including the prepetition collateral and the proceeds thereof. The DIP Lien granted to the DIP Lenders pursuant to the Interim DIP Order and the Final DIP Order, provided a security interest in, and lien upon, all of the collateral constituting the prepetition collateral. Thus the lien chain continued unbroken. Cf. Dairy Mart, 302 B.R. at 184 (holding that the transaction of releasing the prepetition lien and simultaneously granting the lien to the post-petition lender, must be viewed as an integrated transaction). The grant of the DIP Lien was a necessary condition of the DIP Lenders’ agreement to enter into the DIP Facility. Pursuant to the Final DIP Order, the Prepetition Indebtedness was refinanced and paid off using the proceeds of the DIP Facility on the payoff date. Because the reclaimed goods or the proceeds thereof were either liquidated in satisfaction of the Prepetition Indebtedness or pledged to the DIP Lenders pursuant to the DIP Facility, the reclaimed goods effectively were disposed as part of the March 2006 repayment of the Prepetition Credit Facility. Accordingly, the Reclamation Claims are valueless as the goods remained subject to the Prior Lien Defense.

Recognizing Another BAPCPA Change: Section 503(b)(9)'s New Administrative Claim. Although the Bankruptcy Court was considering only BAPCPA's amended Section 546(c) and reclamation claims, the decision makes several comments about the impact of another of BAPCPA's changes, the new "20 day goods" administrative claim. (A February 2007 update post described the first few decisions on this new Section 503(b)(9) administrative claim.) These include the following: 

The issues before the Court today relate solely to the Prior Lien Defense to reclamation rights under section 546(c) of the Bankruptcy Code and not to the rights to an administrative expense under the newly enacted section 503(b)(9) of the Bankruptcy Code. This new provision presents other issues concerning, inter alia, the valuing of the subject goods; what constitutes the actual receipt of the goods; how is the claim asserted; when is it to be paid; is it subject to the claims processing and omnibus bar date orders, etc.? These issues will not, and need not, be parsed here. Suffice it to say that in light of the section 503(b)(9) amendment, section 546(c) is no longer an exclusive remedy for a prepetition seller.

*         *          *

In addition, amended 546(c) provides for an administrative claim: "If a seller of goods fails to provide notice in the manner described in paragraph (1), the seller still may assert the rights contained in section 503(b)(9)." 11 U.S.C. § 546(c)(2). New section 503(b)(9) in turn allows the seller an administrative expense claim equal to "the value of any goods received by the debtor within 20 days before the date of commencement of a case under this title in which the goods have been sold to the debtor in the ordinary course of such debtor's business." 11 U.S.C. § 503(b)(9). There is no shortage of commentary on the interplay of sections 503(b)(9) and 546(c).5

[Footnote 5]

With the introduction of section 503(b)(9) priority, reclamation claims under amended section 546(c) have decreased importance because goods delivered to a debtor in the 20 days prior to bankruptcy will have automatic priority. Thus, reclamation rights are now mainly beneficial for goods delivered in the 21 to 45 days prior to the bankruptcy filing under amended section 546(c). However, with the expansion of the reclamation period, the likelihood of early administrative insolvency will increase, and debtor companies will need greater financial resources to reorganize. See Charles J. Shaw and Brent Weisenberg, Effect of a Preexisting Security Interest in the Debtor’s Inventory on the Rights of Reclamation Creditors, 2005 Norton Ann. Surv. Of Bankr. Law Part I §15 (Sept. 2006) (hereinafter “Norton Survey”).

Where Does This Decision Leave Creditors And Debtors? While valuing all reclamation claims at zero, Judge Lifland was careful to mention the existence of the new administrative claim for goods delivered to the debtor in the 20 days prior to the bankruptcy. This comment is significant and reveals how BAPCPA has changed the old reclamation equation. While the jury is certainly still out, the early post-BAPCPA reclamation decisions in Advanced Marketing Services (Delaware) and Dana Corporation (Southern District of New York) suggest that creditors may have even more difficulty establishing reclamation claims. If so, instead of reclamation, the new 20 day goods administrative claim may turn out to be the more valuable right for creditors -- and the more costly obligation for debtors -- in this post-BAPCPA world.

Scotia Pacific Court Rules On Motion To Compel Group Of Hedge Funds To Disclose Their Trading Details

In February and March of this year, Judge Allan L. Gropper of the U.S. Bankruptcy Court for the Southern District of New York, presiding over the Northwest Airlines Chapter 11 case, required an ad hoc committee of hedge funds and other stockholders to disclose publicly full details of their trades in Northwest Airlines claims and stock. This was big news because hedge funds and other distressed debt investors carefully guard their trading data. The decision raised questions about whether these very active parties would continue to form ad hoc committees, choose to act independently, or limit their participation in bankruptcy cases altogether.

The Big Question: Would Other Courts Follow Northwest Airlines? As with most new decisions of note, this one had many people wondering whether other courts would follow it and require ad hoc committees to make such disclosures. This week we got the first answer to that question, albeit in a somewhat different context, in the Scotia Pacific Company LLC (Scopac) Chapter 11 case pending in Corpus Christi, Texas. The Scopac court's answer: not in its case. Keep reading below to see how the court got to that decision.

A Bit Of Background. First, for those new to the disclosure issue, you can read more about it in a series of earlier posts on this blog (here, here, here, here, and here). If you follow the links in this sentence you can also find copies of Judge Gropper's first decision requiring the disclosure and second decision refusing to allow the information to be filed under seal. Both decisions were based on Federal Rule of Bankruptcy Procedure 2019(a). As a reminder, here's the key part of Rule 2019(a):

[E]very entity or committee representing more than one creditor or equity security holder . . .  shall file a verified statement setting forth (1) the name and address of the creditor or equity security holder; (2) the nature and amount of the claim or interest and the time of acquisition thereof unless it is alleged to have been acquired more than one year prior to the filing of the petition; (3) a recital of the pertinent facts and circumstances in connection with the employment of the entity . . . ; and (4) . . . the amounts of claims or interests owned by the entity, the members of the committee or the indenture trustee, the times when acquired, the amounts paid therefor, and any sales or other disposition thereof.

Scopac's Rule 2019 Motion. With that background, here's the Scopac disclosure story. Not long after the Northwest Airlines decisions, Scopac filed a motion to compel an Ad Hoc Group Of Timber Noteholders (which originally called itself an Ad Hoc Committee and now refers to itself as the Noteholder Group) to file an amended version of its previously filed Rule 2019 statement. Relying on the Northwest Airlines decisions, Scopac argued that the Noteholder Group should be required to file detailed information about the amounts of the claims or stock owned by the Group's members, when they acquired it, how much they paid for it, and when they sold or otherwise disposed of any of their holdings.

The Noteholder Group's Objection. The Noteholder Group objected to the motion, arguing that it was merely a group of noteholders and not a "committee" as that term is used in Rule 2019. Specifically, it said that it didn't represent or purport to represent any noteholders beyond those who were already members of the Noteholder Group. The Noteholder Group also contended that, even if it were a committee, the purpose of the rule is to protect others in the class it represents and here any non-member noteholders were welcome to join the group directly.

Friends Of The Court Join In. As they had in the Northwest Airlines case, the Securities Industry and Financial Markets Association (SIFMA) and the Loan Syndications and Trading Association (LSTA) filed an amici curiae "friend of the court" brief in opposition to the Scopac Rule 2019 motion. They argued that forcing disclosure of trading details would have a detrimental impact on the market for the debt and securities of distressed companies and the willingness and ability of sophisticated parties to participate in Chapter 11 cases.

Scopac's Reply. Scopac filed this reply arguing that the Noteholder Group, which originally called itself an "Ad Hoc Committee" and only began to describe itself as an informal "group" after the motion was filed, was a Rule 2019(a) committee and should be compelled to make additional disclosure. Scopac also argued that the Noteholder Group was acting as a representative and thus fit squarely within the rule's requirements.

The Scopac Court's Rule 2019 Order. On Wednesday, April 18, 2007, Judge Richard S. Schmidt of the U.S. Bankruptcy Court for the Southern District of Texas issued this order denying Scopac's motion to compel disclosure of the details of trades in Scopac's secured timber notes. In his two-page order, Judge Schmidt ruled that the Noteholder Group was not a "committee" within the meaning of Rule 2019 and, as such, the disclosure requirements of that rule did not apply. The DealBook blog on the New York Times website reported on the decision here.

What's Next? The Scopac decision represents a step back from the Rule 2019 view taken by the Northwest Airlines court, but for at least two reasons the issue remains far from settled. First, the Noteholder Group in Scopac successfully argued that it was not a committee at all because it didn't represent anyone other than its own members. This apparently persuaded the Scopac court to draw a distinction between the Noteholder Group and the Ad Hoc Committee in Northwest Airlines. It's unclear whether other courts would do the same. Second, many more large Chapter 11 cases are filed in the Southern District of New York than in Texas these days. As a result, Judge Gropper's decision may have a bigger impact on future cases than the Scopac decision. That said, we'll have to wait for additional cases to see which of these two approaches courts find more consistent with the language and purpose of Rule 2019.

Assumption Of Intellectual Property Licenses In Bankruptcy: Are Recent Cases Tilting Toward Debtors?

Executory contracts present a host of interesting issues in bankruptcy cases. This is especially true when the executory contract involves a license of intellectual property (or "IP"). In the past I've devoted several posts to the topic, including how IP licenses are treated in bankruptcy and the unique issues presented when a trademark licensee or trademark licensor files bankruptcy. 

In this post, I'll drill down a bit deeper into the question of how courts have analyzed whether a Chapter 11 debtor can assume or assign an IP license to a third party over the IP licensor's objection. If you're new to the topic, be forewarned: the courts are all over the map on the issue. For those who'd like a scorecard, you'll find a link to a circuit-by-circuit chart in the "Where Does Your Court Stand?" section toward the end of this post.

Assumption And Assignment. In bankruptcy parlance, assumption means that the debtor gets to keep the license. Usually, debtors are allowed to exercise their business judgment when deciding whether to assume or reject (read: breach and stop performing) an executory contract, as well as to assume and assign one to a third party. However, Section 365(c)(1) of the Bankruptcy Code puts a limit on a debtor's ability to assign executory contracts, and perhaps even to assume them, when "applicable law" gives the non-debtor party to the contract the right to refuse to deal with someone else.

The Key Bankruptcy Code Section. Since Section 365(c)(1) is so important to this debate, it bears careful review. Here's what it says:

(c) The trustee may not assume or assign any executory contract or unexpired lease of the debtor, whether or not such contract or lease prohibits or restricts assignment of rights or delegation of duties, if—

(1)(A) applicable law excuses a party, other than the debtor, to such contract or lease from accepting performance from or rendering performance to an entity other than the debtor or the debtor in possession, whether or not such contract or lease prohibits or restricts assignment of rights or delegation of duties; and

(B) such party does not consent to such assumption or assignment.

What's "Applicable Law?" Collectively, a number of courts have interpreted the phrase "applicable law" to mean patent, copyright, and trademark law, holding that these federal intellectual property laws excuse a non-debtor party to an IP license from accepting performance from or rendering performance to an entity other than the debtor in bankruptcy. As a result, these courts have held that an IP licensor who does not consent can successfully block a debtor from assigning a patent, copyright, or trademark license to a third party during a bankruptcy case. This rule applies with greatest force to non-exclusive IP licenses but may also apply to certain exclusive licenses too. For more on this subject, read Professor Menell's article on the bankruptcy treatment of IP assets, which I discussed last month.

What Constitutes Consent? Consent to assumption or assignment of an IP license can come in three ways. First, the licensor can affirmatively consent in writing after a bankruptcy case has been filed. Second, a licensor that fails to object after a motion has been filed seeking to assume, or to assume and assign, a license agreement will likely be deemed to have consented. Third, a number of license agreements expressly permit assignment under certain circumstances and many, but not all, courts will treat such provisions as providing the consent required under Section 365(c)(1)(B). A provision sometimes found in license agreements allows assignment in conjunction with a sale of all or substantially all of the assets of the licensee. Warren Agin of the Tech Bankruptcy blog wrote about a recent Massachusetts case (in which I represented the buyer) enforcing a similar provision.

Hypothetical Versus Actual Test. If a debtor cannot assign an IP license without consent of the licensor, can it at least assume the license? That question has led courts to examine ever so closely the first seven words of Section 365(c): "The trustee may not assume or assign..." 

  • When the statute says that the trustee may not assume or assign an IP license, does the word "or" really mean "and" too?
  • Put differently, what happens when a debtor is only trying to assume (keep) an IP license and is not actually trying to assign it? Does the Bankruptcy Code language mean that it can neither assume nor assign the license or does it only mean that the debtor cannot assign the license?
  • That, in a nutshell, is the difference between the so-called "hypothetical test" (which reads Section 365(c)(1)'s language as asking whether the debtor hypothetically could assign the license even if it's only proposing to assume it) and the "actual test" (which interprets the statute's language as asking only what the debtor is actually proposing to do).
  • The U.S. Courts of Appeals for three circuits have adopted the hypothetical test. The Ninth Circuit (covering California, Arizona, and a number of other Western states), the Third Circuit (which includes Delaware, the venue of many Chapter 11 cases), and the Fourth Circuit (covering Virginia, West Virginia, Maryland, and North and South Carolina), have held that Section 365(c)(1) gives most IP licensors a veto right over proposals by a Chapter 11 debtor to assign -- and even to assume -- IP licenses.
  • The leading hypothetical test decision is from the Ninth Circuit in In re Catapult Entertainment, Inc.,165 F.3d 747 (9th Cir. 1999). In Catapult, the court built on an earlier decision holding that a non-exclusive patent license could not be assigned without the patent holder's consent and, adopting the hypothetical test, held that such a patent license also could not be assumed over the patent holder's objection.
  • Leading the charge for the actual test is the First Circuit's decision in Institut Pasteur, et al. v. Cambridge Biotech Corporation, 104 F.3d 489 (1st Cir. 1997). That circuit includes Massachusetts, among other states.

A Third Test From New York. Despite this predominantly licensor-favorable backdrop, in several recent decisions courts have sided with Chapter 11 debtors. This emerging trend is noteworthy because two of those decisions come from the Southern District of New York. That's where many of the largest Chapter 11 bankruptcy cases tend to be filed, such as Enron, WorldCom, Delphi Corporation, Dana Corporation, Northwest Airlines, and Delta Airlines, to name a few, making it perhaps the most important bankruptcy court in the country.

The New York Cases: Footstar And Adelphia. In a 2005 decision in In re Footstar, Inc., 323 B.R. 566 (Bankr. S.D.N.Y. 2005), the Bankruptcy Court for the Southern District of New York broke new ground. Although it did not involve intellectual property licenses, the case put Section 365(c)(1)'s language front and center and came up with a third way of analyzing this critical section. Judge Adlai Hardin adopted a new "literal" reading of section 365(c)(1), one that he found was "entirely harmonious with both the objective sought to be obtained in Section 365(c)(1) and the overall objectives of the Bankruptcy Code, without construing 'or' to mean 'and.'" His approach? Section 365(c)(1)'s use of the word "trustee" does not (as other courts had taken for granted) include the debtor or debtor in possession. As such, the right of the non-debtor party to object to assignment does not by itself affect the right of the debtor in possession (as opposed to a trustee) to assume an executory contract.

In January 2007, Judge Robert Gerber, also of the Bankruptcy Court for the Southern District of New York, faced the same issue in the Adelphia Communications Chapter 11 case. In his decision on the Section 365(c)(1) issue, Judge Gerber expressly rejected the cases following the "hypothetical" test as "incorrectly decided," and instead embraced Judge Hardin's Footstar decision, describing it as "consistent in outcome with the decisions of" those courts following the "actual" theory. In a footnote, Judge Gerber stated: "[W]here there is no Second Circuit authority, [the Bankruptcy Court for the Southern District of New York] follows the decisions of other bankruptcy judges in this district in the absence of clear error. But to say that the Footstar decisions should be followed under that standard would be faint praise here. In this Court's view, Judge Hardin's analysis in those decisions was plainly correct." This suggests that other judges in the Southern District of New York may follow suit, at least unless the Second Circuit were to rule otherwise.

For a detailed analysis of the Footstar decision, be sure to read the article by Cooley Godward Kronish partners Jay Indyke and Richard Kanowitz, and associate Brent Weisenberg, who were directly involved in the case, which appears in the April 2007 issue of the Journal of Bankruptcy Law and Practice. It's called “Ending the Hypothetical’ vs.‘Actual’ Test Debate: A New Way to Read Section 365(c)(1),” 16 J. BANKR. L. & PRAC. 2 Art. 2 (2007).

Another Circuit Follows The Actual Test. The Fifth Circuit (covering Texas, Louisiana, and Mississippi) also jumped into the fray, albeit interpreting a different but related section, Section 365(e), with its February 2006 decision in Bonneville Power Administration v. Mirant Corp., 440 F.3d 238 (5th Cir. 2006). Upon the Chapter 11 bankruptcy of Mirant Corporation, the Bonneville Power Administration (BPA) attempted to terminate its executory contract with Mirant based on an ipso facto clause, a provision that makes a bankruptcy filing a breach of contract. While these provisions generally are not enforced, the BPA relied on Section 365(e)(2)(A), which closely mirrors the language of Section 365(c)(1)(A), and argued that it could terminate the contract because applicable law -- the federal Anti-Assignment Act, 41 U.S.C. Section 15 -- excused it from accepting performance from or rendering performance to an entity other than the debtor or debtor in possession. After a lengthy analysis, the Fifth Circuit joined the First Circuit (rejecting the position of the Third, Fourth and Ninth Circuits) and expressly adopted the "actual" test. The Fifth Circuit held that the ipso facto clause was null and void under Section 365(e)(1) because Mirant, the debtor in possession, was not actually planning to assign the contract. For a more detailed discussion of the case, be sure to check out Steve Jakubowski's excellent post over at the Bankruptcy Litigation Blog.

Where Does Your Court Stand? With courts coming out on different sides of the hypothetical versus actual test issue, and with the Footstar and Adelphia courts advancing yet another view of Section 365(c)(1), you might be looking for a chart to keep up with all the decisions. Well, as part of a presentation I made last month to the Commercial Law and Bankruptcy Section of the Bar Association of San Francisco (and with a big assist from Brian Byun, an associate in the Bankruptcy & Restructuring Group at my firm who also contributed to this blog post), we put together just such a circuit-by-circuit chart of the various decisions. You may find this circuit map useful when reviewing the chart. 

How Often Does This Come Up? The answer is frequently. Most corporate debtors have critical in-licenses of intellectual property and either need to assume them or, as part of a Section 363 asset sale, assume and assign them to the buyer. IP licensors are understandably protective of their intellectual property. Still, even when they have the right to object to assumption or assignments, in my experience many IP licensors will agree to allow debtors to assume, and sometimes even to assign to a buyer, important licenses. There may be an added cost, either in the form of a fee or the imposition of conditions to protect the licensor's rights. That said, not all licensors will consent to assumption or assignment. In hypothetical test jurisdictions, debtor licensees may end up losing their license rights.

Location, Location, Location. This phrase is most often associated with real estate, but it could just as well apply to the venue of a bankruptcy case when assumption of an IP license is at issue. A debtor's ability to assume an IP license over the objection of the licensor can be radically different depending upon where the bankruptcy case is pending. Perhaps the developing circuit split over Section 365(c)(1) will lead the U.S. Supreme Court to agree to take up the issue. Until that happens, or Congress amends the law, what a debtor can do with its IP licenses will continue to depend, in no small part, on where it files bankruptcy. 

Proof Of Claim And Other Bankruptcy Forms Revised To Reflect April 1, 2007 Dollar Amount Adjustments

As reported in this post last month, certain dollar amounts in the Bankruptcy Code were increased effective April 1, 2007. The dollar amount changes meant that some of the official bankruptcy forms, most notably the proof of claim form and the voluntary petition, had to be revised as well.

After I put up that post, the Administrative Office of the United States Courts (known in the trade as "the AO") made the revised forms available and released a formal notice of the dollar amount adjustments. Copies of the revised forms -- with handy arrows pointing out each place where they were revised -- are attached to the notice.

Of course, you'll need to get the forms in blank to use in bankruptcy cases. If you don't have special bankruptcy form software, a number of the official bankruptcy forms have been designed to allow you to type in information or select choices from drop-down menus before printing the form. Printing is the only way to go because the form won't let you save your changes. 

If you follow the links above you'll be able to access blank copies of the revised forms from the AO's website. That way, you'll be sure to have the most up-to-date versions.

Defending A Preference: Ninth Circuit Holds That Even First Time Transactions Can Be In The "Ordinary Course"

In a decision issued on April 3, 2007 in the In re: Ahaza Systems, Inc. case, the Ninth Circuit held that even first time transactions can qualify for the "ordinary course of business" defense to preferences. A copy of the Court of Appeal's decision is available here.

The Bankruptcy Preference. As a quick refresher, preferences are payments or other transfers made in the 90 days prior to a bankruptcy filing, on account of antecedent or pre-existing debt, at a time when the debtor was insolvent, that allow the transferee (the preference defendant) to be "preferred" by recovering more than it would have had the transfer not been made and the defendant instead had simply filed a proof of claim for the amount involved. The 90-day reachback period is extended to a full year prior to the bankruptcy petition for insiders such as officers, directors, and affiliates.

Pre-BAPCPA Statute. The ordinary course of business defense, designed to protect parties who engage in normal transactions with a financially troubled business, is one of the most common defenses available to preference recipients. The Ninth Circuit examined it under the version of the preference statute, Section 547 of the Bankruptcy Code, as it existed before the 2005 amendments made in the Bankruptcy Abuse Prevention and Consumer Protection Act of 2005 (known as BAPCPA). This pre-BAPCPA statute, specifically Section 547(c)(2), provided that a trustee could not avoid a transfer as a preference

to the extent that such transfer was —

(A) in payment of a debt incurred by the debtor in the ordinary course of business or financial affairs of the debtor and the transferee;

(B) made in the ordinary course of business or financial affairs of the debtor and the transferee; and

(C) made according to ordinary business terms.

The Court's focus was on subsection (A), the "debt" issue. Usually, parties have a series of contracts or purchase orders, as well as a payment history, that gives context to the ordinary course of business between them. In this case, however, the transaction that led to the allegedly preferential payments was their first one. The Court faced the question of whether a debt can be considered as having been incurred in the ordinary course of business of the debtor and the preference defendant when there had been no other past transactions to which it could be compared.

Court Looks To Past Practices With Other Similar Parties. The Court's answer was yes, holding that a preference defendant can indeed assert the ordinary course of business defense involving a debt created by the first contract or transaction between the parties. However, the Ninth Circuit articulated a special rule when a "first time" debt is involved:

[W]hen we have no past debt between the parties with which to compare the challenged one, the instant debt should be compared to the debt agreements into which we would expect the debtor and creditor to enter as part of their ordinary business operations. Consistent with Food Catering [971 F.2d 396 (9th Cir. 1982)], however, this analysis should be as specific to the actual parties as possible. Thus, we hold that to fulfill § 547(c)(2)(A), a first-time debt must be ordinary in relation to this debtor’s and this creditor’s past practices when dealing with other, similarly situated parties. Only if a party has never engaged in similar transactions would we consider more generally whether the debt is similar to what we would expect of similarly situated parties, where the debtor is not sliding into bankruptcy.

Both Original And Restructured Agreements Are Relevant. On a related point, since the first transaction here was an agreement that was later restructured to give the debtor more time to pay, the Ninth Circuit also held that both the original and revised agreement should be evaluated for ordinariness.

Ruling Still Important Under BAPCPA. BAPCPA revised the ordinary course of business defense so that Section 547(c)(2) now provides that a payment or other transfer cannot be avoided

to the extent that such transfer was in payment of a debt incurred by the debtor in the ordinary course of business or financial affairs of the debtor and the transferee, and such transfer was—

(A) made in the ordinary course of business or financial affairs of the debtor and the transferee; or

(B) made according to ordinary business terms.

Although different, the current statute still makes the issue decided in the In re: Ahaza Systems case, whether the debt was incurred in the ordinary course of business, a requirement. The major change is that the statute now allows the defense to be established by additionally showing that payments were made either (A) in the ordinary course of business of the parties or (B) according to ordinary business terms, rather than both as under the pre-BAPCPA version.

How Hard To Meet? Having established the new test, the Court then reversed the granting of summary judgment to the defendant because it found the proof presented was inadequate. This suggests that although the Ninth Circuit will permit preference defendants to assert the ordinary course of business defense on first time transactions, some defendants may face a challenge in meeting that standard.

New Article On How Distressed Debt Investors Are Preparing For The Next Economic Downturn

The DealBook blog from the New York Times has an interesting post entitled "Stocking Up For A Storm." It describes how certain investment banks have been expanding their distressed debt businesses, believing that the length of the current "good times" period may actually lead to an increase in the level of distress when the economy finally turns. 

The DealBook post points readers to a new article in The Economist on so-called vulture investors. Entitled "The Vultures Take Wing," the article discusses the view of many investors and insolvency professionals that, after a drought of restructurings, a new wave of bankruptcies and defaults may not be too far off. When the problems come, they will likely be even more complex than in past cycles. Not only have very active hedge funds taken a much greater role in recent years, but many companies now have an additional tranche of secured debt in the form of the increasingly popular second lien loans.

While corporate restructurings and Chapter 11 bankruptcy cases have always been complex, when the next surge in defaults hits these trends are likely to present even more challenges -- and perhaps opportunities -- for both debtors and creditors.

Northwest Airlines Ad Hoc Committee Files Second Appeal On Disclosure Of Trading Details

As reported last week, the Ad Hoc Committee of Equity Security Holders in the Northwest Airlines case, a group made up chiefly of hedge funds, recently complied with the Bankruptcy Court's earlier orders and filed a Rule 2019 statement disclosing details of their trades. Having made the filing, it wasn't clear whether the Ad Hoc Committee would continue to appeal from the Bankruptcy Court's decisions compelling the disclosure. An answer to that question came late in the day on Monday, March 26.

New Appeal Filed. Late Monday, the remaining membership of the Ad Hoc Committee of Equity Security Holders filed a second notice of appeal, this time from the Bankruptcy Court's original February 26, 2007 decision requiring the detailed statement to be filed. A copy of the new notice of appeal is available here. An earlier notice of appeal was filed from the Bankruptcy Court's March 9, 2007 order denying a motion to file the Rule 2019 statement under seal. It appears that the earlier appeal will be pursued as well.

No Stay Pending Appeal. As previously reported, at a March 15, 2007 hearing the Bankruptcy Court also denied the Ad Hoc Committee's motion for a stay pending appeal. However, the Ad Hoc Committee got until March 25, 2007 to seek a stay from the United States District Court for the Southern District of New York. (Here's the Bankruptcy Court's order on the stay issue, which was filed only last Friday.) Despite the temporary reprieve, the Ad Hoc Committee apparently decided against seeking a stay pending appeal and instead went ahead and filed the updated Rule 2019 statement and then a new appeal.

The Disclosure Issue Moves To Another Court. With the new appeal filed Monday, this issue should be headed to the District Court for briefing and argument in the coming months. It'll be interesting to see whether the District Court, sitting as an appellate court, has any different reaction to the disclosure issue. Stay tuned for future developments.

A Smaller Ad Hoc Committee Of Hedge Funds Discloses Trading Information In Northwest Airlines

As reported last week, the Bankruptcy Court in the Northwest Airlines Chapter 11 bankruptcy case ordered the Ad Hoc Committee of Equity Security Holders to make public detailed information about the claims and stock they own and the amounts they paid for them. For those who missed it, here's the Bankruptcy Court's first decision on the Rule 2019 disclosure issue back on February 26, 2007. If you want the full story on the hedge fund disclosure issue, check out these two earlier posts, which you can find here and here.

Ad Hoc Committee Discloses Trades. After failing to persuade the Bankruptcy Court to reconsider its decision or to allow the disclosure to be filed under seal, a noticeably smaller Ad Hoc Committee filed this Rule 2019 disclosure on Wednesday, March 21, 2007, providing details on the amounts of claims or stock held, the dates purchased, and the amounts paid. The Ad Hoc Committee's membership appears to have been reduced by at least four, currently standing at nine, although the Rule 2019 statement does not explain the change in membership or include any disclosure by the former members.

Although Smaller, Ad Hoc Committee Is Still Intact. The filing answers at least one question -- whether the hedge funds involved would decide to disband the ad hoc committee to avoid disclosing their trading information. While four dropped out, it seems that the nine remaining Ad Hoc Committee members concluded that the benefits of collective action outweighed the burdens of making the required disclosure.

Appeal Status Unclear. The Ad Hoc Committee had previously filed a notice of appeal from the Bankruptcy Court's decision, seeking review by the United States District Court for the Southern District of New York. With the disclosure actually filed, it's not clear whether the Ad Hoc Committee plans to drop the appeal and an accompanying motion for leave to appeal, which it had originally filed in the Bankruptcy Court, and whether the appeal would be moot if continued. Should the Ad Hoc Committee or its former members pursue the appeal effort, I'll post updates as developments warrant. 

The U.S. Supreme Court Rejects The Fobian Rule Barring Unsecured Creditors From Recovering Attorney's Fees In Bankruptcy Cases

Attorney's Fees And Unsecured Claims. For more than 15 years, creditors in the Ninth Circuit who sought to include in unsecured claims amounts for attorney's fees incurred post-petition litigating bankruptcy issues have had that portion of their claims disallowed. The reason? A decision by the United States Court of Appeals for the Ninth Circuit in a 1991 case called In re Fobian, 951 F.2d 1149 (9th Cir. 1991).  

The Fobian Rule. In In re Fobian, the Ninth Circuit held that even if the parties' underlying contract provided for the prevailing party to recover attorney's fees, "where the litigated issues involve not basic contract enforcement questions, but issues peculiar to federal bankruptcy law, attorney's fees will not be awarded absent bad faith or harassment by the losing party." 

The Supreme Court Overrules Fobian. That all changed on Tuesday, March 20, 2007, with the U.S. Supreme Court's unanimous decision in Travelers Casualty & Surety Co. of America v. Pacific Gas & Electric Co. (click here for the decision). Neither Travelers nor PG&E sought to defend the Fobian rule, and the Supreme Court had little problem disposing of it:

The Fobian rule finds no support in the Bankruptcy Code, either in §502 or elsewhere. In Fobian, the court did not identify any provision of the Bankruptcy Code as providing support for the new rule. See 951 F. 2d, at 1153. Instead, the court cited three of its own prior decisions, In re Johnson, 756 F. 2d 738 (1985); In re Coast Trading Co., 744 F.2d 686 (1984); and In re Fulwiler, 624 F. 2d 908 (1980) (per curium). Significantly, in none of those cases did the court identify any basis for disallowing a contractual claim for attorney’s fees incurred litigating issues of federal bankruptcy law. Nor did the court have occasion to do so; in each of those cases, the claim for attorney’s fees failed as a matter of state law. See Johnson, supra, at 741–742; Coast Trading, supra, at 693; Fulwiler, supra, at 910. [footnote omitted]

The absence of textual support is fatal for the Fobian rule. Consistent with our prior statements regarding creditors’ entitlements in bankruptcy, see, e.g., Raleigh, 530 U.S., at 20, we generally presume that claims enforceable under applicable state law will be allowed in bankruptcy unless they are expressly disallowed. See 11 U. S. C. §502(b). Neither the court below nor PG&E has offered any reason why the fact that the attorney’s fees in this case were incurred litigating issues of federal bankruptcy law overcomes that presumption.

An Important But Undecided Question. Although the Supreme Court dispatched the Fobian rule, it remanded the case without deciding whether Travelers, an unsecured creditor, could actually recover its attorney's fees. Instead, the Supreme Court held that the remaining arguments had not been raised below. Still to be resolved is whether Section 506(b) of the Bankruptcy Code, which expressly allows attorney's fees to oversecured creditors, means that creditors cannot recover attorney's fees as part of an unsecured claim. For a flavor of the Supreme Court's reactions to this open issue, you may find the transcript of the oral argument, held in January 2007, interesting .

Thanks to the Supreme Court of the United States Blog and the Georgia Bankruptcy Law Blog for first reporting on the decision.

No Fooling: Bankruptcy Code Dollar Amounts Will Increase On April 1st

Although it hasn't gotten much publicity, certain dollar amounts in the Bankruptcy Code will be increased for cases filed on or after April 1, 2007. You can find a chart listing all of the changes on this Federal Register page, which printed last month's official notice from the Judicial Conference of the United States

Among the most meaningful for business bankruptcy cases:

  • The total amount of claims required to file an involuntary petition increases to $13,475 from $12,300;
  • The employee compensation priority under Section 507(a)(4) increases to $10,950 from the $10,000 level established by the Bankruptcy Abuse Prevention and Consumer Protection Act (known as BAPCPA);
  • The consumer deposit priority under Section 507(a)(7) increases to $2,425 from $2,225;
  • The dollar amount in the bankruptcy venue provision, 28 U.S.C. Section 1409(b), that requires actions for non-consumer, non-insider debt to be brought against defendants in the district in which they reside, has increased to $10,950 from $10,000.

Other adjustments will affect consumers more than business debtors. For example, the debt limit for an individual to qualify to file a Chapter 13 bankruptcy case will top $1,000,000 of secured debt for the first time, and certain exemption amounts will also rise. 

Although the changes aren't large, be sure to keep them in mind when evaluating cases after April 1st. 

The Latest On Northwest Airlines And The Hedge Fund Disclosure Issue

The Rule 2019 Decisions. As I reported in a post earlier this week, after first ruling that members of an Ad Hoc Committee of Equity Security Holders were required to disclose detailed information about the claims or stock they own and the amounts they paid for them, on March 9, 2007, the Bankruptcy Court in the Northwest Airlines case issued a second decision holding that this Rule 2019 information must be filed publicly.

The Motion for Reconsideration. Three hedge funds that are members of the Ad Hoc Committee filed a motion for reconsideration of the Bankruptcy Court's first decision. In addition, the Loan Syndications and Trading Association (LSTA) and the Securities Industry and Financial Markets Association (SIFMA) filed an amicus curiae brief in support of the motion for reconsideration, arguing as follows:

LSTA and SIFMA are very concerned that the Rule 2019 Decision will have a serious detrimental impact on the willingness and ability of many stakeholders to participate in future chapter 11 cases. Although the Debtors and certain equity holders are at odds in these cases, there are countless examples in other cases where groups of stakeholders have cooperated, many times in the guise of 'ad hoc' committees to create imaginative and strikingly successful solutions. The Rule 2019 Decision, by requiring the disclosure of proprietary and highly confidential information, will in all likelihood erect a substantial obstacle to the participation of many stakeholders – in particular, those sophisticated stakeholders that are the most likely to have the means and the experience to make a positive contribution toward reorganization.

The Court Rules On The Motion For Reconsideration. The hearing on the motion for reconsideration took place on March 15, 2007. As reported by the Associated Press here, the Bankruptcy Court denied the reconsideration motion, describing it as "totally frivolous" and observing that it did not advance any new arguments.

Motion for Leave To Appeal. Given that the Ad Hoc Committee had filed a notice of appeal of the Bankruptcy Court's decision on March 14, 2007, at the March 15, 2007 hearing the Bankruptcy Court apparently agreed to stay its ruling for ten days. The stay is designed to permit the Ad Hoc Committee the opportunity to pursue a motion for leave to appeal, which it had also filed on March 14, 2007, in the United States District Court for the Southern District of New York. The motion seeks leave to appeal on the following basis:

[T]he bankruptcy court ordered the Ad Hoc Committee to disclose to the world detailed trading data, including all individual purchases and sales of any interest in the Debtors (whether it be stock, bonds, claims or any other interest), including purchase and sales prices. The Ad Hoc Committee hereby seeks to appeal the decision refusing to allow the filing to be made under seal. As an initial matter, the order at issue is a final order within the meaning of 28 U.S.C. § 158(a)(1). Likewise, the order satisfies the collateral order doctrine also making the decision appealable now. Nevertheless, the cases vacillate between characterizing such an appeal under the collateral order doctrine as one of right or one requiring leave. Accordingly, and so as to avoid any doubt as to the validity of the appeal, the Ad Hoc Committee also seeks leave in addition to having filed its notice of appeal as of right.

More Action Ahead. With Bankruptcy Judge Gropper's latest decision and the motion for leave to appeal, it looks like the disclosure issue will now shift to the District Court. The Bankruptcy Court reportedly has also deferred decision on the Ad Hoc Committee's motion for appointment of an examiner, apparently until the Rule 2019 statement is filed or the appeal is resolved. I'll plan to provide additional updates as developments warrant.

New Article Examines Interplay Between Bankruptcy and Intellectual Property Law

Peter S. Menell, a Professor of Law at the University of California, Berkeley, School of Law (Boalt Hall) and the Director of the Berkeley Center for Law and Technology, is a highly regarded expert on intellectual property law. I wanted to let you know that he's just posted a very interesting and comprehensive article on the Social Science Research Network (known as SSRN) reviewing how intellectual property assets are affected by bankruptcy. Having served on a panel with Professor Menell a few years ago, I can attest to his deep knowledge of these issues.

Entitled "Bankruptcy Treatment of Intellectual Property Assets: an Economic Analysis," the article begins with an extensive discussion of patent, copyright, and trademark law and then analyzes the complex interplay between IP and bankruptcy law. Covering a broad range of topics, the article discusses Section 365(n) of the Bankruptcy Code, how assumption and assignment of exclusive and non-exclusive licenses have been treated by the courts, and the issues surrounding the perfection of security interests in intellectual property.

If you're familiar with bankruptcy, you'll find the article's overview of intellectual property law particularly helpful. If you're familiar with IP law, you'll benefit from the article's discussion of how bankruptcy impacts IP rights. If you're new to both, the article will give you a serious introduction to these legal issues. I recommend the article to anyone looking for a top-flight review and analysis of what happens when intellectual property finds its way into bankruptcy court.

In New Ruling, Northwest Airlines Court Decides Whether Ad Hoc Committee Of Hedge Funds May File Details Of Their Trades Under Seal

The Northwest Airlines Disclosure Decision. In a post last week, I discussed the Bankruptcy Court's decision in the Northwest Airlines Chapter 11 case requiring the members of an Ad Hoc Committee of Equity Security Holders to disclose detailed information about the amounts of claims or stock owned by the Committee's members, when they acquired it, how much they paid for it, and when they sold or otherwise disposed of any of their holdings.

Rule 2019: Not So Arcane Anymore. The Bankruptcy Court based its decision on Federal Rule of Bankruptcy Procedure 2019. The rule, rarely discussed in articles or blogs, provides in part:

[E]very entity or committee representing more than one creditor or equity security holder . . .  shall file a verified statement setting forth (1) the name and address of the creditor or equity security holder; (2) the nature and amount of the claim or interest and the time of acquisition thereof unless it is alleged to have been acquired more than one year prior to the filing of the petition; (3) a recital of the pertinent facts and circumstances in connection with the employment of the entity . . . ; and (4) . . . the amounts of claims or interests owned by the entity, the members of the committee or the indenture trustee, the times when acquired, the amounts paid therefor, and any sales or other disposition thereof.

Something Of A Bombshell. As a number of articles have discussed (for example, here and here), the decision was significant because hedge funds and other investors in distressed debt and equity securities have been taking major roles in some of the largest Chapter 11 bankruptcy cases, including through ad hoc committees. Loathe to disclose their trading information, some wonder whether hedge funds will continue to be as active in bankruptcy cases. Hedge funds have been such important players in distressed situations that any retreat from their often leading role could have a big impact on Chapter 11 cases.

Decision Results In A Flurry Of Paper. The Bankruptcy Court's decision set in motion a series of additional court filings. (You can access these pleadings by clicking on the following links.)

  • In response to the Bankruptcy Court's decision, the Ad Hoc Committee filed a motion for permission to file the trading information under seal rather than publicly, including not disclosing it to the Debtors or the Official Committee of Unsecured Creditors. They strenuously argued that their trading information was trade secret and confidential commercial information that should be protected under Section 107(b) of the Bankruptcy Code and Bankruptcy Rule 9018, two provisions that permit the sealing of the record under certain circumstances. 
  • A number of other parties weighed in with objections or responses to the Ad Hoc Committee's motion. These included the Debtors, the Official Committee of Unsecured Creditors, and the United States Trustee. These parties argued against sealing the Rule 2019 statement, contending that it was essential for the parties in the case to know what claims and interests the Ad Hoc Committee members held and the details of their acquisition costs.
  • In addition, Bloomberg News successfully moved to intervene in the case. Bloomberg contended that the Northwest Airlines case was of public significance and that "all aspects of it should be open to public scrutiny to the fullest extent possible." It argued that hedge funds "have become major sources of capital for distressed companies and now play a significant role in bankruptcy proceedings such as this one. The nature of the positions being taken by these key financial players, and the potentially conflicting interests they may hold in any given situation, raise the potential for precisely the types of abuse that led to adoption of Rule 2019 as a procedural device to 'help foster fair and equitable plans free from deception and overreaching'" (quoting from the Bankruptcy Court's prior decision).
  • The Ad Hoc Committee then filed a reply, continuing to argue for the sealing of the information, asserting that similar to real estate or car sales, the price paid is "probably the most confidential piece of information regarding the purchase of anything." 

The Court's Ruling On The Motion To Seal. The Bankruptcy Court held a hearing on the motion on Wednesday, March 7, 2007, and announced that it would issue a ruling by Friday, March 9, 2007.  Friday afternoon, the Bankruptcy Court issued this decision, denying the motion to file the Rule 2019 disclosure under seal and requiring that it be filed within three business days. In reaching its decision, the Bankruptcy Court held as follows:

The Committee members do not advance their position when they compare themselves to car or real estate salesmen. It bears recalling that this Committee purports to control 27 percent of the outstanding stock of the Debtors and that it has repeatedly asked the Court to give credibility to its claims that the Debtors’ equity has substantial value, that the Debtors’ management has wrongfully undervalued the equity, and that it intends to mount a contest as to the valuation of these Debtors. By acting as a group, the members of this shareholders’ Committee subordinated to the requirements of Rule 2019 their interest in keeping private the prices at which they individually purchased or sold the Debtors’ securities. This is not unfair because their negotiating decisions as a Committee should be based on the interests of the entire shareholders’ group, not their individual financial advantage. Their counsel admitted at oral argument of this motion that in negotiations between a committee and other parties in interest, the question is whether a tranche is being treated fairly, not the price at which individual members might be induced to sell. If that is so, and it should be, it cannot harm the legitimate interests of members of an ad hoc committee to put pricing information on the table.

In any event, any interest that individual Committee members may have in keeping this information confidential is overridden by the interests that Rule 2019 seeks to protect. Rule 2019 protects other members of the group – here, the shareholders – and informs them where a committee is coming from by requiring full disclosure of the securities held by members of the committee and the respective purchases and sales. This Committee contends that it did not take on any fiduciary responsibility to the shareholders as a group when it appeared in these cases. Assuming, arguendo, for purposes of this motion that the Committee does not act as a fiduciary, Rule 2019 is based on the premise that the other shareholders have a right to information as to Committee member purchases and sales so that they make an informed decision whether this Committee will represent their interests or whether they should consider forming a more broadly-based committee of their own. It also gives all parties a better ability to gauge the credibility of an important group that has chosen to appear in a bankruptcy case and play a major role.

The utility to other shareholders of information as to the purchases and sales made by members of this Committee is underscored by two facts of record. First, it has been disclosed that Committee members own a very significant amount of debt, as well as stock. Rule 2019 is based on the premise that other shareholders have a right to know whether the debt purchases were made at the same time as the purchases of stock, a fact that might raise questions as to divided loyalties. Second, each of the three representative Committee members admits in his declaration that he might decide to sell out at any time. [record references omitted] The possibility that members of an ad hoc committee will sell and leave a group without a representative is exactly why there are disclosures required under Rule 2019. Rule 2019 gives other members of the class the right to know where their champions are coming from. Granting the motion to seal would scuttle the Rule.

Hedging Your Bets. Over the past several years, hedge funds, like other creditors and equity investors, have been able to play an even more significant role in Chapter 11 cases by participating in ad hoc and official bankruptcy committees. The Bankruptcy Court's decision will certainly give hedge funds, and perhaps claims buyers generally, pause before they agree to form unofficial committees or join official ones. Although it's possible that these investors will become more comfortable disclosing this information over time, that seems unlikely.

  • Hedge funds with large stakes in the debt or equity of a particular company will likely still act aggressively to advance their interests, but those with smaller positions may not find the expense of individual representation justified.
  • Even those with big stakes may be more likely to act on their own, rather than through a committee, to avoid facing the prospect of full Rule 2019 disclosures. 
  • If these investors step back from participating in committees, it could in turn reduce their collective influence in bankruptcy cases -- one of the reasons they formed committees in the first place.
  • While it's still too early to tell, if followed by other courts, this decision has the potential to lead to major changes both in how hedge funds and other investors participate in Chapter 11 bankruptcy cases and in the impact they have on them.

It Might Not Be Over. In what could be a sign of things to come, the Bankruptcy Court also granted a separate motion by the Ad Hoc Committee extending its time for filing an appeal from the earlier ruling. In addition, certain members of the Ad Hoc Committee filed their own motion for reconsideration of the Bankruptcy Court's Rule 2019 order from last week, asking for a hearing on that motion sometime after a March 19, 2007 response deadline. To add to the mix, although the Ad Hoc Committee withdrew its motion for an official equity committee, it has separately filed a motion for appointment of an examiner.

Stay Tuned. With this much going on, I plan to make additional posts on the disclosure issue as events warrant. You're welcome to subscribe to the blog to receive updates directly via email or RSS.

 

Retail Bankruptcies: New Article Examines How The 2005 Bankruptcy Code Amendments Have Impacted Retailers

I wanted to let you know about a new article recently published in the New York Law Journal by my colleagues Lawrence Gottlieb, the Chair of the Cooley Godward Kronish Bankruptcy & Restructuring Group, and Seth Van Aalten.

Entitled "Is The Death Knell Sounding For Retail Reorganizations?," it examines how the changes made by the Bankruptcy Abuse Prevention and Consumer Protection Act of 2005 (also known as BAPCPA) have significantly affected the ability of retailers to reorganize under Chapter 11 of the Bankruptcy Code. (A PDF version of the article is available here as part of a New York Law Journal special report on corporate restructuring and bankruptcy.)

The article discusses, among other issues, the impact on a retailer's liquidity of the new 210 day limitation on the time to assume or reject commercial real estate leases, the new "20 day goods" administrative claim, amended utility deposits requirements, increased employee priority amounts, and changes involving ad valorem taxes.

It makes for very interesting, if troubling, reading for retailers and their vendors, as well as anyone else with a stake in the reorganization prospects of these businesses.

Appointment Of Interim Trustee Before Section 546's Two-Year Statute Of Limitations Expires Insufficient To Extend Period For Bringing Preference Actions

Scott Riddle over at the Georgia Bankruptcy Law Blog has an informative post on the decision by the U.S. Court of Appeals for the Third Circuit last week in the American Pad & Paper Company case. The case involved Section 546(a) of the Bankruptcy Code, which extends the standard two-year statute of limitations for bringing preference and other avoidance actions by up to one additional year if, before the two-year period expires, a trustee is appointed or elected.

The Third Circuit's Holding. In short, the Third Circuit decided that the appointment during this two year window of an interim trustee under Section 701 of the Bankruptcy Code does not trigger the additional one year extension. Instead, the Third Circuit held that Section 546(a)(1)(B) specifically refers to Section 702 of the Bankruptcy Code and not Section 701. As a result, in a Chapter 7 case, a permanent trustee must be appointed or elected under Section 702, before the two-year period expires, for the one year extension to kick in. 

When Does This Come Up? Although not an everyday occurrence, this situation can arise when a case originally filed under Chapter 11 is converted to Chapter 7 after almost two years. In the American Pad & Paper Company case, the selection of a permanent trustee under Section 702 was delayed (the creditors decided to elect a permanent trustee instead of letting the interim trustee become the permanent trustee), resulting in the expiration of the two-year statute of limitations before it could be extended for one additional year. The impact? The court held that the permanent trustee's preference actions were all time-barred.

What Creditors Should Watch For. Defendants in preference or other avoidance actions in cases that were converted to Chapter 7 after a couple of years in Chapter 11 should carefully review the sequence of events surrounding the trustee's appointment to see if the statute of limitations expired. Likewise, if a Chapter 11 case converts to Chapter 7 more than two years after the case was originally filed (technically, after the "order for relief" was entered), and no preference actions were brought in the Chapter 11 case, the trustee will be barred by the statute of limitations from bringing any avoidance actions. 

Do Hedge Funds Have To Disclose Their Trades If They Form A Bankruptcy Committee?

In recent years, hedge funds and other investors in distressed debt or the equity securities of bankrupt companies have taken active roles in Chapter 11 bankruptcy cases. Often, these investors form unofficial or "ad hoc" committees. This post reports on a recent decision by a New York bankruptcy court in the Northwest Airlines case which, if ultimately enforced, could have a major impact on hedge funds, ad hoc committees, and Chapter 11 cases.

Ad Hoc Committees. Unofficial or ad hoc committees, much like official committees of unsecured creditors, equity security holders, retirees, or other constituencies, typically hire counsel and file motions and other pleadings during the course of a bankruptcy case. By acting as a group, the committee's members not only share the costs of participating in the bankruptcy case but also have the ability to wield greater influence by acting collectively instead of on an individual basis.

The Rule 2019(a) Statement. After making an appearance in a bankruptcy case, these committees, their counsel, or both will typically file what's known as a "Rule 2019(a) Statement." This is a public filing required by Rule 2019(a) of the Federal Rules of Bankruptcy Procedure, the set of procedural rules which, together with the United States Bankruptcy Code itself, govern the conduct of bankruptcy cases. Rule 2019(a) provides, in part, as follows:

[E]very entity or committee representing more than one creditor or equity security holder . . .  shall file a verified statement setting forth (1) the name and address of the creditor or equity security holder; (2) the nature and amount of the claim or interest and the time of acquisition thereof unless it is alleged to have been acquired more than one year prior to the filing of the petition; (3) a recital of the pertinent facts and circumstances in connection with the employment of the entity . . . ; and (4) . . . the amounts of claims or interests owned by the entity, the members of the committee or the indenture trustee, the times when acquired, the amounts paid therefor, and any sales or other disposition thereof.

The Ad Hoc Committee In Northwest Airlines. While seemingly a dry and arcane bankruptcy rule, it has recently become anything but in the Northwest Airlines Corporation Chapter 11 case. In January 2007, an Ad Hoc Committee Of Equity Security Holders first made an appearance in the case. Its thirteen members include hedge funds and other investment entities that collectively own more than 19 million shares of Northwest Airlines stock and approximately $265 million in claims. The Ad Hoc Committee sought discovery in the case and asked that an official committee of equity security holders be appointed (a request it recently withdrew). 

The Debtors Seek Additional Disclosure. In the course of litigating certain disputes, Northwest Airlines filed a motion seeking, among other relief, an order under Rule 2019 requiring the Ad Hoc Committee to disclose more detailed information about the amounts of claims or stock owned by the Committee's members, when they acquired it, how much they paid for it, and when they sold or otherwise disposed of any of their holdings. In support, Northwest Airlines made this argument:

The Ad Hoc Committee remains a mystery to the Debtors and to all the other constituencies in the Debtors’ cases, yet it seeks to make an impact at this late stage of the Debtors’ reorganization. Without the proper disclosures, the Court should refuse to allow the Ad Hoc Committee to continue to cause serious delays to the Debtors’ reorganization efforts, and operate outside of the Bankruptcy Code and the Bankruptcy Rules.

The Ad Hoc Committee Opposes The Motion. The Ad Hoc Committee opposed the motion on several grounds, including that its Rule 2019 statement was proper in form, that the purpose of the rule is only to ensure that plans of reorganization are negotiated and voted on by those authorized to act for the real parties in interest, and that this purpose was satisfied by the form of the statement already filed.

The Northwest Airlines Court's Rule 2019 Decision. On February 26, 2007, Judge Gropper issued his decision requiring the Ad Hoc Committee to file a Rule 2019 statement that provided the detailed information the Debtors had sought in their motion. The Court ruled that Rule 2019 applies to ad hoc or unofficial committees and rejected the Ad Hoc Committee's argument that the prior Rule 2019(a) statement, which did not give detailed information about dates of trades and prices paid, was adequate.

The Ad Hoc Committee's Further Motion. On March 1, 2007, the Ad Hoc Committee filed a motion for an order allowing the additional Rule 2019 statement to be filed under seal but asking that the Court stay its prior order pending further hearing. The Ad Hoc Committee argued that the trading information required under the Court's order represented trade secrets and confidential commercial information and that, to its knowledge, no other committee or party had been required to file such information publicly in any other Chapter 11 case. The Ad Hoc Committee contended that requiring its members to make that disclosure would irreparably damage them, as other investors were not required to make such disclosures but some might use that information to inform their own trades.

The Court Grants The Ad Hoc Committee's Motion. Later that same day, the Court granted the Ad Hoc Committee's motion. The Court set a fast briefing schedule and a further hearing for March 7, 2007. I will plan to report on the resolution of that motion after the Court makes its decision.

Why This Matters. While disputes over disclosure are not always worthy of motions, multiple hearings, and blog postings, this case is different. Hedge funds and other buyers of distressed debt or stock in bankrupt companies carefully guard their trading information, especially the price they've paid. If ad hoc committee members will be required to disclose this information publicly, or perhaps even privately, they may choose not to participate in unofficial committees or generally may be dissuaded from becoming active participants in Chapter 11 cases. Hedge funds and other distressed debt traders have been deploying enormous amounts of money through second lien lending in distressed situations and directly in bankruptcy cases through the purchase of claims and stock. They have also regularly taken very active roles in major Chapter 11 cases. Any ruling with the potential to reverse or impact this trend would be big news indeed.

The Supreme Court's Recent Decision In Marrama: Any Insight Into Business Bankruptcy Issues?

On Wednesday the U.S. Supreme Court issued its decision in Marrama v. Citizens Bank of Massachusetts. The Supreme Court answered the question of whether an individual has an absolute right to convert a Chapter 7 bankruptcy case to a Chapter 13 "wage earner" bankruptcy case or whether that right can be conditioned on the absence of bad faith. This blog is focused on business bankruptcy issues, but knowing how the Supreme Court interprets the Bankruptcy Code on one issue can sometimes help in understanding how the Court may approach other issues.

The Core Issue. In Marrama, the Supreme Court interpreted the following language in Section 706(a) of the Bankruptcy Code:

The debtor may convert a case under this chapter to a case under chapter 11, 12, or 13 of this title at any time, if the case has not be converted under section 1112, 1208, or 1307 of this title. Any waiver of the right to convert a case under this subsection is unenforceable.

Many courts had read this language to give a debtor an absolute right to convert a case from Chapter 7 to another bankruptcy chapter, even if the case might thereafter be reconverted back to Chapter 7. (Grounds for such reconversion could include previous bad faith or other misconduct of the debtor while in Chapter 7.)  The ability to convert can make a big difference to debtors because Chapter 7 cases always involve the appointment of a trustee to take possession of the debtor's non-exempt assets for liquidation, unlike cases under Chapters 11, 12, and 13 in which the debtor can often retain property and pay creditors over time.  

The Court's Reasoning. The Supreme Court decided that another provision, Section 706(d), limited this right to convert by requiring that the debtor must be able to be a debtor under the other chapter of choice. Section 706(d) provides: "Notwithstanding any other provision of this section, a case may not be converted to a case under another chapter of this title unless the debtor may be a debtor under such chapter.” In Marrama, the Supreme Court held that a debtor who had acted in bad faith by concealing assets while in Chapter 7 could not qualify as a debtor under Chapter 13 because the Chapter 13 case would be dismissed "for cause" under Section 1307 of the Bankruptcy Code. The Supreme Court summarized its reasoning this way:

In practical effect, a ruling that an individual’s Chapter 13 case should be dismissed or converted to Chapter 7 because of prepetition bad-faith conduct, including fraudulent acts committed in an earlier Chapter 7 proceeding, is tantamount to a ruling that the individual does not qualify as a debtor under Chapter 13. That individual, in other words, is not a member of the class of ‘honest but unfortunate debtor[s]’ that the bankruptcy laws were enacted to protect. See Grogan v. Garner, 498 U. S., at 287. The text of §706(d) therefore provides adequate authority for the denial of his motion to convert.

A "Plain Language" Dissent. Interestingly, Justice Alito, joined by Chief Justice Roberts and Justices Scalia and Thomas, dissented. He found the majority's interpretation of these sections to be strained and inconsistent with the plain meaning of the statutory language. As such, he believed that a debtor had an absolute right to convert out of Chapter 7 even if the case were subject to being reconverted after further proceedings.

Impact On Business Bankruptcy? It's hard to see much direct impact on business bankruptcy cases from the decision, except perhaps in the very rare circumstance when a corporate debtor files a Chapter 7 but later seeks to convert the case to Chapter 11. However, the fact that four justices dissented on a "plain language" basis may be noteworthy. Many of the changes made by the recent Bankruptcy Abuse Prevention and Consumer Protection Act (also known as BAPCPA), including to business provisions, added language that appears to limit the exercise of discretion by bankruptcy judges. Perhaps the more interesting question, then, is whether the Marrama decision signals that the Supreme Court might consider loosening, if only slightly, the prevailing "plain language" interpretation of the Bankruptcy Code and allow judges to exercise more discretion than might otherwise be indicated by the language of the statute alone. Given that BAPCPA is less than 18 months old, we'll probably have to wait a few years for an answer to that one.

Other Commentators On The Decision. Finally, when the Supreme Court issues a bankruptcy decision, a number of commentators write to share their perspectives. Scott Riddle of the Georgia Bankruptcy Law Blog was one of the first to report on the decision. Steve Jakubowski of The Bankruptcy Litigation Blog has an interesting post. In addition, John Pottow, a professor at the University of Michigan Law School, has an insightful post on the Credit Slips blog, as does Todd Zywicki, a professor at the George Mason University School of Law, over on The Volokh Conspiracy.

The New Section 503(b)(9) Administrative Claim: The Latest On What Courts And Debtors Have Been Doing

A couple of months ago I posted on the new "20 day goods" administrative claim enacted as part of the Bankruptcy Abuse Prevention and Consumer Protection Act of 2005 ("BAPCPA"). BAPCPA, which took effect in October 2005, added Section 503(b)(9) to the Bankruptcy Code giving vendors an administrative priority claim for "the value of any goods received by the debtor within 20 days before" the date the bankruptcy petition was filed, as long as "the goods have been sold to the debtor in the ordinary course of such debtor's business." 

In my earlier post, I posed a number of unresolved questions about this new section and predicted that courts would soon start to address those issues. Well, in the past couple of months we have in fact seen decisions answering at least a few of the questions raised by Section 503(b)(9).

The First Court Decisions. In late December 2006, bankruptcy courts in the District of Delaware and the Eastern District of Pennsylvania issued what appear to be the first two decisions on when and under what circumstances Section 503(b)(9) administrative claims must or should be paid. As explained below, in both decisions the bankruptcy court held that the administrative claimant was not necessarily entitled to payment prior to, in a Chapter 11 case, confirmation of a plan of reorganization.

  • In the first decision, issued December 21, 2006, Judge Kevin Gross of the U.S. Bankruptcy Court for the District of Delaware denied a creditor's motion for payment of a Section 503(b)(9) administrative claim in the In re Global Home Products, LLC Chapter 11 bankruptcy case. The court held that the timing of payment of administrative claims is left to the discretion of the court. In so doing the court quoted with approval from an article that described Section 503(b)(9) as a "rule of priority, rather than payment." The court relied on a non-Section 503(b)(9) decision for the three factors to assess when considering when an administrative claim should be paid, chiefly, (a) the prejudice to the debtor, (b) hardship to the claimant, and (c) potential detriment to other creditors. The court applied those factors and denied the creditor's request for immediate payment.
  • In the second decision, issued a week later on December 28, 2006, Judge Eric Frank of the U.S. Bankruptcy Court for the Eastern District of Pennsylvania denied a motion for immediate payment of Section 503(b)(9) claims filed by several creditors in the In re Bookbinders' Restaurant, Inc. Chapter 11 bankruptcy case. Although the debtor agreed that the creditors were entitled to allowance of a "20 day goods" administrative claim, it opposed the immediate payment of those claims. The court held that the timing of payment was a matter of the court's discretion but agreed to hold an evidentiary hearing to consider evidence to guide the exercise of that discretion.

A Few Early Take-Aways. In both of these decisions, the courts held that they have discretion to defer payment until the end of a Chapter 11 bankruptcy case, when a plan of reorganization is confirmed.

  • Creditors who can establish that failing to pay their Section 503(b)(9) claim would cause them hardship, but not prejudice the debtor or other creditors, may still be able to obtain immediate payment. As these cases show, however, creditors will find it challenging to meet that standard.
  • Interestingly, the Bookbinders court rejected what it called an "equal protection" argument by the creditors, who asserted that they should be paid immediately because vendors delivering goods to the debtor post-petition were being paid on their administrative claims. The court drew a distinction between the two claims, explaining that the creditors delivering goods post-petition were paid not under Section 503(b) but instead under Section 363(c)(1) of the Bankruptcy Code. That latter section allows a debtor in possession or trustee to enter into post-petition ordinary course of business transactions, and to pay for them, without court approval.
  • Finally, DIP financing orders can impact the timing of paying Section 503(b)(9) claims. In some cases the DIP budget may not include funds to pay these claims and in others the DIP order may expressly prohibit their payment. Section 503(b)(9) creditors may want to review proposed DIP financing motions carefully with this in mind.

What Debtors Have Been Doing. In an attempt to exert a degree of control over Section 503(b)(9) claims, some debtors have filed motions seeking to establish procedures to handle these claims, not unlike the procedures used in past cases for reclamation claims. In the Seattle case of In re Brown & Cole Stores, LLC, for example, the debtor filed a motion for an order establishing procedures for Section 503(b)(9) claims. The court granted the motion and entered a Section 503(b)(9) procedures order which, among other things:

  • Required creditors to file Section 503(b)(9) claims by a special bar date;
  • Required the debtor to file a report evaluating such claims 21 days after the special bar date;
  • Gave creditors 15 days thereafter to file a reply to the debtor's position;
  • Made the debtor's position binding in the event a creditor did not timely respond; and 
  • Reserved to the court the right to resolve any disputes. 

The order effectively reserved the issue of when valid Section 503(b)(9) claims would be paid but made the procedures the exclusive method for determining the validity and amount of such claims. I expect that other debtors will pursue similar procedures for handling these "20 day goods" claims.

Don't Touch That Dial. These early decisions are the first in what should be many future rulings on the questions posed by Section 503(b)(9). I'll continue to update you on how courts are interpreting this new administrative claim and, over time, we should begin to see more clarity on how debtors, vendors, and courts will address this new BAPCPA provision.

Chapter 15: The Bankruptcy Code's New Cross-Border Insolvency Rules

Chris Laughton, a UK insolvency practitioner and publisher of InsolvencyBlog.com, has a number of recent posts on the adoption in the UK of the Model Law on Cross-Border Insolvency (“Model Law”), a 1997 effort by the United Nations Commission on International Trade Law (“UNCITRAL”). That got me thinking that I should post something on the recent changes to the U.S. Bankruptcy Code on cross-border insolvencies.

Chapter What? On October 17, 2005, as part of the Bankruptcy Abuse Prevention and Consumer Protection Act (known as "BAPCPA"), a new Chapter 15 of the Bankruptcy Code went into effect governing ancillary and other cross-border cases. (For those already familiar with ancillary proceedings, Section 304 of the Bankruptcy Code, which previously governed those proceedings, was repealed although many of its concepts have been retained in Chapter 15.)

Where Did Chapter 15 Come From? The main purpose of enacting Chapter 15 was to incorporate the Model Law as part of the Bankruptcy Code. 11 U.S.C. § 1501(a). My partner Adam Rogoff, who has had significant experience with international insolvency matters, has prepared a very helpful chart comparing Chapter 15 and the Model Law's provisions. Also, because Chapter 15 so closely follows the Model Law, the Legislative Guide to Enactment of the UNCITRAL Model Law on Cross-Border Insolvency, prepared by the Model Law’s authors, is one of the most helpful guides to understanding the meaning of Chapter 15's provisions.

Given that Chapter 15 is such a creature of statute, I've included more citations to the Bankruptcy Code than usual in this post. They are all in the format 11 U.S.C. § ___, which refers to Title 11 of the United States Code (the title of U.S. law that sets out the Bankruptcy Code) and then a particular section number. 

Who Uses Chapter 15? Chapter 15 is used principally by representatives of or creditors in foreign insolvency proceedings to obtain assistance in the United States, by a debtor or others seeking to obtain assistance in a foreign country regarding a bankruptcy case in the United States, or when both a foreign proceeding and a bankruptcy case in the United States are pending with respect to the same debtor. 11 U.S.C. § 1501(b). 

Learning A "Foreign" Language. Several important terms involving different types of foreign proceedings are key to understanding the scope of Chapter 15. 

  • A “foreign proceeding” means “a collective judicial or administrative proceeding in a foreign country, including an interim proceeding, under a law relating to insolvency or adjustment of debts in which proceeding the assets and affairs of the debtor are subject to control or supervision by a foreign court, for the purpose of reorganization or liquidation.” 11 U.S.C. § 101(23). 
  • For purposes of Chapter 15, “debtor” means “an entity that is the subject of a foreign proceeding.” 11 U.S.C. § 1502(1). 
  • A "foreign main proceeding" means a foreign proceeding pending in the country where the debtor has the center of its main interests which, in the absence of contrary evidence, is presumed to be the location of the debtor’s registered office. 11 U.S.C. §§ 1502(4) and 1516(c). 
  • A "foreign nonmain proceeding" means a foreign proceeding, other than a foreign main proceeding, pending in a country in which the debtor has an “establishment,” defined as a place of operations where the debtor carries out a nontransitory economic activity. 11 U.S.C. §§ 1502(2) and (4). 

Getting Some Recognition:The Chapter 15 Process. Chapter 15’s basic procedure is straightforward. A case is commenced when a foreign representative files a petition for recognition of a foreign proceeding. 11 U.S.C. §§ 1504 and 1515(a). If properly filed, the bankruptcy court is entitled to presume that the facts stated in the petition are correct and the attached documents are authentic. 11 U.S.C. §§ 1516(a) and (b). As long as recognition would not be manifestly contrary to the public policy of the United States, the court must enter an order recognizing the foreign proceeding (here's an example order). 11 U.S.C. §§ 1506 and 1517(a). 

Formal recognition is the key step that triggers the benefits of Chapter 15. If recognition is granted as a foreign main proceeding, the debtor receives important protections and rights similar to those available to U.S.-based debtors. Chief among these are the automatic stay provisions of Section 1520(a) of the Code, which invoke the automatic stay of Section 362 with respect to the debtor and its property within the territorial jurisdiction of the United States. 11 U.S.C. § 1520(a). Other sections invoked by Section 1520 (including Sections 363, 549, and 552) apply to transfers of interests of the debtor in property within the territorial jurisdiction of the United States. 11 U.S.C. § 1520(a)(2). Unless the court orders otherwise, the foreign representative may also operate the debtor’s business consistent with Section 363 and 552. 11 U.S.C. § 1520(a)(3). 

A Matter Of Discretion. Section 1521 gives the court discretion to grant other appropriate relief at the request of the foreign representative, including in foreign nonmain proceedings which, unlike foreign main proceedings, do not invoke Section 1520's automatic stay. 11 U.S.C. § 1521(a). Under Section 1521(a), the court may, among other things, stay actions or proceedings concerning the debtor’s assets, rights, obligations or liabilities, stay execution against the debtor’s assets, and suspend the right to transfer or dispose of assets of the debtor. 11 U.S.C. §§ 1521(a)(1), (2), and (3). However, Chapter 15 contains certain limitations on the ability of a court to grant the discretionary relief provided by Section 1521:

  • Relief is available only “where necessary to effectuate the purpose of this chapter and to protect the assets of the debtor or the interests of the creditors.” 11 U.S.C. § 1521(a). 
  • Congress made such relief expressly subject to the “standards, procedures, and limitations applicable to an injunction.” 11 U.S.C. § 1521(e). The court has discretion to make any relief granted subject “to conditions it considers appropriate, including the giving of security or the filing of a bond.” 11 U.S.C. § 1522(b).
  • Section 1507 requires the court, in determining whether to give additional assistance to a foreign representative, to consider “whether such additional assistance, consistent with the principles of comity, will reasonably assure” achievement of five specific objectives retained nearly verbatim from former Section 304(c). 
  • These objectives include “just treatment of all holders of claims,” “protection of claim holders in the United States against prejudice and inconvenience,” “prevention of preferential or fraudulent dispositions of property,” “distributions of proceeds” substantially according to the Bankruptcy Code, and, where appropriate, the opportunity for a fresh start for an individual. 

Over There: Protection For U.S. Creditors And Debtors. The Model Law has been adopted in a number of other countries, including Japan, Mexico, Poland, Romania, South Africa, and the UK. According to this recent post on the InsolvencyBlog.com, foreign creditors (including U.S. creditors) are fully recognized in UK insolvency proceedings. Representatives of U.S. based debtors may also obtain protection in countries that have adopted the Model Law. The European Union, which has not yet adopted the Model Law, has its own cross-border insolvency regulation that applies to all EU countries except Denmark.

Check Your Local Listings. Although Chapter 15 and the Model Law have been designed to help coordinate cross-border bankruptcy and insolvency proceedings, these restructurings and liquidations are complex and often require parties to navigate through multiple country-specific insolvency schemes. If you find yourself involved in a cross-border bankruptcy, whether as a debtor, creditor, or a member of a committee, it's usually critical to get legal advice from U.S. and appropriate foreign insolvency counsel. 

Copyrights And Bankruptcy Sales: The Importance Of Protecting Your Rights

I've posted in the past about bankruptcy asset sales and how parties with executory contracts need to keep track of bankruptcy cases to protect their rights. Steve Jakubowski of The Bankruptcy Litigation Blog has an entertaining and informative post about a recent Court of Appeals decision involving rappers, recording companies, copyrights, and bankruptcy that raises some similar issues.

It's a cautionary tale about the importance of monitoring bankruptcy cases and acting to protect rights when copyrights are involved. (So you don't get complacent, the same message applies for patents, trademarks, and other intellectual property, and especially when licenses are involved.) After describing the case briefly, I discuss some points to keep in mind when IP crosses the bankruptcy court's door.

Setting The Stage. Some background on the facts of the case will help put things in perspective.

  • Act One: In 1989, Jeffrey Thompkins, a rap artist known as JT Money, entered into an exclusive recording agreement with the debtor (a recording company). In the agreement, Thompkins sold his sound recording copyrights in various songs in exchange for the debtor's agreement to pay royalties on the records released. (A later agreement made the debtor a half owner in the musical composition copyrights as well.)
  • Act Two: Six years later, the debtor ended up in Chapter 11 bankruptcy. The copyrights were sold "free and clear" to another recording company for $800,000 as part of the debtor's plan of reorganization, which the bankruptcy court confirmed. The recording agreement was ultimately rejected as an executory contract. Apparently, Tompkins neither objected to the sale nor defended his claim for damages after the recording agreement was rejected.

The Curtain Falls. Almost six years after the bankruptcy sale, Tompkins sued the purchaser of the copyrights in federal court, alleging copyright infringement and other claims. The district court granted the purchaser's motion for summary judgment and the decision was affirmed on appeal. The Court of Appeals for the Eleventh Circuit held that even though the debtor had rejected the original recording agreement, under bankruptcy law that rejection acted only as a breach and not as a rescission of the contract. Quoting from earlier decisions, the Court of Appeals commented that rejection does not "vaporize" a debtor's rights under a rejected contract. Here the debtor retained ownership of the copyrights transferred under the recording agreement even though it breached the obligation to pay royalties. Because the purchaser was the actual owner of the copyrights, the infringement claim failed.

Encore: Lessons For The Audience. What can intellectual property owners and debtors learn from this decision?

  • A transfer of IP under an executory contract will not be rescinded if the buyer later files bankruptcy and rejects the agreement.
  • An IP owner looking for more control over its IP should consider granting a license instead of making an outright sale subject only to a royalty obligation. In some industries this may not be a realistic alternative, but when possible it can give IP owners more control. 
  • In many jurisdictions, IP owners who have granted only non-exclusive licenses prohibiting assignment will have the equivalent of a veto right in bankruptcy over proposed assignments of the license. This is generally true for copyrights, patents, and possibly trademarks, and can have a big impact on a debtor's ability to transfer license rights.
  • When a licensee or other debtor with rights related to IP files bankruptcy, it's critical for IP owners to monitor the bankruptcy case and be prepared to take action to defend their rights. Among the issues that can come up: asset sales involving a sale of the IP or an assignment of license rights, breaches of license terms, and infringement issues.
  • Likewise, debtors and creditors committees need to understand what IP rights the debtor has, what consents may be required to assign or transfer those rights, and how the rights of third party licensors and other IP owners may impact asset sales and reorganization prospects.

Conclusion. The intersection between intellectual property and bankruptcy law can be complex. Whether you are an IP owner, a debtor, or a committee, getting good legal advice before and after a bankruptcy is filed can be critical in protecting your rights.

Delaware Bankruptcy Court Denies Reclamation Claimant's TRO Request To Stop Sale Of Goods

In a recent post, I discussed how Section 546(c) of the Bankruptcy Code, as revised by the Bankruptcy Abuse Prevention and Consumer Protection Act of 2005 ("BAPCPA"), gives vendors the ability to assert a reclamation claim for goods received by a debtor in the 45 days prior to the bankruptcy filing. In addition to extending the reclamation period to 45 days, BAPCPA also added a provision in Section 546(c) making reclamation claims "subject to the prior rights of a holder of a security interest in such goods or the proceeds thereof." This quoted language refers to a secured creditor with a senior lien in the same goods.

The Advanced Marketing Services case. Section 546(c)'s expanded reclamation rights, and how they may be impacted by the "prior rights" of a secured creditor, recently played out in the Chapter 11 bankruptcy case of In re Advanced Marketing Services, Inc. pending in the United States Bankruptcy Court in Delaware.

Simon & Schuster, Inc., a reclamation claimant, filed a complaint against the debtor, Advanced Marketing Services, Inc. ("AMS"), seeking to reclaim more than $5 million worth of goods that the debtor allegedly received in the 45 days prior to the bankruptcy filing. (You can access the pleadings from the Simon & Schuster litigation by clicking on the appropriate links in this post.)

  • In an effort to gain control over the goods at issue, Simon & Schuster filed an application for a temporary restraining order (known as a "TRO") seeking a court order to prevent AMS from selling the goods. 
  • The debtor opposed the TRO, challenging whether Simon & Schuster had the right to reclaim the goods.
  • The debtor's secured creditor, Wells Fargo Foothill, Inc., also filed an opposition to the TRO, arguing that the reclamation claim was subject to its prior rights as a prepetition secured creditor and as a debtor in possession ("DIP") lender. In this case, the DIP loan has been structured as a "creeping roll up" in which prepetition obligations are to be satisfied by the use of cash collateral and the DIP lender in turn receives a postpetition lien as that cash collateral is used.
  • Simon & Schuster filed a reply brief responding to the opposition papers filed by the debtor and the secured creditor.

The Court's Decision. In a decision issued by the Bankruptcy Court yesterday, Judge Sontchi denied Simon & Schuster's application for a TRO without prejudice, holding that Section 546(c) made Simon & Schuster's reclamation rights subject to the prior rights of the secured creditors. (The Bankruptcy Court also noted that it would have reached the same result under pre-BAPCPA bankruptcy and UCC law.)

  • The Bankruptcy Court held that the secured creditors had superior prepetition and postpetition liens in the goods Simon & Schuster sought to reclaim and that Simon & Schuster therefore could not establish that it was likely to prevail on the merits of its reclamation claim.
  • The Bankruptcy Court also rejected any attempt to require "marshaling" by the secured creditor, which if ordered could have required the secured creditor to satisfy its claim first from collateral other than the goods that Simon & Schuster sought to reclaim.

Stay Tuned. As one of the first decisions on this reclamation issue under BAPCPA, the Advanced Marketing Services decision is an important one. However, it's not the last word on how the respective rights of reclaiming vendors and secured creditors will be decided in Chapter 11 cases. Reclamation issues are often fact dependent and results may vary in different cases. Also, vendors unable to prevail on a reclamation claim may still have a "20 day goods" administrative claim, and this fact may influence how debtors treat vendors in future cases.  

Second Liens and Intercreditor Agreements: Are Those Bankruptcy Voting Provisions Really Enforceable?

In this post I look at the second lien phenomenon and then discuss an interesting new case addressing whether a fairly common intercreditor agreement provision -- giving a senior lender the right to vote a second lien lender's claim in bankruptcy -- will actually be enforced.

Senior Debt And Mezzanine Financing. When a company borrows from a bank, it typically grants the bank a first priority, blanket security interest in all of its assets to secure this senior debt. In the past, when a company needed additional capital, whether to grow the business or to fund an acquisition, it often turned to unsecured "mezzanine" financing, so named to reflect its middle position between senior debt and equity. This type of unsecured debt typically is subject to complete payment subordination in favor of the senior lender and is considerably more expensive than bank debt. 

The Second Lien Market. One of the biggest financing trends in recent years has been the move away from unsecured mezzanine credit to debt secured by a second priority security interest on all of the company's assets. Much of this "second lien" debt is coming from hedge funds and other private equity funds, although more traditional lenders have also become active in the market. According to CFO.com, the second lien market has grown dramatically over the past several years, from $570 million in 2002 to more than $16 billion in 2005. Some reports suggest it approached $30 billion in 2006. 

Why the attraction to second lien financing? The main reasons are price, terms, and availability. Healthy companies generally find the pricing on second lien credit to be lower than unsecured mezzanine debt (although a bit more expensive than on senior debt) and often comes with few covenants. For distressed companies, if they can obtain additional credit at all, many times it's as part of a restructuring in which a new lender requires a second lien to protect it from an increased risk of default. 

Subordination and Intercreditor Agreements. Most second liens are blanket security interests and cover the same collateral against which the senior lender has a first lien. Traditionally, senior lenders include provisions in their loan documents prohibiting borrowers from granting security interests or liens to any other lender without the consent of the senior lender. When a lender proposes to make a second lien (also known as a "junior" or "tranche B" loan), it must negotiate not only with the borrower but also with the senior or "tranche A" lender. As the size of the second lien market suggests, senior lenders have been willing to consent to second lien loans, often to help the borrower make an acquisition or to bring in additional liquidity.

  • The negotiations between the first and second lien lenders usually address their respective rights to the collateral and various provisions regarding repayment of their loans. Sometimes the second lien debt will be subordinated to repayment of the senior debt, as with traditional mezzanine financing, but more often only the security interest in the common collateral will be subordinated to that of the senior lender.
  • The senior lender generally insists that the junior lender be a "silent second" and waive rights to object to actions taken by the senior lender in a default or bankruptcy. The junior lender instead wants to have the ability to protect its own interests. The end result often comes out somewhere in between, but restrictions on the second lien lender are common.
  • The arrangements between the senior and second lien lenders are documented in a separate agreement, usually called an intercreditor agreement or a subordination agreement.

Key Intercreditor Agreement Provisions. If everything goes well and the borrower repays its loans on time, the provisions of the intercreditor agreement won't be all that important. However, if the borrower defaults on the loans, or files for bankruptcy, the terms of the agreement can become critical.

  • With bankruptcy in mind, key provisions negotiated in intercreditor agreements often include waivers or consents by the second lien lender relating to debtor in possession (DIP) financing, use of cash collateral, rights to adequate protection, conduct of a Section 363 sale of the debtor's assets (i.e., the lenders' collateral), and the extent to which the senior lender will have the right to vote the second lien lender's claim on any Chapter 11 bankruptcy plan of reorganization.
  • Section 510(a) of the Bankruptcy Code provides that a "subordination agreement is enforceable in a case under this title to the same extent that such agreement is enforceable under applicable nonbankruptcy law." Bankruptcy courts routinely enforce payment subordination provisions in which the junior lender agrees not to receive any payments (or to turn over any that it does receive) until the senior lender is paid in full.

Bankruptcy Voting Provisions. Bankruptcy voting provisions, however, have not always been enforced. Most notably, the court in In re 203 North LaSalle Street Partnership, 246 B.R. 325 (Bankr. N.D. Ill. 2000), held that Section 1126(a) of the Bankruptcy Code, which provides that the "holder of a claim or interest allowed under section 502 of this title may accept or reject a plan," means that only the actual holder of the claim may vote and that an agreement giving that right to the senior lender is not enforceable. Other courts have been more willing to enforce voting provisions in subordination agreements. Still, the issue has not come up very often. Voting provisions have been the subject of reported decisions in only a handful of cases over the past 25 years.

The Aerosol Packaging Decision.  That dearth of authority makes the decision in In re Aerosol Packaging, LLC, issued by a bankruptcy court in Atlanta in late December 2006, of keen interest. (Thanks go to Scott Riddle of the Georgia Bankruptcy Law Blog for first posting on the decision.) In that case, Wachovia Bank was the senior lender under a subordination agreement entered into with Blue Ridge Investors, II, L.P., a second lien lender to the debtor, Aerosol Packaging. In its Chapter 11 bankruptcy, the debtor filed a plan of reorganization acceptable to Wachovia. When votes were solicited, both Wachovia and Blue Ridge submitted competing ballots voting Blue Ridge's claim, with Wachovia's ballot accepting the plan's primary treatment of Blue Ridge's claim and Blue Ridge's ballot rejecting that proposed treatment.

  • Blue Ridge then filed a motion seeking a determination of its voting rights and allowance of its ballot instead of the one Wachovia submitted. (For reference, the subordination agreement attached as an exhibit to that motion designates Blue Ridge as the "Subordinated Creditor" and Wachovia, as successor to SouthTrust Bank, as the "Lender.")
  • Wachovia opposed the motion, relying on a section in the subordination agreement that made it, as the Lender, "irrevocably authorized and empowered (in its own name or in the name of the Subordinated Creditor)" to "take such other action (including without limitation voting the Subordinated Debt. . . " as it "deemed necessary or advisable." Wachovia also argued that the In re 203 North LaSalle Street Partnership case, relied on by Blue Ridge, was wrongly decided and that the bankruptcy rules allowed agents to vote another party's claim. 
  • To complete the picture, the debtor itself also filed a response supporting Wachovia's position.

In siding with Wachovia, the bankruptcy court held that Wachovia was the agent of Blue Ridge, that under the subordination agreement Blue Ridge assigned its right to vote to Wachovia, and that Section 1126(a) of the Bankruptcy Code does not prohibit the enforcement of such provisions. The court therefore accepted Wachovia's ballot and rejected the one submitted by Blue Ridge. The court also pointed out that Blue Ridge is not without a remedy: it "may free itself from the ongoing effect of the Subordination Agreement by paying the Wachovia claim in full in cash." Blue Ridge has appealed the decision, so a higher court may have a chance to rule on the issue.

Uncertainty Remains. As only one bankruptcy court ruling, the Aerosol Packaging decision does not settle the issue of whether bankruptcy voting provisions will be enforced. Still, it's interesting that the court considered and rejected the reasoning of the In re 203 North LaSalle Street Partnership decision. Given that this subordination agreement involved both lien and payment subordination, it's unclear whether the voting provision would have been enforced if the lenders' agreement had involved only lien and not payment subordination, which is the more typical second lien arrangement. The answer to that question will have to wait for the next case.

Bankruptcy Notices: New Rule Lets Creditors Choose A Preferred Address

You're a creditor in a bankruptcy case and a bankruptcy notice arrives on your desk setting a deadline to object to an important motion. The address on the notice is a P.O. box located a thousand miles away, one used only for customer payments and not for legal notices. As a result, the notice took a long time to be routed to you. When you look at it more closely, you realize that so much time has passed that the deadline to respond was last week and the hearing took place yesterday. The situation can be even worse if the late-arriving notice is about a deadline (also known as a "bar date") for filing a proof of claim or perhaps for responding to an objection to your claim

Sound familiar?

Ability To Designate An Address. Well, one of the lesser known changes made by the 2005 amendments to the Bankruptcy Code, the Bankruptcy Abuse Prevention and Consumer Protection Act of 2005 ("BAPCPA"), permits creditors to designate a preferred address for receiving bankruptcy notices. Section 342(f) of the Bankruptcy Code, added by BAPCPA, allows creditors to use one preferred address for cases in every bankruptcy court in the country or to designate different addresses for cases in specific bankruptcy courts.

National Creditor Registration Service. To implement this new rule, a National Creditor Registration Service ("NCRS") has been created. According to its website, the NCRS is "a free service provided by the U.S. Bankruptcy Courts to give creditors options to specify a preferred U.S. mail, e-mail address, or fax number to which bankruptcy notices should be sent." Creditors can choose to receive paper notices mailed to one or more designated addresses or faxed to specific fax numbers. Creditors also have the option of receiving bankruptcy court notices via email by registering for the Electronic Bankruptcy Noticing ("EBN") system.

  • A creditor's preferred address and delivery method will be substituted for any address used in a bankruptcy mailing matrix (the official list of addresses for its creditors that a debtor files with the bankruptcy court) within 30 days of the creditor's registration. (Although Section 342(f) itself mentions only Chapters 7 and 13 of the Bankruptcy Code, as implemented the system is being applied to all cases, including Chapter 11 cases.)
  • When registering, it's important to list all of the different versions of a creditor's name, including formal corporate names, a "doing business as" name, and even common misspellings of the creditor's name. The service's software will attempt to match the names the creditor supplied to the one listed in the debtor's mailing matrix. If a match cannot be made, the notice will be sent to the address listed by the debtor.
  • NCRS allows you to complete forms online or to print them and send them in. You can find the registration forms here, here, and here, but I suggest going to the NCRS registration website itself to make sure you are using the most up-to-date forms and procedure.
  • A creditor or its bankruptcy counsel can always file a request for special notice with the bankruptcy court in a particular case using a specific address for notices in that case. In that circumstance, the address listed in the case-specific notice request will be used instead of the NCRS-listed address.

Be Prepared. Regardless of which option creditors choose, they should be prepared to handle the volume of notices that may be directed to the physical or email address. If using a physical address, creditors should be sure to monitor that address regularly and be in a position to process the notices received. A dedicated P.O. box may make sense in some cases. If an email address is used, it may be helpful to use a special email address or account for notices, create email rules to direct notices to the right person, or use other software to monitor and process those notices. With good procedures in place, the NCRS and EBN services should help creditors receive important bankruptcy notices in time to protect their rights.

What If Something Goes Wrong? Another new provision, Section 342(g), governs the situation in which notice does not get to the right address. Although courts have not yet answered how it applies in various contexts, the section provides that a notice is not "effective notice" unless it's sent in compliance with the Bankruptcy Code's notice rules or it's actually brought to the creditor's attention.

  • This section allows a creditor to designate "a person or an organizational subdivision" to be responsible for receiving bankruptcy notices. If the creditor also establishes "reasonable procedures" so that notices are delivered to the designated person or subdivision, a notice sent to the creditor other than in accordance with Section 342's procedures "shall not be considered to have been brought to the attention of such creditor until such notice is received by such person or such subdivision."
  • In addition, a creditor that did not receive a notice of the bankruptcy filing complying with Section 342's provisions may have a defense to a claim that it violated the automatic stay.
  • While helpful to creditors, these provisions raise questions about how debtors and trustees can be sure to send out effective notice, especially if they are not aware of which person or subdivision a particular creditor has designated for notice. That problem will be reduced if many creditors register with the NCRS or EBN system.

Get Advice. As always, if you have questions about these procedures or how they may affect you as a debtor or creditor, be sure to get advice from your bankruptcy counsel.

20 Day Goods: New Administrative Claim For Goods Sold Just Before Bankruptcy

In a recent post about a vendor's reclamation rights, I discussed how the 2005 amendments to the bankruptcy laws, known as the Bankruptcy Abuse Prevention and Consumer Protection Act of 2005 (called "BAPCPA"), extended a vendor's right to reclaim goods once a bankruptcy petition has been filed. This post focuses on another of BAPCPA's important changes affecting vendors, specifically, the new provision giving vendors an administrative claim for certain pre-petition goods sold.

Expanded Reclamation Right. As mentioned in my earlier post, a new 45 day bankruptcy reclamation right was added to Section 546(c) of the Bankruptcy Code. Prior to this change, the Bankruptcy Code had merely incorporated the Uniform Commercial Code's 10-day reclamation period. Now, once a bankruptcy is filed, a vendor can assert a reclamation demand for goods received within 45 days of the bankruptcy filing. However, in some cases a vendor may not be able to reclaim its goods. The reasons can include a failure to make a timely reclamation demand, the existence of a secured lender with a lien on the goods in question, or the debtor's prior sale of the goods. 

A Brand New Administrative Claim For Vendors, Even If Reclamation Fails. If a vendor's reclamation claim fails, another new Bankruptcy Code section, Section 503(b)(9), gives vendors an important additional right: an administrative priority claim for "the value of any goods received by the debtor within 20 days before" the date a bankruptcy petition was filed "in which the goods have been sold to the debtor in the ordinary course of such debtor's business." 

In most cases, administrative claims are paid in full instead of only cents on the dollar as with general unsecured claims. This new administrative claim is therefore a significant benefit, in effect putting vendors selling goods to a debtor in the 20 days before the bankruptcy filing on par with vendors selling goods after the bankruptcy filing.

  • Section 546(c)(2) of the Bankruptcy Code expressly provides that even if a seller of goods fails to provide the required notice to have a post-bankruptcy reclamation claim, the vendor may still assert this special Section 503(b)(9) administrative claim. 
  • This administrative claim applies in all types of bankruptcy cases, including Chapter 11 reorganization cases, Chapter 7 liquidation cases, and Chapter 13 cases.
  • Vendors who sold goods during the 21 to 45 day period before the bankruptcy filing will have to rely on reclamation alone as to those goods.
  • In either case, vendors and debtors should keep good records of shipments and deliveries of all goods received during the 45 days before the bankruptcy filing.

Unresolved Issues. This provision has been in effect for only a year and there are still a number of unanswered questions about how it will actually work in bankruptcy cases. Reviewing these questions may give you a sense of some of the issues to keep in mind when considering whether you (if you're a vendor) or your vendors (if you're a debtor) will have an administrative claim for "20 day goods." These issues include:

  • Since the vendor is entitled to an administrative claim for the "value of any goods received by the debtor," does that mean the invoice price or some other amount?
  • Does the term "goods" include services bundled with the goods?
  • Does the term "goods" include intellectual property-based products, such as boxed software or other similar items, which the debtor resells or sublicenses?
  • Does the "received by the debtor" requirement exclude goods that have been drop-shipped to a debtor's customer at the debtor's direction?
  • What does the requirement that the goods have been "sold to the debtor in the ordinary course of such debtor's business" really mean?
  • Does the vendor have to file a pleading to be paid on this administrative claim, given that this new section requires "notice and a hearing"?
  • Can the debtor pay for the goods at the beginning of the case, much as it would for goods purchased after the bankruptcy filing, as a way of treating qualifying vendors as "critical vendors"?
  • Can the debtor wait to pay for these "20 day goods" until a plan of reorganization goes effective, as it can for certain other administrative claims?
  • If a Chapter 11 case converts to a Chapter 7 case, will this "20 day goods" administrative claim be treated as a Chapter 7 administrative claim, ahead of all unpaid Chapter 11 administrative claims, including those for goods sold during the Chapter 11 case?
  • Will the existence of this administrative claim provision give vendors who actually got paid before the bankruptcy for "20 day goods" a new defense to a claim that the payment was preferential? 

Get Good Advice. These issues, and the potential for a valuable administrative claim, are yet another reason for vendors to get good legal advice as soon as they learn of a bankruptcy filing. Debtors also need to get good advice, both legal and financial, so they can factor in how the requirement to pay for these pre-petition goods as an administrative claim will impact their cash needs.

Stay Tuned. This provision has been in effect for only one year, and applies only to cases filed after BAPCPA took effect on October 17, 2005. No formal court decisions have addressed, much less answered, these open questions. I expect bankruptcy courts will start to answer some of these questions in the coming months, and I'll keep you updated on those developments. 

Reclamation: Can A Vendor "Get The Goods" From An Insolvent Customer?

Although vendors sell goods to get paid, it doesn't always work out that way. If the customer is insolvent or files bankruptcy, the vendor may be stuck with an unpaid account. To make matters worse, some customers (especially those with limited prospects for financing) may even "load up" on inventory and then file bankruptcy without paying. Regardless of why it happens, no one wants to ship goods and not get paid.

Some vendors, however, may be able to take advantage of a special, although limited, right to get back or "reclaim" certain of the goods. This reclamation right is part of both the Uniform Commercial Code and the Bankruptcy Code. The recent 2005 amendments to the bankruptcy laws, known as the Bankruptcy Abuse Prevention and Consumer Protection Act of 2005 (called "BAPCPA"), made some significant changes that have enhanced a vendor's rights in a bankruptcy. This post discusses how reclamation rights play out both before and after bankruptcy.

Reclamation before bankruptcy. If the customer has not filed for bankruptcy, a vendor's reclamation rights are governed by the Uniform Commercial Code (known as the "UCC"). UCC Section 2-702 is the UCC"s reclamation statute. It provides a seller with the right to reclaim goods that a customer received on credit "while insolvent" if the seller makes a demand within ten days after the customer received the goods. This 10-day period means that, absent a bankruptcy, a vendor's reclamation right will be limited to reclaiming only those goods received by the customer in the ten days prior to the demand.

  • Under the UCC, "insolvent" means (A) having generally ceased to pay debts in the ordinary course of business other than as a result of good faith dispute; (B) being unable to pay debts as they become due; or (C) being insolvent within the meaning of federal bankruptcy law.
  • Under the federal Bankruptcy Code, insolvent means that the entity's debts exceed the value of its assets at a fair valuation. This is essentially a balance sheet test but, importantly, one using market value and not financial reporting standards such as GAAP. Because they are prepared for a different purpose, GAAP balance sheets tend to overstate asset values and understate actual liabilities compared to the bankruptcy balance sheet test. Companies that might seem solvent under GAAP could be insolvent under the UCC or the Bankruptcy Code.
  • If the customer misrepresented its solvency in writing during the three months before the delivery of the goods in question, then the 10-day limitation does not apply.

The UCC reclamation demand. To exercise a reclamation right before bankruptcy, the vendor must make a demand. The demand should be in writing, directed to the customer, identify which goods are being reclaimed to the extent that information is available, include a general statement reclaiming all goods received by the customer from the vendor during the applicable time period, and demand that the goods be segregated. Vendors should consult with counsel to be sure the demand adequately protects their reclamation rights.

Reclamation after bankruptcy. Because of changes made in the 2005 amendments to the Bankruptcy Code, applicable to all bankruptcy cases filed on or after October 17, 2005, the filing of a bankruptcy now actually expands a vendor's reclamation rights. These new provisions apply in both Chapter 11 reorganization cases and Chapter 7 liquidation cases. Some of the key changes include:

  • A new, 45-day bankruptcy reclamation right has been added to Section 546(c) of the Bankruptcy Code. Prior to this change, the Bankruptcy Code had merely incorporated the UCC's 10-day period. Now, once a bankruptcy is filed, a vendor can assert a reclamation demand for goods received within 45 days of the bankruptcy filing.
  • The goods must have been sold in the "ordinary course" of the vendor's business and the debtor must have received the goods while insolvent (using the Bankruptcy Code's definition of insolvent discussed above).
  • The reclamation demand must be in writing and made within 45 days of the receipt of the goods by the customer (now the debtor in bankruptcy).
  • If the 45-day period expires after the bankruptcy case is filed, the vendor must make the reclamation demand within 20 days after the bankruptcy filing.
  • As with pre-bankruptcy demands under the UCC, the demand should identify the goods being reclaimed, include a general statement reclaiming all goods received by the debtor from the vendor during the 45-day period, and demand that the goods be segregated. Vendors may also want to file a notice of reclamation with the bankruptcy court.

Sold goods and other issues. Whether before or after a bankruptcy filing, a vendor will lose its right to reclaim any goods that the customer sells before or after receiving the vendor's reclamation demand. 

  • Absent an agreement with the customer or a reclamation program approved by the bankruptcy court (see this example from the Delphi case, which was filed before the new BAPCPA rules took effect), a vendor may be forced to seek and obtain a court order preventing further sales of goods while its reclamation claim is pending. 
  • This "sold goods" problem has probably become more important because BAPCPA removed language from the prior version of Section 546(c) that had allowed a bankruptcy court to give a reclaiming vendor an administrative claim (with priority over unsecured claims and certain other claims) in lieu of a return of the goods.
  • Both the UCC and the Bankruptcy Code require that the debtor itself must have received the goods for them to be reclaimed. Thus, goods that are drop shipped or otherwise delivered first to the debtor's own customer likely will not be able to be reclaimed.
  • If the debtor made a misrepresentation of its solvency and then filed bankruptcy, it's unclear whether the 45-day rule in bankruptcy will govern or whether, like under the UCC, no time limit will apply. Keep in mind, however, that often goods shipped as far back as 45 days or longer, and sometimes even as few as 10 days for debtors with fast inventory turns, may already have been sold and thus will not be subject to reclamation. 

Rights of secured creditors. A vendor's reclamation right is further limited by the possibility that the debtor may have granted a bank or other creditor a security interest in the goods, which will be senior to the reclamation right.  As amended in 2005, Section 546(c) now expressly makes reclamation rights subject to the prior rights of a secured creditor with a security interest in goods or their proceeds.

New administrative claim for 20-day goods. Even if a vendor fails to make a reclamation demand, all may not be lost. A new Bankruptcy Code section, Section 503(b)(9), added by BAPCPA, gives vendors an administrative priority claim for the value of any goods received by the debtor within 20 days prior to the bankruptcy filing if the goods were sold in the ordinary course of the debtor's business. (I intend to discuss this new provision in a future post.) For now, note that it may be an important "fall back" right for vendors who fail to make a reclamation demand or who are unable to reclaim goods for other reasons.

Impact of new reclamation right on debtors and other creditors. With every new right also comes new burdens. Vendors certainly have greeted as good news the ability to reclaim goods received by a debtor as far back as 45 days. The impact of these changes on debtors, however, remains unclear. Some bankruptcy attorneys wonder whether this expanded reclamation right, together with the administrative claim for 20-day goods and certain other changes made by BAPCPA, will make it more difficult for debtors to reorganize or otherwise to pay unsecured creditors.

As always, get good legal advice. Reclamation can involve a number of twists and turns. Vendors who think they may have reclamation rights should be sure to get legal advice immediately upon learning of a customer's insolvency or bankruptcy to protect their interests, just as debtors should to know their own rights in response to reclamation demands.

Bankruptcy Asset Sales: What Parties With Contracts Should Watch For

In many corporate bankruptcy cases, the debtor will use the bankruptcy process to sell its assets and to assume and assign valuable leases, executory contracts, and licenses (see earlier posts on what happens to leases in bankruptcy, to executory contracts, and to intellectual property licenses, a special type of executory contract). 

This post discusses some mechanics of the bankruptcy sale process and points out how parties to executory contracts and leases can protect their rights. (A discussion of the sale process from the buyer's perspective can be found here.)

The Section 363 sale.  A bankruptcy asset sale often will happen in the first few weeks or months of a Chapter 11 case, rather than as part of a plan of reorganization. Frequently this will involve a sale of all or substantially all of a debtor's business as a going concern. You may hear the sale referred to as a "Section 363 sale" because Section 363 is the key Bankruptcy Code section that governs a debtor's sale of assets in bankruptcy. Regardless of what is being sold, the debtor must seek bankruptcy court approval of the sale and of any effort to transfer executory contracts, licenses, and leases to the buyer. 

Sales "free and clear" of liens. When the debtor files a motion seeking to sell its assets, it usually will ask to do so free and clear of liens. The term "lien" includes everything from UCC security interests filed by banks or other secured lenders taking the debtor's assets as collateral for loans to judgment and other types of liens. In a Section 363 sale, a debtor may propose to sell the assets and hold the sale proceeds in a separate account, with the secured creditors’ liens being transferred over to those funds. Debtors ask for authority to sell the assets "free and clear" of liens because the buyer wants clear title to the assets, unencumbered with any of the debtor's old debts and liens.

Motion to assume and assign executory contracts and leases. The debtor will typically file another motion (or may combine it with the motion to sell free and clear) seeking authority to assume and assign to the buyer certain executory contracts and leases.  If you are a party to an executory contract or lease, you should follow the sale process closely because your rights could well be affected. 

  • The debtor will likely send out a notice to parties to executory contracts and to landlords with a list of the contracts and leases proposed to be assumed and assigned. This is a very important document and you or your counsel should review every page carefully. 
  • The notice typically will list the amount the debtor proposes to pay to “cure” any defaults. The debtor must cure any defaults in cash before the contract or lease can be assumed and assigned to the buyer. Very often the notice will indicate that the proposed cure amount for some contracts or leases is zero or it may leave the amount blank with an asterisk stating that the debtor believes that no cure amount is owed. 
  • Here's an example of a notice, with a fairly typical multi-page chart listing scores of contracts to be assumed and assigned as part of the sale and indicating proposed cure amounts. 

Scream or die. This isn't a warning in a horror film but a phrase bankruptcy lawyers have coined to describe a creditor's requirement to file an objection by the stated deadline or face the loss of your rights. (You have to admit it's catchy.) To put it in less vivid terms, if you want to object (1) to the assignment of your executory contract, license, or lease at all, (2) to its assignment to the particular buyer proposed, or (3) even to the amount proposed to be paid to cure defaults, you have to file a written objection by the deadline listed in the notice. If you don't, the debtor will ask the bankruptcy court for an order approving the transfer of your contract, license, or lease, and that may well involve no cure payment at all. Because bankruptcy cases move quickly by necessity, "screaming" after the deadline will generally be too late.

Got counsel?  If you have an important executory contract, intellectual property license, or commercial lease with a debtor, having your counsel monitor the bankruptcy case and review any sale motions and assumption and assignment notices is the best way to protect your rights. Otherwise, you may miss an opportunity to receive a cure payment, to object to an assignment of an intellectual property license, or otherwise to exercise your rights in the bankruptcy case.

Doing Business With A Customer In Bankruptcy: What You Need To Know

An issue that comes up for creditors when a customer files bankruptcy is whether to keep doing business or end the relationship. Since debtors usually cannot survive without at least some level of trade support, generally they reach out to suppliers in an attempt to obtain trade terms, or at least a steady supply of goods, after a Chapter 11 bankruptcy is filed.  Often they put information about doing business in light of the bankruptcy (see this example from Delta Airlines) on a restructuring website or send out written communications to suppliers.

This post looks at the issue from the creditor's perspective. When a smaller customer files bankruptcy the "keep doing business" question is less critical, and the bankruptcy filing may just be the final straw that leads you to want to stop selling or providing services to the customer.  When one of your bigger customers files bankruptcy, the stakes go up -- often way up.  In either case, it's important to know the ground rules about doing business with a bankrupt customer.

Administrative claim for post-bankruptcy sales. In general, if the bankrupt customer is a Chapter 11 debtor in possession, it is legally permitted to pay for post-petition (post-bankruptcy filing) purchases of goods and services in the ordinary course of business. Such amounts are generally accorded administrative claim status, with priority over unsecured and certain other claims, and the debtor is authorized to pay them currently. (Chapter 7 trustees usually close a business down and do not place further orders.)

Make sure you have an administrative claim. The standard for allowance of administrative claims requires proof of the necessity and the value to the estate of the goods or services.  While this usually is the amount set forth in a contract or purchase order, to avoid any dispute it's best to reach a clear understanding with the debtor (or a bankruptcy trustee in the rarer instances when a Chapter 11 or Chapter 7 trustee is purchasing goods or services) before providing post-petition goods or services. Moreover, if there's any chance that your transaction would not be considered an "ordinary course" transaction, for example if it's an unusually large purchase or on unusual terms, you should consider seeking bankruptcy court approval to make sure the transaction is authorized and that your rights are protected.

Be careful of the executory contract twist. Your dealings with the debtor post-petition may also depend on the nature of your pre-petition relationship. 

  • If you have sold products through separate purchase orders or individual transactions without an overarching contract (see earlier post for a fuller discussion of such executory contracts) governing the relationship, generally you may choose whether to continue dealing with the debtor post-petition and on what terms you do so (e.g., whether to require cash in advance or continue with trade credit terms). If you have unpaid amounts based on your pre-petition transactions with the debtor, that claim would be treated like other unsecured claims separate from any post-petition claim. 
  • If you and the debtor are parties to a pre-petition contract that is executory (meaning both you and the debtor have material obligations to continue to perform), you cannot automatically stop performing post-petition unless the debtor has officially rejected the contract. Rejection means that the debtor has decided to stop performing and the bankruptcy court has approved that decision. Alternatively, if the debtor has decided to continue to perform (assume) the contract, and the bankruptcy court has approved this assumption decision, the debtor will have to cure, in cash, any pre-petition amounts owed.
  • Until the debtor has made a decision about your contract, the debtor may be willing to make current post-petition payments under the contract. You should consider confirming this understanding with the debtor or its counsel in writing to protect your rights.
  • If you're concerned that you won't be paid for your post-petition performance or if you don't want to continue to perform for other reasons, you may need an attorney to file a motion to compel the debtor or trustee to assume or reject the contract, or to seek “adequate protection” payments pending that decision. Bankruptcy courts often give a Chapter 11 debtor a long time to make this decision, even until a plan of reorganization is confirmed.  However, the court may be willing to order that you be paid currently for post-petition amounts and/or clarify that you have an administrative priority claim for your post-petition performance.

Is the debtor creditworthy? While these legal issues are important, it's equally critical to assess the debtor's financial condition after bankruptcy.  A bankruptcy filing relieves a debtor from the obligation to pay pre-petition unsecured creditor claims, and this can make a substantial difference to a debtor's cash flow. Still, the debtor has to have sufficient liquidity to pay its post-petition administrative claims.

  • Many debtors obtain post-petition financing from lenders -- known as debtor in possession or DIP financing -- and this can provide the necessary liquidity to pay administrative claims. DIP financings are usually secured by a blanket security interest on all of the debtor's assets, however, putting the DIP lender ahead of even administrative claims in the event of default.  
  • While not common, debtors do sometimes default under DIP financings. When that happens, the DIP lender will often foreclose on the debtor's assets and the bankruptcy case will be converted to Chapter 7 liquidation. If so, not only will the DIP lender's debt be paid first from the estate's assets, but the administrative claims generated during the Chapter 11 case will become second in line to Chapter 7 administrative claims, such as the Chapter 7 trustee's fees and expenses and those of his or her counsel. 
  • For these reasons, it's still very important to be comfortable with a Chapter 11 debtor's financial condition and its wherewithal to pay for post-petition sales before extending post-petition credit. Most debtors are required to file post-petition monthly financial reports (here's an example from Delphi's bankruptcy case), and they can serve as one source of financial information.

Consult with bankruptcy counsel. These general rules govern most scenarios, but dealing with a debtor post-petition can be complicated and raise many issues unique to your situation. For this reason, it's best to get an attorney’s advice before engaging in any significant transactions with a debtor.

Commercial Real Estate Leases: How Are They Treated In Bankruptcy?

Much like executory contracts, commercial real estate leases are governed by special rules in bankruptcy. If a lease's term has not yet expired, it is known as an “unexpired lease” (yet more clever bankruptcy terminology). This post explores how landlords and tenants are treated in bankruptcy, first in the more common situation of a tenant's bankruptcy and then briefly in the context of a landlord's bankruptcy.

Assumption and rejection. If the debtor is the tenant under an unexpired commercial lease, it must either assume or reject the lease within 120 days of the filing of bankruptcy. The court can extend this time period without the landlord’s consent for 90 additional days, making a total of 210 days, but any further extensions require the landlord’s prior written consent. If the lease is not assumed (or assumed and assigned) within this period, the lease automatically will be deemed rejected and the debtor will have to move out. 

  • Assumption of a lease requires the debtor to reaffirm the lease, cure all pre- and post-filing defaults, and show that it will be able to perform its obligations in the future. Additional restrictions must be met before a lease located in a shopping center can be assumed or assigned. 
  • Rejection of a lease means that the lease is breached, the debtor tenant has to vacate the property, and the landlord can file a claim against the debtor’s estate for the amount of any past or future rent. 

Capping a landlord's claim. If a lease is rejected, the landlord's damage claim for termination of the lease will be treated as a pre-filing unsecured claim.  In addition, the claim for future rent under the lease will be capped at an amount equal to the greater of one year's rent or fifteen percent of the remaining lease term, up to a maximum of three years' worth of rent, calculated from the earlier of the date the bankruptcy petition was filed or the date when the landlord recovered possession of, or the tenant surrendered, the premises. This ability to cap a landlord's claim in bankruptcy is often a major benefit to a debtor tenant, especially when the lease rejected is a long-term lease with rent obligations higher than current market rates. Landlords with security deposits, either in the form of cash or letters of credit, generally will be able to retain or draw on that security at least up to the amount of their capped bankruptcy claim.

Assignments of leases in bankruptcy. Although some leases contain restrictions or outright prohibitions on the tenant’s ability to assign the lease, many of these provisions will be unenforceable in bankruptcy. This can allow a debtor to “assume and assign” a lease to a third party over the landlord's objection. Since third parties will often pay substantial sums to take over a lease with rent obligations below current market rates, these below-market leases can be valuable assets for debtors.   

The recent bankruptcy law changes. The 210 day maximum lease decision period represents one of the major changes enacted with the Bankruptcy Abuse Prevention and Consumer Protection Act of 2005 ("BAPCPA"), discussed in an earlier post. Before these amendments took effect in October 2005, although debtors initially had only 60 days to assume or reject leases, they were permitted to seek extensions of this period without any statutory limitation. Cumulative extensions of a year or more, over a landlord's objection, were not uncommon under the pre-BAPCPA version of the Bankruptcy Code. That is no longer possible under BAPCPA.

Impact on retailers. This change is particularly significant for retailers with dozens or even hundreds of leased stores. In the past, retailers usually evaluated sales at stores for at least one holiday shopping season, and sometimes two, before deciding whether to retain the store. Now a retailer has only seven months to make that decision. This shortened period also impacts a retailer's ability to sell off its unwanted leases, especially through a sale of "designation rights" (the right to designate the assignee of a lease), as the buyer of those rights now will have a limited time to find buyers for those leases.

Landlord as debtor. Sometimes the debtor is not a tenant but a landlord. In that situation, although the debtor can reject a lease and no longer perform any of its duties as landlord, it cannot use bankruptcy to evict a tenant that prefers to stay in possession of the premises. In Section 365(h)(1) of the Bankruptcy Code, a special provision reminiscent of the rights of a licensee of intellectual property under Section 365(n), a tenant may elect to remain in the premises for the remaining term of the lease, plus any renewal or extension of the term that may be provided in the lease if enforceable under applicable state law. If it so elects, the tenant must continue to pay the rent required under the lease but can offset against that rent any damages caused by the landlord's nonperformance. 

Sublandlord as debtor. When the debtor is a sublandlord (also known as a sublessor), these protections generally do not apply and the subtenant is at risk of losing possession of the premises.  Because a sublandlord is a tenant under a master lease (with the "real" landlord), if the debtor rejects the master lease it, and its subtenants, usually will not have any continuing rights to possession of the premises. Subtenants looking to protect themselves in such a situation often obtain, as part of their sublease, a non-disturbance agreement, direct lease right, or similar protection from the master landlord.

Get good advice. Whether the debtor is a tenant or a landlord (or both), bankruptcy can have a significant impact on commercial real estate leases and subleases. For this reason, it is important to get prompt legal advice on your particular lease, both at the time the lease is negotiated and in the event of bankruptcy, to protect your rights.

Objections To Bankruptcy Claims: Ignore Them At Your Peril

If you're a creditor in a bankruptcy case and diligently file a proof of claim on time, often months or even years may go by before you hear anything further about your claim from the debtor, bankruptcy trustee, or any other party. In fact, the only thing you may hear about your claim for a long time is an offer to purchase it made by one or more claims buyers

No news is not always good news. Unfortunately, the passage of time may lead you to believe that no objection to your claim will ever be filed. However, the urgency of reorganizing a debtor's business or liquidating its assets means that the claims objection process is typically left until near the end of the bankruptcy case, often after a plan of reorganization has been confirmed in a Chapter 11 case. As a result, an objection to your claim may be brought long after you filed it. When filed, the objection may assert that your claim amount doesn't square with the debtor’s books and records or it may be based on any number of other grounds specific to the nature of your claim. 

Is that an objection to my claim? When an objection is filed, it may not always be obvious at first. While an objection may clearly identify that it is directed to your claim, in large cases the debtor or other estate representative has so many claims to address that the objection to your claim will most likely be combined with others. Instead of a pleading specifically mentioning your name in its title or text, the objection may have a name such as “Notice of Debtors' Fourteenth Omnibus Objections To Claims (Substantive)” or some similarly titled document

  • Be careful: the format of these objections can be a trap for the unwary.  Buried within the objection’s many pages of text and attached exhibits may be a few lines, often in a list or chart, identifying that your claim is one of dozens to which an objection has been filed. 
  • Whatever the objection's name or format, the point is the same: ignore it at your peril.  If you don't respond to the objection timely your claim will likely be disallowed and you will recover absolutely nothing from the bankruptcy estate.

Diligence is critical. As in other legal contexts, protecting your rights in a bankruptcy case requires diligence. This can be a significant task. In major bankruptcy cases, literally thousands of pleadings can be filed during the course of a case. Many of these will be served on creditors and other parties, whether in paper or electronic form, yet only a few may be important to you or your claim. For this reason, it is critical that you or your attorney keep track of the pleadings filed in a bankruptcy case. As mentioned in an earlier post, there are often special websites designed to assist creditors in following large bankruptcy cases, in addition to the Court's own electronic filing system. 

Protect your rights.  The bottom line is, if you see anything that looks like a claim objection, you should review all of the pages carefully, including its exhibits. If an objection to your claim is filed, a timely response will be required to protect your rights. Otherwise, you may find yourself with a disallowed and worthless claim.

Trademark Licensor In Bankruptcy: Special Risk For Licensees

In an earlier post I discussed how a recent district court case gave trademark owners a leg up when a licensee files for bankruptcy. This begs the question: Does the advantage switch back to the licensee if the trademark owner files for bankruptcy? The answer generally, and perhaps surprisingly, is no. 

Limited protection of Section 365(n). Of course, it can be devastating for a licensee to lose access to licensed intellectual property. Often a licensee will build in licensed technology into its products or develop an entire business line or brand around a licensed trademark.  Recognizing how important in-licensed IP can be, in 1988 Congress added Section 365(n) of the Bankruptcy Code, giving licensees of certain types of intellectual property special protections in bankruptcy. These protections allow licensees to retain their rights to the licensed intellectual property – but there’s a catch. The Bankruptcy Code’s definition of “intellectual property” includes, among other things, patents, patent applications, copyrights, and trade secrets, but unfortunately for trademark licensees, it does not include trademarks.

Trademark licensee's special risk. With no special protection, the trademark licensee faces the risk of having its license, a form of executory contract, rejected by the trademark owner in bankruptcy. If the trademark owner decides that the license is now unfavorable and a better deal can be had under a new license agreement with someone else, the trademark owner likely will reject the existing trademark license agreement and terminate the licensee’s rights to use the mark. The enforceability of phase-out provisions, which allow a licensee to continue to use a mark for a limited time period after a license is terminated, is unclear. Regardless, the trademark licensee eventually will lose its rights to the trademark following rejection. In some cases the ability to re-license can be of great value to a trademark owner in bankruptcy, and thus to its creditors, but it puts the licensee at substantial risk.

The bundled license. What about a license covering both trademarks and other intellectual property that is protected by Section 365(n)? Often a license of software or other products that involve copyrights or patents will include a license to use an associated trademark. In that case, even if the license were rejected, the licensee would have Section 365(n) rights to retain the "bankruptcy intellectual property" -- in this example the rights to the copyrighted or patented IP -- but would still lose the trademark license.  One case so holding is In re Centura Software Corp., 281 B.R. 660 (Bankr. N.D. Cal. 2002).  You can read that interesting decision here.

How can trademark licensees protect themselves? There are a few, albeit limited, strategies available for trademark licensees to protect themselves. Whether you are a trademark licensee or licensor, be sure to get advice from a bankruptcy attorney on your specific situation.

  • Unbundle the payments. In negotiating bundled licenses, the licensee should anticipate the prospect of losing rights to the trademark if a bankruptcy is filed. One approach would be to separate out any royalty or license payments for the trademark from those related to the other intellectual property being licensed. This way, the licensee can avoid having to pay amounts allocable to the rejected trademark license in order to retain its other IP license rights under Section 365(n). 
  • Take ownership of the mark. Would-be licensees with enough leverage sometimes demand that the trademark and its goodwill be transferred to them, coupled with a license back to the now-former trademark owner. This is perhaps the most effective method, but also the least likely to be achieved.
  • Get a security interest. Another strategy involves taking a security interest in the mark or the licensor's other assets to secure the damage claim that the licensee would have if the trademark owner rejects the license. Licensees pressing for a security interest do so in part hoping that a debtor licensor faced with a secured claim for rejection damages may decide against rejecting the license in the first place.
  • Oppose a rejection motion. Once a bankruptcy is filed, a trademark licensee should engage counsel right away and consider challenging a debtor or trustee's decision to reject the trademark license. If little good would come of the rejection for the debtor or its creditors, the licensee could oppose the motion arguing that the decision to reject is an inappropriate exercise of the debtor's business judgment. Although such objections are rarely sustained, if successful this strategy could allow the licensee to continue to use the trademark without facing the consequences of a rejected license.

Short of these approaches, there is precious little trademark licensees can do to protect themselves from this bankruptcy risk. It is a fact that gives debtor licensors clear advantages and sometimes keeps trademark licensees up at night.

Infringement Claims: Is Bankruptcy The End Of The Line?

Defending intellectual property ("IP") litigation can be expensive and, if unsuccessful, often crippling for the defendant's business. Sometimes an accused infringer facing IP litigation will seek bankruptcy protection to invoke the automatic stay. Unless lifted by the bankruptcy court, the automatic stay will prevent further litigation against the debtor, outside of the bankruptcy claims process, for pre-bankruptcy claims. 

The collision between infringement litigation and bankruptcy, however, raises issues beyond the automatic stay, especially with respect to continuing and past infringement claims. This post addresses these questions in the context of both corporate and individual debtors.

Continuing Infringement

What if a corporate debtor continues to infringe?

If a corporation or other business debtor in Chapter 11 is continuing to infringe intellectual property rights, the IP owner may have what's known as an "administrative claim" in the debtor's bankruptcy case.  Administrative claims, as the name implies, are claims that result from the administration of the bankruptcy estate and include claims for payment for products and services delivered to a debtor post-petition and for fees and expenses of bankruptcy lawyers and other professionals advising the Chapter 11 debtor in possession and creditors committee. Administrative claims are paid ahead of all pre-petition unsecured claims and almost all other priority claims, and sometimes can have a major impact on a debtor's ability to reorganize. 

A recent decision by the U.S. Court of Appeals for the Sixth Circuit in the Eagle-Picher Industries Chapter 11 case held that post-petition patent infringement claims qualify as administrative claims. In that case, although the debtor faced a $20 million administrative claim related to patent infringement litigation, the court held that the claim survived confirmation of the debtor's bankruptcy plan.

A non-debtor IP owner may also be able to get relief from the automatic stay (see my earlier post on that topic) to pursue infringement claims, including to seek injunctive relief for continuing infringement, in a court other than the bankruptcy court. It is possible that the automatic stay will not even apply to post-petition acts of infringement, but IP owners and debtors should get advice from a bankruptcy attorney about their specific situation.

Are continuing infringement claims covered by an individual's bankruptcy discharge?

Individual debtors will generally get a discharge of their pre-bankruptcy debts. A decision from the U.S. Court of Appeals for the Federal Circuit earlier this year, however, makes clear that an individual who files bankruptcy does not get a free pass to keep on infringing a patent. In Hazelquist v. Guchi Moochie Tackle Company, Inc., 437 F.3d 1178 (Fed. Cir. 2006), the court held that the debtor's bankruptcy discharge was only retrospective, covering claims relating to acts prior to bankruptcy, and did not immunize the debtor from claims for continuing infringement. As a result, the court ruled that the patent holder could assert claims against the debtor outside of bankruptcy court for each act of post-petition infringement.  It's an interesting decision and the full opinion is available here.  You might also enjoy reading the Patently-O blog's post on the decision by Dennis Crouch, who seems to like the tackle company's name as much as I do. 

Past Infringement

What about claims for past infringement? 

An IP owner can file a proof of claim for past infringement claims, but that claim will most likely be considered an unsecured claim and may end up being paid cents on the dollar. Filing a proof of claim is certainly the less costly way to go, and with a corporate debtor may be the principal remedy available for past infringement damages. 

If the infringer is an individual, however, another question is whether claims for past infringement can be declared nondischargeable, allowing the IP owner to pursue the debt notwithstanding the bankruptcy discharge. (As discussed in an earlier post, the notion of nondischargeable debts applies only to individuals and not to corporations or other entities.) Although seeking a nondischargeability determination often doesn't make economic sense, owners of intellectual property sometimes believe that it's important to protect those rights through vigorous pursuit of infringers, even against those who file bankruptcy. 

So is an infringement claim nondischargeable? A recent decision from the Bankruptcy Appellate Panel (known in the trade as "the BAP") of the U.S. Court of Appeals for the Ninth Circuit said yes, at least when the claim is for truly willful copyright infringement.  Why?  Well, under the Bankruptcy Code, a debt that results from a "willful and malicious injury" is nondischargeable. In In re: Albarran, decided on July 24, 2006, the BAP held that a judgment for willful copyright infringement, which included an award of statutory damages, interest, and attorney's fees, involved "willful and malicious injury." The BAP's decision is available here

In essence, the BAP held that willful copyright infringement, involving an intent to harm or knowledge that one's actions were substantially certain to cause harm, (1) is an injury to the copyright holder and (2) statutory damages under the Copyright Act qualify as a debt arising from this injury even though the plaintiff may not have suffered identifiable economic damage.  Willful injury under the Bankruptcy Code requires that the debtor intend the consequences of his action, generally excluding negligent or reckless conduct.  In In re: Albarran, the BAP concluded that the particularly willful nature of the copyright infringement involved satisfied this requirement.  With willfulness determined, the court was able to imply the element of malice. 

Does the answer depend on the type of IP infringed?

The BAP's decision involves copyrights and not patents or trademarks, so the question remains whether willful patent or trademark infringement would also be considered a nondischargeable "willful and malicious injury" under the Bankruptcy Code. The BAP's decision did make several references to the kinship between copyright and patent law and noted that "patent infringement has historically been viewed as a tort because of its invasion of another's rights."  In 2004, in a case called In re Trantham, a BAP from a different circuit, the Sixth Circuit, held that a claim for willful patent infringement was nondischargeable. You can read that decision here. Although the answer is not settled yet, if a debtor were found to have engaged in intentional patent or trademark infringement, the odds are that a bankruptcy court would find damages for such conduct to be nondischargeable.

Is a BAP the same as the U.S. Court of Appeals?  

Although these BAP decisions are very instructive, a word of caution is in order.  Unlike a U.S. Court of Appeals itself, a BAP is made up of bankruptcy judges only, not federal circuit judges. Given a BAP's place in the judicial system's hierarchy, its decisions are not given the same precedential weigh as U.S. Court of Appeals decisions.  This means that it's possible for a U.S. Court of Appeals itself to reach a different conclusion. (In fact, an appeal to the Ninth Circuit from the BAP's In re: Albarran decision was just filed last week.) Still, the two BAP decisions in In re: Albarran and In re Trantham are well-reasoned and may be followed by other courts. 

Impact Of Asset Sale

Can a debtor sell assets free and clear of infringement claims?

Generally, a debtor will be able to sell its assets in a Section 363 bankruptcy sale free and clear of claims (see earlier post on asset sales), including claims for past infringement.  However, if an IP owner asserts claims for continuing infringement related to the assets and how they are used, the sale will in all likelihood not be free and clear of those continuing infringement claims. Instead, the purchaser could well end up buying the defense of an infringement lawsuit along with the assets.

A Final Note

Do last year's bankruptcy law changes have an impact?

Given the amendments to the Bankruptcy Code made by the Bankruptcy Abuse Prevention and Consumer Protection Act of 2005, even if an individual debtor got a discharge of a willful infringement claim, he or she would have a very hard time getting another discharge within the next eight years. The message to individual infringers in bankruptcy: discharge or not, better stop infringing.

Trademark Licensees In Bankruptcy: A Leg Up For Trademark Owners?

Apparently, until last November, no court had been called upon to resolve whether a trademark licensee in bankruptcy can assume, or assume and assign, a non-exclusive trademark license without the trademark owner's consent.  

The decision. We got the first answer to that question in a case called In re: N.C.P. Marketing Group, Inc., 337 B.R. 230 (D.Nev. 2005), when the U.S. District Court in Nevada held that trademark licenses are personal and nonassignable, absent a provision in the trademark license to the contrary. Click here for a copy of the N.C.P Marketing Group decision. In reaching its conclusion, the court held that under the Lanham Act, the federal trademark statute, a trademark owner has a right and duty to control the quality of goods sold under the mark:

Because the owner of the trademark has an interest in the party to whom the trademark is assigned so that it can maintain the good will, quality, and value of its products and thereby its trademark, trademark rights are personal to the assignee and not freely assignable to a third party.  

The U.S. Court of Appeals for the Ninth Circuit (which includes Nevada, California, and other western states) had previously interpreted the key Bankruptcy Code provision involved, Section 365(c)(1), to prevent a debtor from assuming an agreement when it does not have the right to assign it. (For a discussion about how bankruptcy can affect intellectual property licenses, including the impact of this earlier Ninth Circuit case, you may want to read my earlier post on the topic.) 

Building on this Ninth Circuit law, the trademark owner in the N.C.P. Marketing Group case argued that under trademark law the debtor could neither assume nor assign the non-exclusive trademark license at issue. The district court agreed, holding that the bankruptcy court correctly granted the trademark owner’s motion to compel the debtor to reject the trademark license, forcing the debtor to give up its license rights. 

Good news for trademark owners.  The decision is good news for trademark owners. Many have have long worried that if a licensee files bankruptcy it might be able to use the Bankruptcy Code’s general power to assume and assign executory contracts to assign trademark licenses to third parties over the trademark owner’s objection. The N.C.P. Marketing Group decision extends to trademark owners protections already recognized by many courts for patent and copyright holders. The case does not address whether the same rule would apply to exclusive trademark licenses, but given the trademark owner's similar rights and duties to control the quality of goods sold under a licensed mark, the result could be the same. 

Bad news for debtor licensees. The decision, of course, is bad news for trademark licensees that file bankruptcy.  If the decision is followed by other courts, trademark licensees in bankruptcy will be unable to assign their rights to third parties or even to keep those rights for themselves without the trademark owner's consent.  The value of these debtors, and their ability to repay creditors, could suffer as well.

On appeal. The district court's decision may not be the last word. The debtor has appealed to the Ninth Circuit, although a ruling could be a number of months away.  I will report on the Ninth Circuit's decision when it comes down.  In the meantime, this is only one district court decision, applying Ninth Circuit law, so its full impact has yet to be determined.

Just for kicks. Finally, for those interested, the trademarks involve the Billy Blanks® Tae Bo® fitness program.  At least until the Ninth Circuit rules on appeal, the district court's decision will give trademark owners like Billy Blanks a "leg up" in their efforts to control their marks. 

Selling A Bankruptcy Claim: Opportunity And Risk

At one time or another just about every creditor in a large corporate Chapter 11 bankruptcy case will receive an offer to purchase the creditor's claim.  These offers typically come from professional claims traders, most of which are in the business of buying claims at a discount to what they believe will be the claims' ultimate value.  Some claims buyers, including hedge funds and other distressed debt investors, may buy claims with the strategic objective of controlling the direction of the Chapter 11 case by owing a substantial percentage of one or more classes of creditors. 

How do claims buyers find out about your claim? Within the first few weeks after a bankruptcy is filed, the debtor must file schedules of its assets and liabilities.  Creditors holding secured claims are listed on Schedule D and those with unsecured claims are listed on Schedule F.  These schedules show the amount the debtor believes it owes each creditor and whether it thinks the claim is disputed, contingent, or unliquidated.  Claims buyers will often first contact creditors with claims listed as being undisputed, not contingent, and liquidated because those claims are less likely to be subject to litigation later in the bankruptcy case. 

If you express interest in selling your claim, you may be sent a "confirmation" document with key terms such the percentage on the dollar to be paid and the amount of the claim to be purchased.  The actual document that transfers the claim, however, is usually a separate "claim assignment agreement."  You should carefully review all of the documentation, including the claim assignment agreement, before committing to sell your claim.

Selling a claim can sometimes be beneficial, but there are also risks.  When evaluating whether to sell your claim, here are some of the key points to keep in mind:

  • Liquidity.  The main advantage of selling your claim is getting some cash for it now.  Although creditors often believe that selling their claim will also eliminate any further risk of loss, for the reasons discussed below claim assignment agreements usually keep you at risk even after you sell your claim.  If you're willing to accept those risks, you can get immediate liquidity by selling your claim instead of having to wait months or years to receive whatever payment -- which sometimes is in the form of stock or debt instead of cash -- the bankruptcy estate ultimately distributes.
  • Price.  Given the claims buyer's usual objective of buying at a discount, coupled with the time value of money, the price you are offered could end up being lower than the value you could recover if you held your claim and waited for distributions to be made later in the case. The price offered for claims can also rise or fall over time as more information about creditors' likely recovery becomes available.  
  • Read the fine print.  Occasionally, claims buyers add detailed provisions and representations to the claim assignment agreement that operate to give the buyer an option to "put" or sell all, or the disputed part, of the claim back to you upon the mere filing of an objection or other challenge to the claim -- even if the objection is ultimately defeated. Why? Well, if the price paid for your claim later turns out to have been too high, the claims buyer might use the filing of a claim challenge to get its money back, plus interest. Since commonplace events such as claim objections and preference actions may be classified as triggering "challenges," it's important to watch out for these provisions.
  • Defending the claim.  Often the claims buyer will put a provision in the claim assignment agreement requiring you to defend the claim against any objection at your own expense, and to pay the claims buyer back for any portion of the claim that might be disallowed.  If a portion of your claim is disputed, however, you may well want the right to defend the claim so you can keep what you've been paid. Either way, you may incur costs in the bankruptcy case after you sell your claim.
  • Setoff or other special claims.  Claim assignment agreements may also include provisions limiting your right to assert a setoff or recoupment against the debtor (concepts discussed in an earlier post) or requiring you to pay back all or a portion of the purchase price if you do.  If you have significant setoff rights, be careful to preserve those rights if you sell your claim. Likewise, if you have an administrative claim or reclamation claim (which could be paid at 100 cents on the dollar), be sure it's clear how those valuable rights will be treated.
  • Creditors' committee.  If you're serving on the official committee of unsecured creditors in a Chapter 11 case, you should get legal advice on whether, or under what conditions, you may sell your claim.  You likely will have received confidential information about the debtor while on the creditors' committee, and this could restrict your ability to sell your claim.  Generally, you will also have to resign from the committee if you sell your claim.  
  • Court-ordered restrictions.  In some cases, bankruptcy courts may restrict creditors -- especially those with very large claims -- from selling their claims.  This is done to preserve the tax benefits of a debtor's net operating losses or NOLs, which can be lost if ownership of a large amount of claims or equity interests changes.  As this example shows, these orders can be very complicated and you may want to consult with a bankruptcy attorney to determine whether any restrictions apply to you.

If you sell your claim, you will often be required to sign an additional document with a name such as "Evidence of Transfer of Claim," which does not mention the price paid and which will be filed with the bankruptcy court.  Thereafter, you may receive a notice from the bankruptcy court that the claims buyer has filed the Evidence of Transfer of Claim document and giving you 20 days to object to the transfer.  This notice is designed to prevent unscrupulous individuals from fraudulently assigning claims to themselves and is only a formality in a legitimate claims sale.

Claims buyers can provide creditors with a ready market for their claims, generating liquidity months or years before creditors otherwise would receive a distribution from the bankruptcy estate.  Selling a claim is not risk free, however, so be sure to consult with a bankruptcy attorney for specific advice on how best to protect your rights if you do choose to sell.

Intellectual Property Licenses: What Happens In Bankruptcy?

The major role intellectual property, or "IP," plays in our economy makes intellectual property licenses an especially significant type of executory contract.  Whether you are a licensor or licensee, it's important to know what can happen to IP licenses when a bankruptcy is filed.

Licensor in bankruptcy.  A licensor in bankruptcy (or its bankruptcy trustee) has the option of assuming or rejecting a license. Generally, a debtor licensor can assume a license if it meets the same tests (cures defaults and provides adequate assurance of future performance) required to assume other executory contracts.  Many licensees will not have a problem with assumption of their license as long as the debtor can actually continue to perform. Instead, the real concern for licensees is the fear of losing their rights to the licensed IP, which often can be mission critical technology, if the license is rejected.

  • Special protections. Recognizing this concern, the Bankruptcy Code, in Section 365(n), provides licensees with special protections.  If the debtor or trustee rejects a license, under Section 365(n) a licensee can elect to retain its rights to the licensed intellectual property, including even a right to enforce an exclusivity provision. In return, the licensee must continue to make any required royalty payments. The licensee also can retain rights under any agreement supplementary to the license, which includes source code or other forms of technology escrow agreements.  Taken together, these provisions protect a licensee from being stripped of its rights to continue to use the licensed intellectual property.
  • Watch out for trademarks. While many people would expect intellectual property to include trademarks, the Bankruptcy Code has its own limited definition of "intellectual property." The bankruptcy definition includes trade secrets, patents and patent applications, copyrights, and mask works.  Importantly, however, it does not include trademarks. This distinction means that trademark licensees enjoy none of Section 365(n)'s special protections and those licensees are at risk of losing their trademark rights in a bankruptcy.

Licensee in bankruptcy.  The law is different when an IP licensee files bankruptcy.  The Bankruptcy Code, in Section 365(c)(1), contains an exception to the general rule that executory contracts can be assumed and assigned to third parties if defaults are cured and adequate assurance of future performance is demonstrated. The exception kicks in when "applicable law" precludes such an assignment absent consent of the nondebtor party. 

  • Restrictions on assignment. Case law from several United States Courts of Appeals holds that "applicable law" -- here patent and copyright law (and perhaps trademark law) -- in fact precludes an assignment of rights under an intellectual property license unless the IP owner has consented.  These courts have ruled that non-exclusive patent and copyright licenses are personal and nonassignable. As a result, a patent or copyright holder can prevent a debtor licensee from assuming and assigning a non-exclusive license to a third party without the licensor's consent. 
  • License at risk. In the Ninth Circuit, which includes California, a licensor not only can stop a debtor from assigning the license to a third party, it can even prevent a debtor from keeping the license for itself.  Although the reason is technical, stemming from how the Ninth Circuit has interpreted Section 365(c)(1) of the Bankruptcy Code, the impact can be very real. For those interested, the landmark Ninth Circuit decision on this point is In re Catapult Entertainment, Inc.,165 F.3d 747 (9th Cir. 1999). 

Get advice. The interplay between bankruptcy and intellectual property law is complex.  Whether you are a licensor or licensee, you should get legal advice about your specific license agreement and the ways you may be able to protect your rights if a bankruptcy is filed.  Likewise, companies that anticipate having to file bankruptcy should pay careful attention to their IP licenses before they file.

Setoffs And Bankruptcy

Many businesses not only sell products or services to another company, they also buy products and services from that company.  If you do business with a customer or vendor and you each end up owing the other money, you may have the right to "set off" the amount the other company owes you against the amount you owe it.  

Setoff. When a complete setoff is made, no cash changes hands but each side's debt to the other is canceled. In some business relationships, including in the telecommunications industry, these kinds of cross-debts occur frequently and setoffs can be an important part of the payment structure. In others, setoffs only come up if one side fails to pay what it owes.  The term is also used to describe a bank's right to sweep or set off the amounts owed on a loan against amounts the borrower has on deposit at the bank. 

Recoupment. A related concept called "recoupment" is similar to a setoff but it applies only when the offsetting amount or other defense to payment arises from the same contract or transaction that gives rise to your debt to the other company.

Impact of bankruptcy. The U.S. Bankruptcy Code does not create any setoff rights, but with certain limitations it does recognize the rights that exist under other applicable law.  However, with a bankruptcy filing comes a new risk that is similar to the preference risk that arises when you receive a direct payment before a bankruptcy.

  • If you made a setoff within 90 days before the bankruptcy filing, the debtor company (or its bankruptcy trustee, if one has been appointed) may have a right to sue you to recover the amount of that pre-bankruptcy setoff.  
  • Be sure to maintain detailed records of any setoffs made, along with the amounts each side owed the other during the business relationship. These records can be very helpful to your defense if such a claim is ever brought.

Setoff after bankruptcy. Making a setoff after a bankruptcy is filed -- also known as a "post-petition" setoff -- is allowed only in narrow circumstances.  Among other technical requirements, the debts have to be mutual between you and the actual debtor (not with one of its subsidiaries, for example) and they have to have arisen before the bankruptcy was filed.  Another very important point to remember is that you cannot make a setoff unless the bankruptcy court first grants you relief from the automatic stay that arises as soon as a company files for bankruptcy.

Get legal advice. This is a complex area of bankruptcy law and neither setoffs nor recoupments should be attempted after a bankruptcy has been filed without the advice of a bankruptcy attorney.  The old adage “Don’t try this at home” definitely applies. 

 

Texas District Court Holds Part Of New Bankruptcy Law Unconstitutional

In a decision on Wednesday, July 26, 2006, the United States District Court in Dallas ruled that a portion of the new bankruptcy law, the Bankruptcy Abuse Prevention and Consumer Protection Act of 2005 (also known as BAPCPA), unconstitutionally restricts attorneys when they provide legal advice to their clients. 

These provisions were part of BAPCPA's focus on consumers and the restrictions were aimed at preventing attorneys -- who are apparently included within the term "debt relief agency" under BAPCPA -- from advising individuals, among other things, to take on more debt if they are contemplating bankruptcy.  The court also held that other related provisions were constitutional, specifically one requiring disclosure of certain specific information to individuals who are considering filing for bankruptcy.

While the decision does not affect businesses directly, it's important to know when a court holds part of the bankruptcy law unconstitutional.  For those interested in learning more about the decision and the consumer-related provisions involved, I recommend that you read David Rosendorf's excellent post on the American Bankruptcy Institute's BAPCPA blog and Steve Jakubowski's equally informative post on his Bankruptcy Litigation blog.

Claims Against Individuals In Bankruptcy: Is Every Debt Discharged?

Usually, businesses have claims against other businesses.  Still, you may occasionally have a claim against an individual and it's good to know what can happen in that situation. 

The "no asset" case. Unfortunately, most individuals who file bankruptcy, especially those who file the more common Chapter 7 liquidation case, do not have any significant assets that can be sold to pay creditors.  What's more, the assets they do have -- such as IRAs, 401(k) accounts, etc. -- are usually exempt from creditors' claims.  Cases in which no non-exempt assets are available to pay creditors are known as "no asset" cases.  (Bankruptcy lawyers love imaginative names.)  In a no asset case, the bankruptcy court's notice will actually instruct you not to file a proof of claim unless later notified to do so. 

The "asset" case.  Sometimes there are enough non-exempt assets to produce at least some distribution to unsecured creditors.  While not very common in Chapter 7 cases, it could be that the individual has filed a Chapter 13 "wage-earner" case or a Chapter 11 personal reorganization case and expects to pay creditors some amount over time.  If so, a claims filing deadline known as a "bar date" will be set.  If you file a proof of claim form by the bar date, you may eventually receive a check, although typically this will be months or even years after the bankruptcy was filed.  In most cases involving individuals, the distribution to unsecured creditors is painfully small.

The bankruptcy discharge. In general, when individuals file bankruptcy, they will get discharged, or excused, from their pre-filing debts.  This is especially true in Chapter 7 and 11 cases and also in Chapter 13 cases if the individual debtor makes all of the payments required under his or her plan.  The discharge is part of what is often referred to as the "fresh start" that bankruptcy offers. 

Nondischargeable debts. Although recent changes to the bankruptcy laws have made it harder for individuals to file bankruptcy and get a discharge, many people are still able to do so.  That said, the law does call out certain kinds of debts and makes them "nondischargeable," meaning that they can be excluded from the scope of the bankruptcy discharge. These include debts arising from the debtor's fraud or other intentional bad acts, including when he or she obtained credit, and also to obligations for alimony, child support, student loans, and many taxes.  (So it's clear, the concept of a debt being nondischargeable applies only to individuals, not to corporations or other business entities.) 

Continue Reading...

Chapter 11 Cases: Using The Internet To Keep Track Of Case Developments

A fairly recent phenomenon, especially in large Chapter 11 bankruptcy cases, is the special website designed to help creditors and others keep track of developments in a particular reorganization case.  Among active cases right now, for example, you can follow the latest activity in the Delphi Chapter 11 case, the Refco bankruptcy, and the Delta Airlines case.  These websites generally have information about the attorneys representing the company and the creditors' committee, an electronic docket of pleadings filed in the case, access to a proof of claim form, and announcements about major events in the case.  

Many companies in Chapter 11 reserve a section of their corporate website for updates on their reorganization efforts, and they often make pleadings and other documents available there.  Adelphia is just one example.

Regardless of whether a special website has been created, you or your attorney can also obtain access to the pleadings and other documents filed in a Chapter 11 case (and any other type of bankruptcy case) through the relevant bankruptcy court's PACER system.  Another system, called Case Management/Electronic Case Files or CM/ECF, typically is open only to attorneys and other bankruptcy professionals with a need to file pleadings in a bankruptcy case.  Both services require pre-registration and payment of downloading or other fees where applicable.

Executory Contracts -- What Are They And Why Do They Matter In Bankruptcy?

If you start talking to a bankruptcy lawyer, before long you'll probably hear them use the term “executory contract.” Often they'll act as though people use the term everyday.  The truth is that bankruptcy lawyers are just about the only lawyers – much less business people -- who ever talk about executory contracts.  (I confess I do it too, but there's a really good reason.)

So what is an executory contract? The concept is fairly simple. It's a contract between a debtor and another party under which both sides still have important performance remaining.  Put another way, if either side stopped performing the contract it would be an actual breach of contract. 

Examples of executory contracts (and some common reasons why they might be executory) include:

  • Real estate leases (tenant has to pay rent/landlord has to provide space)
  • Equipment leases (lessee has to pay rent/lessor has to provide equipment)
  • Development contracts (development work required/payment required on milestones), and
  • Licenses to intellectual property (licensee can use only within scope of license/licensor must refrain from suing for licensed uses).

Having cleared up the definition, the next question is why executory contracts seem to matter so much in bankruptcy.  (The debtor even has to list them separately in its bankruptcy schedules.)

Continue Reading...

When A Public Company Files Bankruptcy

The Securities and Exchange Commission has published an overview discussing what often happens in a bankruptcy of a public company.  Written mainly for shareholders and bondholders, it contains a good general discussion of the topic. 

Automatic Stay Of Bankruptcy

One of the most fundamental protections for companies or individuals filing for bankruptcy is the automatic stay.  In fact, when someone says a company has sought "bankruptcy protection" they usually are referring to the "protection" of the automatic stay.  The automatic stay arises the instant a bankruptcy petition is filed.  It doesn't matter whether the petition is a voluntary one filed by the company itself or an involuntary one filed by creditors seeking to force the company into bankruptcy. 

The automatic stay operates as a stay -- really a statutory injunction -- against almost all collection actions by creditors against a debtor and its property based on debts existing before the bankruptcy petition was filed.  It is called the automatic stay because this stay arises automatically when the petition is filed without the need for any court order.  Among the actions stayed are:

  • Lawsuits 
  • Repossessions of assets
  • Foreclosure sales
  • Collection calls and notices, and
  • The making of setoffs.

Creditors should make every effort to avoid a violation of the automatic stay.  Violating the automatic stay is serious business (even when the government does it).  This is especially true if the debtor is an individual.  Not only are actions in violation of the stay generally held to be void, but in some cases creditors can expose themselves to a claim for damages or even punitive damages.  

Creditors can ask the bankruptcy court for relief from the automatic stay, for example to allow a lawsuit to continue or a foreclosure sale to take place.  While such "relief from stay" is occasionally granted, more often the request is denied to give the debtor more breathing room to reorganize its business.  In any event, seek assistance from a bankruptcy attorney if you have questions about or need relief from the automatic stay.

Buying Assets From An Insolvent Company -- Balancing Risk And Reward

Insolvent or nearly insolvent companies can present an attractive opportunity to purchase assets on the cheap, or at least at a significantly reduced cost.  Of course, a buyer purchasing assets from a troubled company wants to be as sure as possible that it is buying only the target's assets – and not also taking on all of the troubled company’s liabilities. This kind of specialized M&A deal raises issues that usually don't come up when acquiring a solvent company and that aren't always obvious at first. 

Several different strategies exist for balancing these risks with the potentially substantial rewards of a distressed asset acquisition.  Here is an overview of these issues.  A more extensive discussion focusing in particular on intellectual property assets, written by Cooley Godward intellectual property partner Gary Moore, can be found here.

Preferences -- How To Protect Yourself When Doing Business With A Financially Troubled Customer

It's bad enough when you can't collect everything you are owed because of a customer's financial problems.  We've all faced that situation at one time or another.  Unfortunately, the U.S. Bankruptcy Code can add an entirely different wrinkle to the problem called a "preference."  (The word comes from the idea that your successful collection efforts enabled you to get preferred treatment over your customer's other creditors that didn't get paid.)  

Without some planning, an unhappy scenario can develop even if you aggressively move to collect the account.  If the customer files for bankruptcy, the customer's bankruptcy trustee -- or even the customer itself -- may sue you to recover those payments you were lucky enough to collect, calling them preferences. 

There are defenses and, with some careful planning, you can act to protect yourself.  These range from waiting to ship new goods or provide new services until after you've received a payment to putting the customer on C.O.D. or other payment in advance arrangement.  Here are some pointers on minimizing the bankruptcy preference risk

Will The New Bankruptcy Law Affect Your Business?

On October 17, 2005, the most significant revision to U.S. bankruptcy law in a generation took effect.  If you followed the media’s coverage of the new law before it became effective, you could easily have assumed that the changes were aimed only at consumers filing bankruptcy to get rid of credit card debt.  There is no question that the new law, called the Bankruptcy Abuse Prevention and Consumer Protection Act of 2005 (bankruptcy lawyers just call it BAPCPA), was aimed at, and affects most significantly, individual consumers.  David L. Rosendorf of Kozyak Tropin & Throckmorton, P.A., in conjunction with the American Bankruptcy Institute, maintains an entire blog devoted to the new law's changes and how it is being implemented.  His blog has a natural focus on those consumer changes.

However, the surprising news is that the new bankruptcy law changes also contained a host of provisions that will affect businesses.  Many bankruptcy lawyers (this one included) think the law will make it more difficult for some businesses to reorganize, which could end up reducing recoveries for unsecured creditors.  That said, other provisions in the new law benefit certain unsecured creditors.  For an overview of how the new law will affect businesses and their creditors, look here or here -- and stayed tuned.